Pronto!

Manual

Pronto! 18

Pronto! 40

Pronto! QS

Software-Version 2.5
11.2008
BAUM Retec AG
Schloss Langenzell
69257 Wiesenbach

www.baum.de
Copyright 2008 BAUm Retec AG

All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced or

transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying, recording, or information recording and
retrieval systems, for any purpose, without the express written
permission of Baum Retec AG.

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information contained in
this publication is correct at the time of issue. Neither BAUM Retec AG,
nor its agents,
assume any responsibility for errors or omissions. Nor is any liability
assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information
contained herein.
Manual Structure
This manual is in three parts.

Part 1 is aimed at beginners who have little experience of computers

or similar technical apparatus. The novice will be taken step by step
through the processes of writing, editing, saving and deleting text, and
the retrieval of the date, time and battery strength – all in simple
words and with examples. Access to internal help, to the manual and
the use of the MP3 player will also be explained so that the beginner
can listen to the Pronto manual independently.

Part 2 gives a brief introduction to the installation of Microsoft

ActiveSync, necessary for the transfer of data from a computer under
Windows XP/200 or Microsoft Mobile Device Center for computer
under Windows Vista) .
You also get informations about furter programs and drivers.

Part 3 is aimed at users who are already familiar with the basic Pronto
functions and who wish to learn more about its other functions. This is
the real manual with a systematic structure describing the apparatus
itself, its general usage and more specific applications and functions in
individual chapters (word-processor, file manager, address book,
planner, speech output, MP3 player, calculator, data exchange with a
PC etc).

The appendices contain general notes and tips, and a reference section
with a list of the basic shortcuts which can be used to check familiar
functions.

The given description of the aplications and functions base on using

any Pronto Organizer: either Pronto 18 / Pronto 40 with Braille key
board Pronto QS / Pronto 40 with its normal keyboard (alphanumeric
key board resp. Qwert key board.
So this manual contains the corresponding shortcuts and key
combinations to execute commands or functions on Pronto (Qwert
mode as well as Braille mode) directly

All members of the organizer family Pronto can be used in braille mode
or qwert mode to execute commands.
You get braille mode
- Pronto 18: Use internal braille keyboard.
- Pronto 40: Use braille key board modul or switch qwert key board
to braille mode (FN+B)
- Pronto QS: Switch qwert key board to braille mode (FN+B)
You get qwert mode:
- Pronto 18: Connect an external key board.
- Pronto 40: Use qwert key board modul.
- Pronto QS: Use internal key board.:

You find basic commands and shortcuts for both modes in Chapter 3
“General usage”.

You find important notes of your safety in this manual directly after the
contens.
Table of Contents

Manual Structure.....................................................................................................3
Table of Contents....................................................................................................4
For your safety, repair, warranty...........................................................................16
Product Repair..................................................................................................16
Warranty............................................................................................................17
International Warranty.......................................................................................17
Part Ia - Introduction - First Steps on Pronto! 18..................................................18
Part Ib - Introduction - First Steps on Pronto! 40..................................................25
Part Ic - Introduction - First Steps on Pronto! QS.................................................34
Part II - Software Installation and further programmes.........................................41
Part III - Manual....................................................................................................43
1. Preface..............................................................................................................43
2a. Description of the Device (Pronto! 18)............................................................44
2.1 General........................................................................................................44
2.2 Buttons........................................................................................................44
2.3 Connectors and Interfaces..........................................................................45
2.4 Cables and Accessories..............................................................................45
2.4.1 Storage Cards.......................................................................................46
2.5 The Bag.......................................................................................................46
2.5.1 How to Use the Bag..............................................................................46
2.6 Battery and Charger....................................................................................46
2.6.1 Battery maintenance.............................................................................47
2.7 Care and Maintenance................................................................................48
2b. Description of the Device (Pronto 40).............................................................49
2.1 General........................................................................................................49
2.2 Elements on the upper surface...................................................................49
2.2.1 Keyboard..............................................................................................49
2.2.1.1 The standard keyboard modul (QWERT)..........................................50
2.2.1.2 The Braille Keyboard Modul..............................................................51
2.2.2 The Braille Display................................................................................51
2.2.3 Furter Elements and Buttons................................................................51
2.3 Elements on the sides of the device...........................................................52
2.3.1 The right side........................................................................................52
2.3.2 The left Side..........................................................................................52
2.4 Cable and accessories................................................................................52
2.4.1 Memory cards.......................................................................................53
2.5 The bag.......................................................................................................53
2.6 Battery and Charger (mains connection)....................................................53
2.6.1 Battery Charging...................................................................................53
2.6.2 Battery maintenance:............................................................................54
2.7 Care and maintenance................................................................................54
2c. Description of the Device (Pronto! QS)...........................................................56
2.1 General........................................................................................................56
 2.2 Key layout on the upper surface.................................................................56
2.3 Other keyboard elements............................................................................58
2.4 Cable and accessories................................................................................58
2.4.1 Memory cards.......................................................................................59
2.5 The bag.......................................................................................................59
2.6 Battery and Charger (mains connection)....................................................59
2.6.1 Battery maintenance:............................................................................60
2.7 Care and maintenance................................................................................60
3. General usage, functions and the Help system................................................62
3.1 Braille Mode and QWERTY mode..............................................................62
3.2 Working with the Navistick and the arrow keys..........................................62
3.3a Working with the Braille keys (Braille mode).............................................64
3.3b Working with the standard keyboard (QWERTY mode)...........................64
3.3.1a Inputting text (Braille mode)................................................................64
3.3.1b Inputting text (QWERTY mode)..........................................................64
3.3.2a Letter commands (Braille mode)........................................................64
3.3.2b Letter commands (QWERTY mode)..................................................65
3.3.3a Dot patterns and their assigned area (Braille mode).........................65
3.3.4a Functions on individual Braille keys (Braille mode)............................65
3.3.4b The functions of individual keys (QWERTY mode)............................66
3.4 Reading, highlighting and deleting text.......................................................66
3.4.1a Reading commands in Braille mode...................................................66
3.4.1b Reading commands in QWERTY mode.............................................66
3.4.2a Highlight text blocks (Braille mode)....................................................67
3.4.2b Highlight text block (QWERTY mode)................................................68
3.4.3a Delete text blocks (Braille mode)........................................................68
3.4.3b Delete text blocks (QWERTY mode)..................................................68
3.5a Navigate in the Planner and Addressbook (Braille mode)........................68
3.5b Navigate in the Planner and Addressbook (QWERTY mode)..................69
3.6 Working with menus....................................................................................69
3.6.1 Navigating in a menu............................................................................69
3.6.2 Selecting a menu entry.........................................................................70
3.6.3 Closing and opening menus.................................................................70
3.7 Working with dialogs...................................................................................71
3.7.1 Buttons..................................................................................................72
3.7.2 Edit boxes.............................................................................................72
3.7.3 Check Boxes.........................................................................................72
3.7.4 List Box.................................................................................................72
3.8 Working with the Braille display..................................................................73
3.9 General speech settings.............................................................................73
3.10 The Help system.......................................................................................74
3.10.1 Automatic help....................................................................................74
3.10.2 Detailed context help..........................................................................74
3.10.3 The Manual in the “Help” menu..........................................................75
3.11 The “Where am I?” function and repetition of spoken messages.............75
4. System Buttons, the REC-Button, keyboard lock, Reset Commands, Version
Information, Switch to Braille Mode / Qwert Mode...............................................77
4.1 System Buttons...........................................................................................77
4.2 REC Button (Voice Recorder).....................................................................77
4.3 Keybord Lock and Braille Mode Switch......................................................77
4.4 Reset Commands........................................................................................78
4.4.1 Application Reset..................................................................................78
4.4.2 Operating System Reset......................................................................78
4.4.3 System Reset.......................................................................................79
4.5 Version Information.....................................................................................79
5. Word processor.................................................................................................80
5.1 Writing text..................................................................................................80
5.1.1 Deleting text..........................................................................................80
5.1.2 Double Stroke.......................................................................................81
5.1.3 Insert formatting, date, and time...........................................................81
5.1.4 Set word- and character-echo..............................................................81
5.1.5 Special assignment of some Braille keys in Braille mode....................82
5.1.6 Word wrap and hiding of formatting characters...................................82
5.1.7 Position in the document......................................................................82
5.1.8 Setting the cursors shape.....................................................................83
5.1.9 Draging/jumping in the line display and margin settings......................83
5.2 Reading texts..............................................................................................84
5.2.1 Reading and navigation commands.....................................................84
5.2.2 Continuous reading..............................................................................84
5.3 Spelling........................................................................................................85
5.4 Editing functions..........................................................................................85
5.4.1 Highlighting...........................................................................................85
5.4.2 Cutting..................................................................................................87
5.4.3 Copying.................................................................................................87
5.4.4 Pasting..................................................................................................87
5.4.5 Deleting.................................................................................................88
5.4.6 Find and find next.................................................................................88
5.4.7 Replace.................................................................................................89
5.5 Saving documents.......................................................................................90
5.5.1 Save......................................................................................................90
5.5.2 Save as.................................................................................................90
5.5.3 Tips on saving in text-only format.........................................................91
5.6 New blank Document..................................................................................91
5.7 Opening documents....................................................................................92
5.7.1 Open (Edit mode).................................................................................92
5.7.2 Open read-only files (Reading mode)..................................................93
5.7.3 Closing documents...............................................................................93
5.8 Switching between open documents..........................................................94
5.8.1 Previous file..........................................................................................94
5.8.2 List of open files....................................................................................94
5.9 Mark position and jump to it........................................................................94
5.9.1 Mark position........................................................................................95
 5.9.2 Jump to marker.....................................................................................95
5.10 The “Navigate” menu................................................................................95
6. File Manager.....................................................................................................96
6.1 The “File” menu...........................................................................................96
6.1.1 New Folder...........................................................................................96
6.1.2 Open.....................................................................................................97
6.1.3 Delete...................................................................................................97
6.1.4 Renaming.............................................................................................98
6.1.5 Properties.............................................................................................98
6.2 The “Edit” Menu...........................................................................................99
6.2.1 Cut........................................................................................................99
6.2.2 Copy......................................................................................................99
6.2.3 Paste.....................................................................................................99
6.2.4 Highlighting.........................................................................................100
6.3 The “View” Menu.......................................................................................100
6.3.1 Details.................................................................................................100
6.4 The “Tools” Menu......................................................................................100
6.4.1 Memory Query....................................................................................100
6.4.2 Highlighted Objects............................................................................101
7. The mp3 player...............................................................................................102
7.1 Playing audio files.....................................................................................102
7.1.1 Playing individual audio files..............................................................102
7.1.2 Playing several audio files (album).....................................................103
7.1.3 Play options........................................................................................103
7.2 Playlists.....................................................................................................104
7.2.1 The “Playlist” dialog............................................................................104
7.2.2 Create new playlist (m3u file).............................................................104
7.2.3 Open playlist (m3u file).......................................................................105
7.2.4 Save playlist as an m3u file................................................................105
7.2.5 Place files or folders in the playlist.....................................................105
7.2.6 Change the position of a track in the playlist......................................106
7.2.7 Delete individual audio files from the playlist.....................................106
7.3 Info on the audio file..................................................................................106
7.4 Audio functions..........................................................................................107
7.4.1 Volume................................................................................................107
8. The Voice recorder (Dictaphone)....................................................................108
8.1 Recording a voice message......................................................................108
8.1.1 Recording with the REC key..............................................................108
8.1.2 Recording with the opened Voice Recorder.......................................108
8.2 Playback of a recording.............................................................................109
8.2.1 Playback with the REC key................................................................109
8.2.2 Recording with open Voice Recorder.................................................109
8.3 Deleting a recording..................................................................................110
8.4 Sorting voice recordings in the file list.......................................................110
8.5 Recording Quality......................................................................................111
8.6 Record CardID and Alarm Sound.............................................................111
 8.6.1 Record CardID....................................................................................111
8.6.2 Record Alarm Sound..........................................................................112
9. Calculator........................................................................................................113
9.1 Generalities and basic calculations...........................................................113
9.1.1 Calculations........................................................................................113
9.1.2 Editing calculations.............................................................................114
9.1.3 Navigating in calculations and results................................................114
9.1.4a How to enter numbers and operators (raille Mode).........................114
9.1.4b How to enter numbers and operators (QWERT Mode)....................115
9.1.5 Using the Clipboard............................................................................115
9.2 Settings and list views...............................................................................116
9.2.1 Settings...............................................................................................116
9.2.2 Calculations list...................................................................................116
9.2.3 The memory list and memory functions.............................................116
9.3 Scientific mathematical functions..............................................................117
9.3.1 Basic calculations...............................................................................117
9.3.2 Powers, logarithms, etc......................................................................118
9.3.3 Trigonometrical functions...................................................................118
9.4 User constants..........................................................................................118
9.5 Conversions..............................................................................................119
10. Planner..........................................................................................................120
10.1 Navigating in Planner..............................................................................120
10.1.1 The “Navigation” Menu.....................................................................120
10.2 The “File” Menu.......................................................................................121
10.2.1 New Appointment.............................................................................121
10.2.2 Recurrent Appointment.....................................................................122
10.2.3 Saving Appointments........................................................................123
10.3 Appointment Alarm and Reminder..........................................................123
10.3.1 The “Reminded Appointments” Dialog.............................................124
10.4 Editing an Appointment...........................................................................125
10.4.1 Changing an Appointment................................................................125
10.4.2 Deleting an Appointment..................................................................126
10.4.3 Find...................................................................................................126
10.5 The “View” Menu.....................................................................................126
10.5.1 Braille and Speech presentation of Appointments...........................127
10.5.2 Braille and Speech presentation of Date only..................................127
10.5.3 Default Settings................................................................................128
10.5.4 Filter..................................................................................................128
10.6 The “Tools” Menu....................................................................................129
10.6.1 Reminder..........................................................................................129
10.6.2 Delete old appointments...................................................................130
10.6.3 Categories Manager.........................................................................130
10.6.4 Export...............................................................................................130
10.6.5 Import................................................................................................131
10.7 Working with categories..........................................................................132
10.7.1 General remarks...............................................................................132
 10.7.2. Assigning categories in an appointment or filter.............................132
10.7.3 Define categories..............................................................................133
10.7.3.1 Define new categories or delete existing ones..............................134
10.7.3.2 Define categories from existing categories...................................134
11. Address book (Contacts database)..............................................................136
11.1 Structure of Contacts (Outline view and Detailed view)..........................136
11.2 Navigating in Contacts............................................................................136
11.2.1 The “Navigate” menu........................................................................137
11.3 The “File” menu.......................................................................................137
11.3.1 New contact......................................................................................137
11.3.2 Open a contact.................................................................................138
11.3.3 Saving contacts................................................................................138
11.4 The “Edit” menu.......................................................................................139
11.4.1 Delete a contact................................................................................139
11.4.2 Find and Find next............................................................................139
11.5 The “View” menu.....................................................................................140
11.5.1 Mask Selection.................................................................................141
11.5.2 Input masks......................................................................................141
11.5.3 Output masks (display masks).........................................................142
11.5.4 Speech settings................................................................................142
11.5.5 Sorting..............................................................................................143
11.5.5.1 The birthday list.............................................................................144
11.5.6 Filters................................................................................................144
11.6 The “Tools” menu....................................................................................145
11.6.1 Contact field information...................................................................145
11.6.2 Making a telephone call direct from Contacts..................................145
11.7 Synchronisation with Outlook..................................................................146
12. Mobile telephone...........................................................................................147
12.1 Set up the mobile ‘phone and Pronto......................................................147
12.2 Open the mobile ‘phone application........................................................147
12.2.1 The main dialog................................................................................148
12.3 Establish a connection............................................................................148
12.3.1 The settings dialog...........................................................................148
12.3.2 Connection problems........................................................................149
12.4 Making a call (telephoning).....................................................................149
12.4.1 The call dialog..................................................................................149
12.5 Write and send an SMS..........................................................................150
12.5.1 The Send SMS dialog.......................................................................150
12.6 Receive and read an SMS......................................................................150
12.6.1 The Read SMS dialog......................................................................151
13. Settings.........................................................................................................152
13.1 Audio and speech output........................................................................152
13.1.1 System voice....................................................................................152
13.1.2 Reading voice...................................................................................152
13.1.3 Device volume..................................................................................153
13.1.4 Equalizer...........................................................................................153
 13.1.5 Automatic help..................................................................................154
13.1.6 Last message...................................................................................154
13.1.7 Message list......................................................................................154
13.1.8 Where am I?.....................................................................................154
13.2 Braille.......................................................................................................155
13.2.1 Presentation......................................................................................155
13.2.2 Cursor...............................................................................................156
13.2.3 Standard Braille tables.....................................................................156
13.2.4 Alternative Braille tables...................................................................157
13.2.5 Loading the alternative/standard Braille tables................................157
13.2.6 Hide / Display Braille dots 7 and 8...................................................157
13.3 Keyboard.................................................................................................157
13.4 Date and time..........................................................................................158
13.5 Interfaces.................................................................................................159
13.5.1 Bluetooth...........................................................................................159
13.5.1.1 Activate/deactivate Bluetooth........................................................159
NB:...............................................................................................................160
13.5.1.2 Registration of Bluetooth devices..................................................160
13.5.2 External Braille display.....................................................................160
13.5.2.1 Connecting via Bluetooth..............................................................161
13.5.2.2 Connecting with a serial cable.......................................................161
13.6 Power Supply..........................................................................................162
13.6.1 Automatic shutdown.........................................................................162
13.6.2 The battery........................................................................................162
13.7 Outlook databases..................................................................................163
13.8 Mobile ‘phone settings............................................................................165
13.8.1 Mobile ‘phone profiles.......................................................................165
13.8.1.1 General elements of the partner profile dialog..............................166
13.8.1.2 Dialog elements for a Bluetooth connection..................................166
13.8.1.3 Dialog elements for a serial connection........................................166
13.8.2 The GPRS application......................................................................167
13.8.2.1 The options in the GPRS dialog....................................................167
13.8.2.2 Establish and save a RAS connection..........................................168
13.8.2.3 Launch RAS connection................................................................168
13.8.2.4 Consult or delete saved RAS connection profiles.........................169
13.9 Calibration...............................................................................................170
13.9.1 Compass...........................................................................................170
13.9.2 Barometer.........................................................................................170
13.9.3 Altimeter............................................................................................171
13.9.4 Battery (special chapter)...................................................................171
13.10 Presentation..........................................................................................172
13.10.1 Menu presentation..........................................................................172
14. Pronunciation Dictionary...............................................................................173
14.1 Add new words........................................................................................173
15. How to Synchronize and exchange Data.....................................................174
15.1 Installation of Microsoft ActiveSync resp. Mobile Device Center............174
 15.2 Get connected.........................................................................................174
15.2.1 As a Guest........................................................................................174
15.2.2 Full Partnership................................................................................175
15.2.3 Terminate conection.........................................................................176
15.2.4 Connection Problems.......................................................................176
15.3 Connection Settings................................................................................177
15.4 Accessing Pronto Files............................................................................177
15.5 Terminating a Connection.......................................................................177
15.6 File Conversion.......................................................................................178
15.7 Data Transfer Using a Card Reader.......................................................178
15.7.1 Identification of the Storage Card.....................................................178
16. Pronto as a Braille display............................................................................179
16.1 System requirements:.............................................................................179
16.1.1 Virgo Settings...................................................................................179
16.1.2 BLINDOWS Settings........................................................................179
16.1.3 Use with JAWS.................................................................................180
16.2 Connect PRONTO...................................................................................180
16.2.1 Comport Connection.........................................................................180
16.2.2 USB Connection...............................................................................180
16.2.3 Bluetooth Connection.......................................................................181
16.2.3.1 Installation and Pairing..................................................................181
16.2.3.2 Connection as a Braille Display.....................................................182
16.3 Pause or End Connection.......................................................................183
16.3.1 Stand-by Mode in PRONTO.............................................................183
16.4 Connection Problems – Tips...................................................................184
16.5 Pronto as a Braille input-keyboard..........................................................184
16.5.1 List of PC commands.......................................................................185
16.6 Pronto and BAUM’s Talks Braille Interface (TBI)....................................187
16.6.1 Pronto keys.......................................................................................187
16.7 Pronto and Mobile Speak or Mobile Speak Pocket................................188
17. System commands.......................................................................................189
17.1 Updates...................................................................................................189
17.1.1 Software Updates.............................................................................189
17.1.2 Installing or Reinstalling Pronto software.........................................189
17.1.3 Operating System Update................................................................190
17.1.4 BIOS Update.....................................................................................190
17.2 Further System Commands....................................................................190
18. Connecting an external Braille display.........................................................192
18.1 Build a profile and launch the connection...............................................192
18.2 End the connection.................................................................................192
19. Pronto Daisy Reader.....................................................................................193
19.1 Prepare Daisy Books..............................................................................193
19.1.1 Copy Daisy Books to the storage card.............................................193
19.1.2 Changing storage cards...................................................................194
19.2 Reading (playing) Daisy Books...............................................................194
19.2.1 Close a Daisy Book and open a new one........................................194
 19.3 Navigation in levels and spool functions.................................................195
19.3.1 Navigating in a book.........................................................................195
19.3.2 Jumping from page to page..............................................................195
19.3.3 Fast forward/rewind (spooling).........................................................196
19.4 Speed and volume..................................................................................196
19.4.1 Speed...............................................................................................196
19.4.2 Volume..............................................................................................196
19.5 Bookmarks..............................................................................................196
19.5.1 Setting a bookmark...........................................................................197
19.5.2 Jump to a bookmark.........................................................................197
19.5.2.1 Browsing Bookmarks.....................................................................197
19.5.2.2 Jumping to a specific bookmark....................................................197
19.5.3 Deleting bookmarks..........................................................................198
19.6 Calling up information.............................................................................198
19.6.1 Information on the book (total reading time)....................................198
19.6.2 Information on your position in the book (Where am I?)..................199
19.7 The Find function and its features...........................................................199
19.7.1 Find (search).....................................................................................199
19.8 Generalities and messages on a Braille display.....................................199
20. Clocks...........................................................................................................201
20.1 Timer.......................................................................................................201
20.2 Stopwatch................................................................................................202
20.3 Alarm Clock.........................................................................................203
21. Internet Radio...............................................................................................205
21.1 Requirements and general remarks........................................................205
21.1.1 Requirements for using the Internet radio application.....................205
21.1.2 General remarks on the Internet connection of Pronto’s Internet radio
.....................................................................................................................205
21.2 Opening the Internet radio application and listening to a radio station...206
21.2.1 Select and play radio stations from the main window......................207
21.2.2 Play, start, stop, pause and resume in the main window.................207
21.2.3 Save and play radio stations............................................................207
21.2.4 Detailed information on the station being played.............................208
21.3 Set genre and bitrate as search criteria and launch a new search.........208
21.3.1 The “Radio station” dialog................................................................208
21.3.2 The “Scan for radio stations” dialog.................................................209
21.4 Settings for output and background playing...........................................210
22. Email Client...................................................................................................212
22.1 Introduction and requirements................................................................212
22.1.1 General remarks...............................................................................212
22.1.2 Requirements for using the email application..................................212
22.1.3 Requirements for the email account (Mail server)...........................213
22.1.4 Summary of the access data for some email providers...................213
22.1.5 Connection problems and solutions.................................................216
22.2 Pronto’s mail application.........................................................................216
22.2.1 Open the email application...............................................................216
 22.2.2 The main view for email and the email folder...................................217
22.2.3 Receiving and sending messages....................................................217
22.2.4 Open and read emails......................................................................218
22.2.5 An email’s header and its data.........................................................218
22.2.6 Email functions in the word processor..............................................219
22.3 Opening an email account......................................................................219
22.3.1 Elements of the “Account” dialog.....................................................220
22.3.2 The “Add” and “Edit” dialog options..................................................221
22.4 Writing an email.......................................................................................222
22.4.1 Writing a new email..........................................................................222
22.4.2 Replying to an email.........................................................................223
22.4.3 Forwarding an email.........................................................................223
22.5 Deleting an email.....................................................................................223
22.6 Managing emails and email folders........................................................224
22.6.1 Setting up a mail folder.....................................................................224
22.6.2 Renaming mail folders......................................................................224
22.6.3 Deleting a mail folder........................................................................224
22.6.4 Marking emails.................................................................................225
22.6.5 Copying emails.................................................................................225
22.6.6 Moving emails...................................................................................225
22.6.7 Saving an email as a document.......................................................225
22.6.8 The save location of mail folders and emails...................................226
22.7 Information on the total number of emails in the mail folders.................226
23. MSN Messenger...........................................................................................227
23.1 Introduction and requirements................................................................227
23.1.1 General remarks...............................................................................227
23.1.2 Requirements for using the Messenger application.........................227
23.1.3 Requirements for a Messenger account..........................................228
23.1.4 Connection problems and solutions.................................................228
23.2 Pronto’s MSN Messenger application.....................................................228
23.2.1 Open the Messenger application......................................................228
23.2.2 Main view..........................................................................................229
23.2.3 The command menu in main view....................................................230
23.3 Sign in to Messenger..............................................................................230
23.3.1 Set the online status (My status)......................................................231
23.4 Build, edit or delete a profile....................................................................231
23.4.1 Build or edit a profile.........................................................................231
23.4.2 Delete a profile.................................................................................231
23.5 The contacts list......................................................................................232
23.6 Add and manage contacts......................................................................232
23.6.1 Establish contact with a contact from your contacts list (request).. .232
23.6.2 Display and change list membership for your contacts list..............233
23.7 The chat window.....................................................................................233
23.7.1 Start, continue or consult a chat.......................................................234
23.7.2 Leave and delete a conversation.....................................................235
23.7.3 Chats with more than one person (conference)...............................235
 23.7.4 Save a chat as text...........................................................................235
23.7.5 Reading mode..................................................................................236
23.8 Tone selection and Sound settings.........................................................236
23.9 Optional settings for the tones................................................................236
Appendix x1: Overview.......................................................................................237
x1.1 Short Device Overview............................................................................237
x1.2 Terms and Abbreviations Used...............................................................237
x1.3 General Acoustic Signals and Messages................................................238
x1.4 Technical Data of all devices...............................................................238
x1.5 Contact and Support...............................................................................240
Appendix x2: Command List (for reference).......................................................241
X2.1 General keys:..........................................................................................241
X2.2 System keys commands:........................................................................241
X2.3 Run application.......................................................................................242
X2.4 Word-processor......................................................................................242
X2.5 Planner....................................................................................................245
X2.6 Address book..........................................................................................246
X2.7 File Manager...........................................................................................248
X2.8 Daisy Reader..........................................................................................248
X2.9 MP3 Player.............................................................................................249
X2.10 Voice recorder:......................................................................................250
X2.11 Alarm clock:..........................................................................................251
X2.12 Stop watch............................................................................................251
X2.13 Timer (count down)...............................................................................251
X2.14 Mobile Telephone................................................................................251
X2.15 Calculator..............................................................................................252
X2.16 Internet Radio.......................................................................................254
X2.17 Email Client...........................................................................................255
x2.18 MSN Messenger....................................................................................256
Appendix x3: Notes on Windows CE and File Synchronisation.........................258
x3.1 Information on Windows CE and Database Synchronisation.................258
x3.2 Example of synchronisation with ActiveSync..........................................259
x3.3 Some “Rules”...........................................................................................260
Appendix x4 Short introduction to General Bluetooth Usage.............................261
1. About this introduction.................................................................................261
2. Installation of software, device drivers and first steps with the Bluetooth
environment and its configuration...................................................................261
2.1 Installation of the software and driver for the DLINK DBT 120 USB
Bluetooth adapter (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP (without SP2))....261
2.2 Points to note when using Service Pack 2 for Windows XP.................263
2.2.1 Use of the Microsoft Bluetooth device driver......................................263
2.2.2 Using the installation CD for the manufacturer’s software and Bluetooth
device driver................................................................................................264
2.3 First use of the Bluetooth environment and software configuration......265
3. Preparation of PRONTO as PC Braille display with Bluetooth, and the
required Virgo settings....................................................................................267
 3.1 Preparation of PRONTO as PC Braille display with Bluetooth.............267
3.2 Selection of PRONTO as Braille display in the Virgo menu..................267
4. Notes on Bluetooth......................................................................................268
4.1 Optimal Bluetooth send and receive conditions....................................268
4.2 The Braille display reacts slowly or hardly at all....................................268
4.3 Standby mode on the Computer and Bluetooth system of PRONTO used
as a Braille display.......................................................................................269
4.4 Identifying the Bluetooth-generated serial port.....................................269
Appendix x5: Remote Screen Reader................................................................270
For your safety, repair, warranty
Important note: Failure to observe the following warnings may
invalidate the guarantee and could cause serious injury.

If PRONTO appears to be operating abnormally, or to be damaged in

any way, please contact your BAUM dealer as soon as possible.
If you smell smoke or an odour coming from PRONTO, turn off the
power immediately.
Do not allow sand or dust to come into contact with PRONTO as this
may lead to serious damage and could make repair impossible.
Do not use your PRONTO in locations where strong radio waves are
emitted or where there is radiation.
Do not use a power supply not made for use with PRONTO. Only use
PRONTOs original power supply!
Do not use or store PRONTO in any of the following places as this may
cause damage.
Inside cars with the windows closed in the hot sun. In direct sunlight or
close to heaters, radiators etc.
Locations subject to severe vibration such as on top of a washing
machine.
Locations subject to strong magnetism such as near speakers.
Wipe dust and dirt from PRONTO with a soft cloth dampened with a
diluted neutral detergent, then wipe dry with a cloth.
Always remove the power lead from PRONTO when cleaning.
Do not use PRONTO during thunderstorms.
Do not use PRONTO near water, for example in a bathroom.
Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
Do not try to remove the battery.
Do not heat PRONTO in a microwave oven, on a cooker or similar.
Only use the battery that was included with your PRONTO.
Replacements are only available from BAUM or local agent. The battery
can only be removed by authorised service technicians!
Never disassemble, attempt to repair or modify PRONTO yourself.
If liquids or metal fragments should enter PRONTO, switch it off and
remove the power lead immediately.
Do not listen at high volumes for extended periods as this can lead to
impaired hearing, especially when using headphones.
Do not pull the plug out by the lead when removing the power plug
from PRONTO.
Make sure that PRONTO, mains adapter and mains plug are securely
connected.
Product Repair
All service and warranty repair for Pronto!must be done at BAUM Retec
AG or an authorized service center.

You should always telephone before sending your Pronto! for repair. A
Return Authorization Number must be assigned and you will receive
additional information related to servicing your equipment. Pronto!
should be shipped in original packaging.

Warranty
Pronto! comes with a limited warranty. The warranty period depends
on legal
regulations of the country of purchase. In Germany this is a two years
warranty.

The Pronto! Battery also includes a 6 month warranty.

BAUM Retec AG warrants Pronto! to be free from defects in material

and workmanship. This warranty is extended by BAUM only to a party
purchasing directly from a company-
authorized seller or reseller of company products.

This warranty will be voided if any defect or damage arises from

causes beyond the
control of BAUM Retec AG such as fire, accident, neglect, abuse, acts
of God,
or environmental or electrical stress.
This warranty will be voided for any product which has been tampered
with or altered or which has been repaired or attempted to be repaired
by those other than BAUM Retec AG factory authorized service
personnel.

This warranty does not cover incidental or consequential damages. The

liability of BAUM Retec AG under this warranty is limited to the
obligation to repair, or (at its sole discretion) to replace without charge
and with reasonable promptness, such defective product.

International Warranty
For warranty information on products shipped outside Germany,
contact your local
distributor or sales agent.
Part Ia - Introduction - First Steps on Pronto!
18

Congratulations! You finally have PRONTO in your hands and are no

doubt keen to learn how it works. The following text is not a
complicated handbook, and is aimed at introducing you to the main
functions through practical examples. You will be able to try out
everything on your PRONTO as you read, and thus gain your first
experience with PRONTO.

Part 3 of this users manual contains the Handbook with a more

detailed description of all PRONTO’S functions. It can also be accessed
from Pronto itself as a file from the “Help” menu where the chapters
can be opened and read individually, or from the installation CD.

Back to PRONTO. First things first.

Your fingers should rest on the 8 flat square buttons on the back upper
side, with the little fingers on the outermost Braille buttons B7 and B8,
and the thumbs on the two thumb keys on the front edge. Under your
palm is the Braille display. You can thus easily reach the Navistick stick
in the round hole in the middle of the front side with either thumb. The
Navistick can be moved up and down, to the right and to the left, and
can be pressed in the middle position.

To the right and left of the thumb keys you will see two small round
buttons, the so-called system buttons. They have various functions
that will be described below.

Power on and charge device

To start PRONTO for the first time or after a total discharge of the
battery, press the two outermost system buttons (S1+S4)
simultaneously for roughly 3 seconds.
NB: when PRONTO is switched on and the outermost system keys S1
and S4 are pressed and held for approximately 10 seconds, PRONTO
will completely switch off again. You do not want to do this unless
Pronto has crashed or you do not want to use it for more than three
weeks.

You will hear an ascending two-tone signal.

(If after this signal you hear another one with a high and a low tone,
PRONTO will automatically shut down completely because of a low
battery. You have to charge the battery first. Connect the small round
plug of the charger cable into the small round hole at the left rear side
of PRONTO, and the other end of the cable to a wall socket. Then press
the two system buttons [S1+S4] again).

Editing Text
During the switching-on procedure short signals will be emitted and
after about 30 seconds you will hear the message “Pronto menu Word
processor”.On the Braille display you can read "MI w Word processor".

Press the left thumb key and a new, blank document will open. On the
Braille display only the cursor will be visible. Please type a short
sentence in ComputerBraille. Use the right thumb key to enter a
space.

If you want to correct what you have just written, simply delete the
characters backwards by pressing B7 (the button under the little finger
of your left hand). To delete any other character from the sentence
input, press the cursor routing button behind the respective character
on the Braille display together with B7.

There are various ways of positioning the cursor:

1. Move the Navistick with the thumb in the respective direction to the
desired position.
2. Press the small cursor routing button behind the respective
character on the Braille display.

On the Braille display, the position of the cursor is now shown by

underlined dots 7 and 8.

New text will always be inserted at the current cursor position, so

make sure that the cursor is positioned at the end of the text before
you continue to type. To do so, press the Braille keys B4, B5 and B6
together with the left thumb key. Practise by inputting a short text.

Reading text
You want to read the first sentence again? Jump to the beginning of the
text by pressing the Braille keys B1, B2 and B3 together with the left
thumb key. To read the first sentence, press the Braille keys B3 and B6
together with the two thumb keys. To read the next sentence, press B6
and the two thumb keys. To read the previous sentence, press B3 and
the two thumb keys.

When reading, the first 18 characters of the text are also displayed on
the Braille display. You can see the remaining part of the text with the
help of the display buttons - three small round buttons in a row on the
right and left of the Braille display. By pressing the right middle display
button (D5) you will see the next 18 characters of the text, and by
pressing the left middle display button (D2) you will go back 18
characters. This is called scrolling.

Time, date, sleep mode

Time has now passed and you may want to know what time it is. Press
the outermost right system button (S4) briefly and you will be told the
time. Press this button briefly twice and you will be told the date. If you
press the system button for too long, instead of getting the time, you
will hear a low signal and PRONTO will switch to standby-mode. Even
when PRONTO is ‘sleeping’, however, you can hear the time and date
by pressing S4 briefly.

How do you wake up PRONTO again and return to your document?

Press the left outermost system button (S1) for a few seconds. If you
do not press it long enough, PRONTO will continue ‘sleeping’ and you
will be told the temperature. Press S1 briefly twice and you will be told
the air pressure. Only by pressing S1 for long enough will PRONTO
wake up and return you to your short text in Word Processor.

If PRONTO is speaking too loudly or too softly, you can adjust the
volume in increments. Press simultaneously the small system button at
the far right (S4) and one of the Braille keys. To set the volume at an
average level press the Braille key B4 with S4. The maximum volume
can be set by pressing S4 and B8. The speech output will be turned off
and on by pressing S4 with B7. The volume can be adjusted with S4
and a Braille key when the speech output is switched either on or off.

Press S4 together with Braille keys B3 and B7 to select soft values, and
S4 with B6 and B8 to select louder values.

Help
How do you save your text and open a new empty document or
another file, for example the manual?

PRONTO’s help files can assist here in the form of the automatic Quick
Help and the more detailed context sensitive Long Help. Quick Help
provides information on the highlighted element in a menu or dialog
which will be given automatically over the speech output connected to
the spoken element description. For more detailed information about
the element and its functions, open Long Help by pressing “B2B6 and
the left thumb key”. Long Help will now be read out, and it can be read
on the Braille display by scrolling with the display keys D5 and D2. If
the help is to be read out again, go down with the Navistick to the
“OK” button and back up to the help text. Press the left thumb key to
close Long Help, and you will be taken back to the previously
highlighted element.

Let us start with the saving of documents.

1. Open the command menu by pressing the system button S3 once

briefly alternatively with the Braille keys B3 and B5 together with the
left thumb key. (all command menus can be called up with B3B5B9).
(NB: pressing S3 briefly once again will close the menu.)
2. This accesses the “File” menu. The Navistick can be used to go up
and down to other entries, but we will stay with “File”.
3. Move the Navistick to the left to open the “File” menu which has
more options.
4. Move the Navistick up or down to the “Save as” item and press the
left thumb key (if another item is mistakenly selected press the
general cancel command B7 and B8 together with both thumb keys,
and start again).
5. In the “Name” edit box type “Test”. Finally, press the left thumb key
to save the file.

Open documents
Now you can open another text file or a new document. Press the
shortcut Braille keys B3B5 with the left thumb key again, or press "S3
once briefly". This accesses the Command menu again – move the
Navistick to the right to open it (if you have selected another item by
mistake, move the Navistick to the left to close it).

Now move the Navistick down to the “Open” item and press the left
thumb key. You are now at the top of a list of files and can use the
Navistick to browse down. Here you will find the previously saved file,
as well as the PRONTO manual.
To open one of these files, go to it with the Navistick and press the left
thumb key.

We have now learned how to save texts and open available texts; we
can now open a new, blank document.

New blank document

Proceed as follows:

1 Call up the command menu with the shortcut Braille keys B3 and B5
with the left thumb key) or by pressing S3 once briefly.
2. This accesses the “File” menu. The Navistick can be moved up or
down to other items but we will stay in “File”
3. Move the Navistick to the right to open this menu and access other
items;
4. Move the Navistick up or down to “New” and press the left thumb
key (if another item is selected by mistake, press S3 once briefly again
or use the general cancel command (Braille keys B7 and B8 together
with both thumb keys] and start again).
5. This accesses the “Name” field – the suggested name “Document”
can be confirmed by pressing the left thumb key
6. The new document will now open and the cursor will be at the
beginning of the Braille line.

Our previously opened document is still open, however, and we can

easily move between them by pressing the Braille keys B3B6 together
with B8 and the left thumb key B9.

File manager
Now let’s delete our first document. For this we leave word-processor
and learn about file manager.

1. Press the system key S3 (immediately alongside the right thumb

key) for about 3 seconds
2. You will hear “Pronto menu > Word-processor”, and “MI w Word-
processor w+B9B7B8” will appear on the Braille display. If S3 has been
pressed too briefly the command menu will open; if so, close it with the
‘quit’ command B9B7B8 and try again.
3. Go up or down with the Navistick to “File manager” and press the
left thumb key
4. This opens a list of folders and files, similar to Windows Explorer
5. Go up or down with the Navistick to “Storage Card” and move the
Navistick right to open the folder. This accesses the “Edit” folder which
contains your text files. (To select another folder, move the Navistick
up or down to the “Edit” folder)
6. Open the “Edit” folder by moving the Navistick to the right and enter
the list of text files
7. Move the Navistick up or down to the test file
8. Call up the command menu with S3 briefly or the command “B3 and
B5 with the left thumb key”.
9. This opens the first menu item “File” – move the Navistick down to
the right to access the submenu
10. This accesses “New folder” – move the Navistick up or down to
“Delete”
11. Press the left thumb key to confirm “Delete” and a security
question will appear
12. Move the Navistick up or down to select “Yes” and press the left
thumb key
13. This will delete the test file from the storage card. You will be taken
back to the file list where other files can be deleted or opened.

Although the file has been deleted from the storage card it can still be
found on Prontos internal RAM, i.e. it can still be displayed on the
Braille display in word processor and could be saved under the new
name.

Close document
To delete a file from RAM it must be closed in Word processor. Switch
to Word processor by pressing the system key S1 slightly longer, or go
to the PRONTO menu and select “Word processor”.
Then proceed as follows:
1. Press S3 once briefly to open the command menu and you will be
taken to the first entry, “File”
2. Move the Navistick to the right and then down to “close”, and then
press the left thumb key (B9)
3. You will now be in either another open file or a blank document.

Open manual
The manual and its individual chapters can be opened quickly from the
PRONTO menu under the “Help” entry. The file will be displayed in the
Word processor i.e. when a chapter from the Handbook is selected you
will be taken straight to the Word processor.

To select and open a chapter from the manual, proceed as follows:

1. open the PRONTO menu by pressing and holding the system key S3.
If the key is released too quickly only the command menu will open
which must then be closed by pressing S3 once again briefly.
2. You will be taken to an entry in the PRONTO menu. Move the
Navistick up or down to access further entries.
3. As soon as “Help” is reached, stay on it and either press the left
thumb key (B9) or move the Navistick once to the right.
4. A submenu will open with further entries.
5. Move the Navistick up or down to the “Manual” entry, and either
press the left thumb key (B9) or move the Navistick once to the right.
6. The individual chapters from the manual will be listed. Move the
Navistick up or down to the desired chapter and open it by pressing
the left thumb key (B9).

At this point you have already learned a good deal. You can write and
save texts, open the manual and delete files, and you know how to find
out the time and other useful information.
MP3 Player
Finally, let’s listen to a bit of music and learn how to use Pronto’s MP3
player at the same time.

1. Open the PRONTO menu by pressing the system button S3 for a few
seconds - this is the round button alongside the right thumb key. If you
release the button too quickly the command menu will open; this must
be closed either by pressing B9B7B8 or by pressing S3 again briefly.
2. You are on an item in the PRONTO menu. Move the Navistick up and
down to access other menu items.
3. When reaching the menu item “MP3 Player”, press the left thumb
key.
4. The mp3 player will either announce that the play list is missing or
empty, or will display the name of the mp3 file last played. To listen to
a new mp3 file press S3 once briefly to open the command menu.
5. Stay on the first entry “File”, move the Navistick once to the right
and confirm the “open” entry by pressing the left thumb key.
6. A list of files and folders will now open, similar to the word
processor.
7. Move the Navistick either up or down to “Storage card”, and then
move the Navistick to the right to access the levels in the subfolder.
Move the Navistick up or down to the “Music” folder and open it by
moving the Navistick to the right once again.
8. The “Music” folder lists the individual mp3 files. To select one of
them, simply leaf through the list to it with the Navistick and press the
left thumb key.
9. The list will now close and the music will start.
10. The file name will be displayed on the Braille display. The first
three Braille elements show in percentage terms, how much of the
mp3 has already been played.
11. The music can be stopped and resumed from the same place by
pressing the left thumb key once again.
12. During play the B2 key can be pressed to rewind approximately 10
seconds, and B5 to fast forward 10 seconds.
13. To stop the music press the right thumb key.
14. The volume of the mp3 player can be adjusted by pressing the
extreme right system key S4 together with one of the Braille keys
(device volume).
15. To quit the mp3 player press and hold one of the system keys: with
S1, S2 or S3 the mp3 player will continue playing in the background.
S4 will stop the player.

Background music can be played whilst working in Word-processor.

Recap: S1 opens Word-processor,S2 opens Planner, S3 the PRONTO

menu, and S4 switches to standby-mode.

How do we switch PRONTO off?

By pressing the right outermost system key (S4) for a few seconds
PRONTO will switch to standby mode.

If you forget to switch PRONTO off, there is no need to worry about a

flat battery. The automatic shut-down function is set so that PRONTO
will switch itself off if it has not been used for 10 minutes, or no mp3
files have been played.

PRONTO is still able to record a memo, tell the date and time, give the
battery status or recall an appointment.

If PRONTO cannot be ‘woken up’ by pressing S1, S2 or S3 for a few

seconds, and cannot give the time by pressing S4 briefly, PRONTO has
either shut down completely or has been forced into standby mode
because the battery urgently needs charging. In this state unsaved
data will only be kept for a few hours; PRONTO must be connected to
the mains supply as quickly as possible, however, to charge the
battery and avoid any loss of data. Once connected to the mains,
PRONTO can be woken up from forced standby mode in the usual
manner by pressing S1, S2 or S3 for a few seconds.

PRONTO is a Windows CE device and as such does not usually shut

down completely. If the device is shut down completely either through
power loss or running a system reset, data loss must be anticipated. A
complete shutdown is indicated by a clear falling two-tone signal and
by the Braille display switching to “off”.
Part Ib - Introduction - First Steps on Pronto!
40

Congratulations on acquiring your organizer Pronto– no doubt you are

keen to discover all that Pronto can do. The following pages do not
constitute a complete handbook but are designed to introduce you to
the most important functions through practical examples, and to help
you find your way around the keyboard.
Everything you read here can be tried out immediately on Pronto, thus
helping you on your way with Pronto.

Part 3 of this users manual contains the Handbook with a more

detailed description of all PRONTO’S functions. It can also be accessed
from Pronto itself as a file from the “Help” menu where the chapters
can be opened and read individually, or from the installation CD.

So, back to Pronto: how is it set out?

The upper surface has the keys of a normal small keyboard like you
would find on a PC. It is also possible to remove this keyboard and
replace a 8 dot Braille keyboard. Both keyboards are modules which
can easyly be changed by the user himself. To change te keyboard
modules proceed as follows:
1. In the rear part of the upper side, left and right beside the keyboard
you find 2 interlock keys
2. Push simultaniously the rihgt key to the right and the left key to the
left. This unfastens the keyboard modul.
3. Lift the modul and remove it.
4. Without the keyboard modul the upper side of teh device shows a
deepening where the modul normally is placed.
5. To fasten the keyboard modul, put the front edge of the modul in th
front part of the deepening then let it down to the rear side and press
it down.
6. The interlock keys fasten and the keyboard modul is connected to
the device.

You can change the modules even when Pronto is switched on.

Now, we let Pronto with the standard keyboard on it and explore the
other parts and keys of the upper side..
Left beside the keyboard you find a single round button. This is the
REC Button to start recordings with the voice recorder. The build in
microphone is placed on the right side of teh keyboard and marked by
a small hole.
In front of the keyboard you find the Braille display with cursor routing
keys (Positioning keys) at each cell and 3 Display keys each right and
left beside the Braille Display.

You can feel a small movable switch on the sloped front side of the
device. This is the Navistick which allows movement to the right, left,
up and down, and which can also be pressed. With this navistick we
can move in documents, menus or lists and select functions. It
facilitates all movement in these directions independently of the arrow
keys.

To the left and right of the navistick you find two small square buttons.
They are thumb keys as on the Braille keyboard modul.

On the right-hand side there is a small, round key; this is the power
on/off button that is used to switch Pronto on and off.

Now let’s turn back to the standard keyboard and its keys themselves.
Like all similar computer keyboards, some keys have more than one
function assigned to them. In this introduction only the first assigned
function will be given. The keys are arranged for the english key board
layout as follows (from top to bottom, and from left to right):

Top line:
Escape, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, minus, equals, Delete, Backspace

Second line:
TAB, q, w, e, r, t, y, u, i, o, p, left-bracket, right-bracket, Return (upper
half)

Third line:
Caps lock, a, s, d, f, g, h, j, k, l, semi colon, apostrophe, backslash,
Return (lower half)

Fourth line:
Left Shift key, (non), z, x, c, v, b, n, m, comma, full stop, slah, right
Shift key, up arrow, FN

Bottom line:
Left Control key, WIN, FN, Alt, left space bar, right space bar, Alt gr,
OBJECT MENU, right Control key, left arrow, down arrow, right arrow.
The following keys have a small raised dot: a, f, j, semi colon, n, y, 2, 6,
minus, the TAB key, the left and right Control keys, and the right Shift
key.

As a starting position place the fingers of the left hand on the a, s, d

and f keys, and the fingers of the right hand on j, k, l and semi colon.

When using the Braille keyboard we will find 8 Braille keys and 2
thumb keys.
From left to right they are designated B7, B3, B2, B1, B4, B5, B6, B8.
hte left tumb key is called B9, the right thumb key is called B0 and is
space.

Let’s look more closely at the sloped front side. We already know the 2
square thumb keys left (B9) and rihgt (B0) of the Navistick. Further to
the left and the right we find each 2 small round buttons. These
system keys are used to switch Pronto to stand-by mode, to switch it
back on, and to switch between various applications. They can also
carry out other functions that we will learn later.

From left to right on the sloped front side we find the following
elements:
S1 and S2 keys, the thumb key B9, the Navistick, the thumb key B0,
the S3 and S4 keys.

Switch on the Device

To switch Pronto on (either for the first time or after recharging the
battery) press and hold the on/off button for ca. 3 seconds.
NB: if this button is pressed again, Pronto will shut down completely.
Pronto should normally be switched off by using the system keys to
switch to Stand-by mode.

After switching on you will hear a two-tone rising signal; if you hear a
falling two-tone signal immediately afterwards, Pronto will shut down
automatically as it is not receiving enough power. If so, the battery
must be charged: take the charger, insert the small round plug into the
small opening on the far back at the left of Pronto, and connect the
second cable to a power socket. Then press the on/off button on the
right-hand side of the device once again and wait for the rising signal.

During the switching-on procedure short signals will be emitted and

after about 30 seconds you will hear the message “Pronto menu Word
processor”.

Now press Return or on the Braille keyboard the left thumb key B9 to
confirm, and a blank document will open.
If Pronto’s announcements are too loud or too quiet, the volume can be
adjusted with the wheel on the left side of the device. Turning the
wheel towards you will decrease the volume, and turning it away from
you will increase it. The volume cannot be turned off completely with
this wheel and it will always retain a minimum value.

Writing text
Now type your first practice text: “Pronto is wonderful and very useful.
We enjoy working with Pronto”. Then press Return or Braille key B8 to
start a new line.

If you make any typing errors, simply press Backspace (the last key on
the right of the top row) or press the Braille key B7 to delete the
characters backwards.

There are several ways of placing the cursor at a particular point:

1. move the Navistick with your thumb in the appropriate direction to
the desired spot
2. use the right or left arrow key to the desired spot
3. Press the smal positioning key to rout the cursor onto the desired
position.
When moving through the text the speech output will read out the
current character and on the Braille display the cursor is displayed with
dots 7,8.

New text will always be inserted at the current cursor position; please
ensure that the cursor is placed at the end of the line before inputting
more text. To do this either use the arrow keys to move down and then
to the right, letter by letter, until you reach the end of the last word, or
use the command to jump to the end of the file – press and hold the
left FN key, press and hold the left Control key, press the right arrow
key and then release all three keys. The left FN key is the third key
from the left on the bottom row. This key combination corresponds to
the command Control+End, which is perhaps known to you from
Windows.

When using the Braille keyboard the command to jump to the end of
the file is executed by pressing the Braille keys B4B5B6 together with
the left thumb key B9.

Practice by writing a few more sentences.

Reading text
To read through your practice text, jump to the beginning of the file by
pressing the left FN key together with the Control key and the left
arrow key or Braille keys B1B2B3 together with the left thumb key B9.
To read line by line, either go down the text with the Navistick or the
down arrow, or similarly up with the Navistick or the up arrow.

When reading, only 40 characters of the text are displayed on the

Braille display. You can see the remaining part of the text with the help
of the display buttons - three small round buttons in a row on the right
and left of the Braille display. By pressing the right middle display
button (D5) you will see the next 40 characters of the text line, and by
pressing the left middle display button (D2) you will go back 40
characters. This is called scrolling.

Values, Stand by and wake up Pronto

Some time has now passed and you would like to know what time it is:
briefly pressing the System key S4 will give the local time (S4 is the
second key on the right along from the Navistick). Pressing this key
briefly twice in succession will give the date. If this key is pressed for a
little longer, however, you will not hear the time but instead you will
hear a faint signal and Pronto will switch to Stand-by mode; even when
Pronto is “asleep” you can still consult the time or date by pressing S4
briefly.

So, how do we now wake Pronto up and get back to our practice text?
Simply press the extreme left System key (S1) for a short while – if you
do not hold it down long enough Pronto will carry on “sleeping” and
this time will read out the temperature. Out of curiosity you once again
press the S1 key twice briefly and this time you will hear the air
pressure.

If you press the left System key (S1) long enough, Pronto will wake up.
This will take you back to the Word processor where you can read your
practice text by moving up and down through it.

Help options
How can the practice text be saved, or a new blank document or new
file opened (e.g. the manual)?
Pronto’s help system can help with these tasks. There are two types:
the automatic Quick Help, and the context sensitive Long Help. Quick
Help provides information on the highlighted element of a menu or
dialog, and is given automatically via the speech output. For more
detailed information on the element and its functions, Long Help can
be called up by pressing the F1 key: press the FN key (i.e. the third key
from the left on the bottom row) together with the number “1” key,
and Help will be read out and displayed in Braille.
When using the Braille keyboard you can call up the context sensitive
help by pressing Braille keys B2B6 together with the left thumb key B9.
To listen once more go down with the Navistick to the “OK” key and
then back up to the Help text.
Press the return or B9 key to confirm the “OK” button, this closes Help
and you return to the previously highlighted element.

Saving
Let’s begin with saving documents.
1. call up the Command menu by pressing the Alt key (this can be
found on the left, next to the left space bar and it can be used to call
up the Command menu from any application). Alternatively, press the
System key S3 once briefly to open the Command menu; the S3 key
can be found immediately to the right of the Navistick (NB: pressing S3
or Alt once more briefly will close the menu).
2. the menu will open at the first entry, “File”. The other menu options
can be accessed by moving up and down with the Navistick, but for the
time being stay with “File”.
3. move the Navistick to the right and open the File menu; this
contains a list of additional entries
4. move the Navistick up or down to “Save as” and confirm by pressing
Return, the left thumb key B9 or the Navistick (N-center). If another
entry is selected by mistake, press the Escape key or on the Braille
keyboard the Braille keys B7B8B9 – this is a general command to stop
and start again. The Escape key is the extreme left key on the top row.
5. an edit box headed “Name” will open – type “Test”. Now press
Return or left thumb key B9 to save the file.

Open
Another text file or a new blank document can now be opened: press
the Alt key once again, or press S3 once briefly. The menu will open
once again at “File” – move the Navistick to the right to open this entry
(if another entry is opened by mistake move the Navistick to the left to
close it). Now move the Navistick down through the menu to “Open”
and press Return or the left thumb key B9.

A list of documents will open. Use the Navistick to browse through the
list and find the previously saved document. The Handbook will also be
in this list.

To open one of these documents, go to it with the Navistick and press

Return or the left thumb key B9.

Blank document
You have now learned how to save texts and open existing texts; now
open a new blank document.

Proceed as follows:
1. call up the Command menu with the Alt key, or by pressing S3 once
briefly.
2. the menu will open at the “File” entry. The other menu options can
be accessed by moving up and down with the Navistick, but for the
time being stay with “File”.
3. move the Navistick to the right to open the File menu; more entries
will appear.
4. either stay on the first entry or move the Navistick up or down to
“New” and then either press Return, the left thumb key B9 or the
Navistick (N-center) to confirm the selection. If another entry is
selected by mistake, press the Escape key or the Braille keys B7B8B9 –
this is a general command to stop and start again. The Escape key is
the extreme left key on the top row.
5. an edit box headed “Name” will open. The suggested name
“Document” can be accepted by pressing Return or the left thumb key
B9.
6. the new document is thus created and the cursor can be found at
the beginning of the file.

The previously opened document is still open, however, but switching

from one to the other is easy: press CTRL together with the minus key
(-) or on the Braille keyboard the Braille keys B3B6B8 together with the
left thumb key. B9..

File Manger
Now delete the first text document.
To do so, exit the Word processor and familiarise yourself with File
manager.
1. press the Windows key (WIN), or press the small round System key
S3 for 3 seconds – S3 is to the right of the Navistick.
2. you will hear “Pronto menu Word processor”. If S3 has not been held
long enough, the Command menu will open; if so, close it by pressing
S3 once again briefly, and try again.
3. move up or down with the Navistick to “File manager” and press
Return or the left thumb key B9.
4. a list will open which contains various folders and files similar to
Windows Explorer.
5. move up or down with the Navistick to the “Storage Card” folder –
now move the Navistick right to open it. The “Edit” folder contains your
text files.(if another folder has opened, move up or down with the
Navistick to the “Edit” folder)
6. open the “Edit” folder by moving the Navistick to the right, and you
will be taken to a list of your text files.
7. move up or down with the Navistick to your test file.
8. call up the Command menu by pressing either S3 once briefly, or the
Alt key.
9. the menu will open at the first entry, “New” – move the Navistick to
the right to access the submenu.
10. this will open at the first entry “New” – go up or down with the
Navistick to “Delete”.
11. press Return or the left thumb key B9 to confirm the selection of
“Delete” – a security question will appear.
12. go up or down with the Navistick to the “Yes” button and press
Return or the left thumb key B9.
13. this will delete the test file from the storage card. You will be taken
back to the file list where other files can be deleted or opened.

Even though the file has been deleted from the storage card, it can still
be found on Prontos internal RAM, i.e. it may still appear in the Word
processor and may be saved again with a different name.

Close Document
To delete a file from RAM, it must first be closed in the Word processor.
First, switch to the Word processor by pressing and holding S1 for a
short while, or by selecting “Word processor” from the Pronto menu.

Then proceed as follows:

1. press Alt, or S3 once briefly to open the Command menu which will
open at the first entry “File”.
2. move to the right and then down with the Navistick to “Close”, and
press Return or the left thumb key B9.
3. either another file or a blank document will now appear.

Open Manual
The manual and its individual chapters can be opened quickly from the
Pronto menu under the “Help” entry. The file will be displayed in the
Word processor, i.e. when selecting a chapter from the Handbook the
Word processor will open at the same time.

To select and open a chapter from the manual, proceed as follows:

1. open the Pronto menu by pressing the Windows key (WIN), or S3 for
a short while. If S3 has not been held long enough, the Command
menu will open; if so, it must be closed by pressing S3 once again
briefly.
2. the Pronto menu will open at one of its entries. Move up or down
with the Navistick to access other entries in the menu.
3. when “Help” has been reached, stop and move the Navistick once to
the right.
4. a submenu will open which contains further entries.
5. go up or down with the Navistick to “Manual”, and move the
Navistick once to the right.
6. the individual chapters of the Handbook are listed. Move up or down
with the Navistick to the desired chapter and open it by pressing
Return or the left thumb key B9.

You have by now learned a lot: you can write and save texts, open the
Manual, delete files, and consult the local time and other information.

MP3 Player
To finish, let’s listen to some music and at the same time learn how to
use Pronto’s mp3 player. Proceed as follows:
1. open the Pronto menu by pressing the Windows key (WIN), or by
pressing S3 for a short while – S3 is the small round key to the right of
the Navistick. If S3 has not been held long enough, the Command
menu will open; if so, it must be closed by pressing S3 once again
briefly.
2. the Pronto menu will open at one of its entries. Move up or down
with the Navistick to access other entries in the menu.
3. when you have reached “mp3 player” stop, and press Return or the
left thumb key B9.
4. the mp3 player will either announce that there is no playlist or that
it is empty, or will display the file name of the last audio file to have
been played. To listen to a different file either press the Alt key, or
press S3 once briefly – this will open the Command menu.
5. stay on the first entry in the menu, “File”, move once to the right
with the Navistick and confirm “open” entry by pressing Return or the
left thumb key B9.
6. A list of files and folders will now open, similar to open files in the
word processor.
7. go up or down with the Navistick to “Storage card”. Move the
Navistick to the right to access the different levels in the sub-folder.
Now go up or down with the Navistick to the “Music” folder and open it
by moving the Navistick once more to the right.
8. the “Music” folder contains individual mp3 files. To open one of
them select it simply by browsing through the list with the Navistick
and pressing Return or the left thumb key B9.
9. the file list will close and the music will play. The Braille display will
display the file name. The first three Braille elements will display how
much of the file has already been played in percent. This information
can also be consulted and read out by pressing the Windows key
together with the minus key (-) . When using the Braille keyboard press
B3B6B7B8 together with the left thumb key B9..
10. pause and resume music from the same place by pressing Return
or the left thumb key B9.
11. during play, moving to the left will rewind 10 seconds at a time,
and moving to the right will fast forward 10 seconds at a time.
12. to stop the music press the space bar, or the right thumb key B0.
13. quit the mp3 player by pressing one of the System keys for a short
while: with S1, S2 and S3 the mp3 player will continue playing in the
background; S4 will stop the player.

Recap: S1 opens the Word processor; S2 opens the Planner; S3 opens

the Pronto menu; S4 switches the device to Stand-by mode.

Switch off
How is Pronto switched off?
Press and hold S4 (the second small round key on the right of the
Navistick) to switch Pronto to Stand-by mode.
If you forget to switch Pronto off, don’t worry about finding a flat
battery; the automatic shutdown function is so designed, as a standard
feature, that Pronto will shut itself down automatically after 10
minutes’ inactivity or 10 minutes after an audio file has finished
playing.
Even when Pronto is “asleep”, however, it is still able to tell the date
and time, give the battery status or give a reminder of an
appointment.

If Pronto cannot be “woken up” after pressing S1, S2 or S3 for a short

while and the time cannot be consulted by pressing them briefly, it has
either shut down completely or has been forced into Stand-by mode
because the battery urgently needs charging.
In this situation unsaved data are still available for a few hours, but the
charger must be connected as soon as possible to charge the battery
and avoid any loss of data. As soon as the charger is connected Pronto
can be woken up from its enforced Stand-by mode in the usual manner
by pressing S1, S2 or S3 for a short while.

Pronto is a Windows CE device and as such is never completely shut

down. If, however, the device is shut down completely following a
power cut or System reset (on/off button), some loss of data is to be
expected. Warning of a complete shutdown is given in the form of a
clear falling two-tone signal.
Part Ic - Introduction - First Steps on Pronto!
QS

Congratulations on acquiring Pronto QS – no doubt you are keen to

discover all that Pronto can do. The following pages do not constitute a
complete handbook but are designed to introduce you to the most
important functions through practical examples, and to help you find
your way around the keyboard.
Everything you read here can be tried out immediately on Pronto, thus
helping you on your way with Pronto.

Part 3 of this users manual contains the Handbook with a more

detailed description of all PRONTO’S functions. It can also be accessed
from Pronto itself as a file from the “Help” menu where the chapters
can be opened and read individually, or from the installation CD.

So, back to Pronto: how is it set out?

The upper surface has the keys of a normal small keyboard like you
would find on a PC. You will know if the keyboard is the right way round
if you can feel a small movable switch on the front side of the
keyboard; this is the Navistick which allows movement to the right,
left, up and down, and which can also be pressed.

On the right-hand side there is a small, round key; this is the on/off
button that is used to switch Pronto on and off.

Now let’s turn to the keys themselves.

Like all similar computer keyboards, some keys have more than one
function assigned to them. In this introduction only the first assigned
function will be given. The keys are arranged for the english key board
layout as follows (from top to bottom, and from left to right):

Top line:
Escape, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, minus, equals, Delete, Backspace

Second line:
TAB, q, w, e, r, t, y, u, i, o, p, left-bracket, right-bracket, Return (upper
half)

Third line:
Caps lock, a, s, d, f, g, h, j, k, l, semi colon, apostrophe, backslash,
Return (lower half)

Fourth line:
Left Shift key, (non), z, x, c, v, b, n, m, comma, full stop, slah, right
Shift key, up arrow, FN

Bottom line:
Left Control key, WIN, FN, Alt, left space bar, right space bar, Alt gr,
OBJECT MENU, right Control key, left arrow, down arrow, right arrow.

The following keys have a small raised dot: a, f, j, semi colon, n, y, 2, 6,

minus, the TAB key, the left and right Control keys, and the right Shift
key.

As a starting position place the fingers of the left hand on the a, s, d

and f keys, and the fingers of the right hand on j, k, l and semi colon.

It is thus easy to access the movable switch in the round recess in the
middle of the front side with both thumbs. This switch is called the
Navistick and it can be moved up, down, to the right, and to the left; it
can also be pressed in the middle position. It facilitates all movement
in these directions independently of the arrow keys.

Let’s look more closely at the front side. To the left of the Navistick
there are two somewhat deeply set square keys, and to the right there
are three more. These system keys are used to switch Pronto to stand-
by mode, to switch it back on, and to switch between various
applications. They can also carry out other functions that we will learn
later.

From left to right on the front side we find the S1 and S2 keys, the
Navistick, the S3 and S4 keys, and the REC key.

To switch Pronto on (either for the first time or after recharging the
battery) press and hold the on/off button for ca. 3 seconds.
NB: if this button is pressed again, Pronto will shut down completely.
Pronto should normally be switched off by using the system keys to
switch to Stand-by mode.

After switching on you will hear a two-tone rising signal; if you hear a
falling two-tone signal immediately afterwards, Pronto will shut down
automatically as it is not receiving enough power. If so, the battery
must be charged: take the charger, insert the small round plug into the
small opening on the far left at the back of Pronto, and connect the
second cable to a power socket. Then press the on/off button on the
right-hand side of the device once again and wait for the rising signal.

During the switching-on procedure short signals will be emitted and

after about 30 seconds you will hear the message “Pronto menu Word
processor”.

Now press Return to confirm, and a blank document will open.

Now type your first practice text: “Pronto is wonderful and very useful.
We enjoy working with Pronto”. Then press Return to start a new
sentence.

If you make any typing errors, simply press Backspace (the last key on
the right of the top row) to delete the characters backwards.

There are several ways of placing the cursor at a particular point:

1. move the Navistick with your thumb in the appropriate direction to
the desired spot
2. use the right or left arrow key to the desired spot
When moving through the text the speech output will read out the
current character.

New text will always be inserted at the current cursor position; please
ensure that the cursor is placed at the end of the line before inputting
more text. To do this either use the arrow keys to move down and then
to the right, letter by letter, until you reach the end of the last word, or
use the command to jump to the end of the file – press and hold the
left FN key, press and hold the left Control key, press the right arrow
key and then release all three keys. The left FN key is the third key
from the left on the bottom row. This key combination corresponds to
the command Control+End, which is perhaps known to you from
Windows.

Practice by writing a few more sentences.

To read through your practice text, jump to the beginning of the file by
pressing the left FN key together with the Control key and the left
arrow key. To read line by line, either go down the text with the
Navistick or the down arrow, or similarly up with the Navistick or the up
arrow.

Some time has now passed and you would like to know what time it is:
briefly pressing the System key S4 will give the local time (S4 is the
second key on the right along from the Navistick). Pressing this key
briefly twice in succession will give the date. If this key is pressed for a
little longer, however, you will not hear the time but instead you will
hear a faint signal and Pronto will switch to Stand-by mode; even when
Pronto is “asleep” you can still consult the time or date by pressing S4
briefly.

So, how do we now wake Pronto up and get back to our practice text?
Simply press the extreme left System key (S1) for a short while – if you
do not hold it down long enough Pronto will carry on “sleeping” and
this time will read out the temperature. Out of curiosity you once again
press the S1 key twice briefly and this time you will hear the air
pressure.

If you press the left System key (S1) long enough, Pronto will wake up.
This will take you back to the Word processor where you can read your
practice text by moving up and down through it.

If Pronto’s announcements are too loud or too quiet, the volume can be
adjusted with the wheel on the left side of the device. Turning the
wheel towards you will decrease the volume, and turning it away from
you will increase it. The volume cannot be turned off completely with
this wheel and it will always retain a minimum value.

How can the practice text be saved, or a new blank document or new
file opened (e.g. the manual)?
Pronto’s help system can help with these tasks. There are two types:
the automatic Quick Help, and the context sensitive Long Help. Quick
Help provides information on the highlighted element of a menu or
dialog, and is given automatically via the speech output. For more
detailed information on the element and its functions, Long Help can
be called up by pressing the F1 key: press the FN key (i.e. the third key
from the left on the bottom row) together with the number “1” key,
and Help will be read out. To listen once more go down with the
Navistick to the “OK” key and then back up to the Help text.
Press the return key to close Help and to return to the previously
highlighted element.

Let’s begin with saving documents.

1. call up the Command menu by pressing the Alt key (this can be
found on the left, next to the left space bar and it can be used to call
up the Command menu from any application). Alternatively, press the
System key S3 once briefly to open the Command menu; the S3 key
can be found immediately to the right of the Navistick (NB: pressing S3
or Alt once more briefly will close the menu).
2. the menu will open at the first entry, “File”. The other menu options
can be accessed by moving up and down with the Navistick, but for the
time being stay with “File”.
3. move the Navistick to the right and open the File menu; this
contains a list of additional entries
4. move the Navistick up or down to “Save as” and confirm by pressing
Return or the Navistick (N-center). If another entry is selected by
mistake, press the Escape key – this is a general command to stop and
start again. The Escape key is the extreme left key on the top row.
5. an edit box headed “Name” will open – type “Test”. Now press
Return to save the file.

Another text file or a new blank document can now be opened: press
the Alt key once again, or press S3 once briefly. The menu will open
once again at “File” – move the Navistick to the right to open this entry
(if another entry is opened by mistake move the Navistick to the left to
close it). Now move the Navistick down through the menu to “Open”
and press Return.

A list of documents will open. Use the Navistick to browse through the
list and find the previously saved document. The Handbook will also be
in this list.

To open one of these documents, go to it with the Navistick and press

Return.

You have now learned how to save texts and open existing texts; now
open a new blank document.

Proceed as follows:
1. call up the Command menu with the Alt key, or by pressing S3 once
briefly.
2. the menu will open at the “File” entry. The other menu options can
be accessed by moving up and down with the Navistick, but for the
time being stay with “File”.
3. move the Navistick to the right to open the File menu; more entries
will appear.
4. either stay on the first entry or move the Navistick up or down to
“New” and then either press Return or the Navistick (N-center) to
confirm the selection. If another entry is selected by mistake, press the
Escape key – this is a general command to stop and start again. The
Escape key is the extreme left key on the top row.
5. an edit box headed “Name” will open. The suggested name
“Document” can be accepted by pressing Return.
6. the new document is thus created and the cursor can be found at
the beginning of the file.

The previously opened document is still open, however, but switching

from one to the other is easy: press CTRL together with the minus key
(-).
Now delete the first text document.
To do so, exit the Word processor and familiarise yourself with File
manager.
1. press the Windows key (WIN), or press the small recessed System
key S3 for 3 seconds – S3 is to the right of the Navistick.
2. you will hear “Pronto menu Word processor”. If S3 has not been held
long enough, the Command menu will open; if so, close it by pressing
Escape, or by pressing S3 once again briefly, and try again.
3. move up or down with the Navistick to “File manager” and press
Return.
4. a list will open which contains various folders and files similar to
Windows Explorer.
5. move up or down with the Navistick to the “Storage Card” folder –
now move the Navistick right to open it. The “Edit” folder will now open
which contains your text files (if another folder has opened, move up or
down with the Navistick to the “Edit” folder)
6. open the “Edit” folder by moving the Navistick to the right, and you
will be taken to a list of your text files.
7. move up or down with the Navistick to your test file.
8. call up the Command menu by pressing either S3 once briefly, or the
Alt key.
9. the menu will open at the first entry, “New” – move the Navistick to
the right to access the submenu.
10. this will open at the first entry “New” – go up or down with the
Navistick to “Delete”.
11. press Return to confirm the selection of “Delete” – a security
question will appear.
12. go up or down with the Navistick to the “Yes” button and press
Return.
13. this will delete the test file from the storage card. You will be taken
back to the file list where other files can be deleted or opened.

Even though the file has been deleted from the storage card, it
can still be found on Prontos internal RAM, i.e. it may still appear in the
Word processor and may be saved again with a different name.

To delete a file from RAM, it must first be closed in the Word processor.
First, switch to the Word processor by pressing and holding S1 for a
short while, or by selecting “Word processor” from the Pronto menu.

Then proceed as follows:

1. press Alt, or S3 once briefly to open the Command menu which will
open at the first entry “File”.
2. move to the right and then down with the Navistick to “Close”, and
press Return.
3. either another file or a blank document will now appear.

The manual and its individual chapters can be opened quickly from the
Pronto menu under the “Help” entry. The file will be displayed in the
Word processor, i.e. when selecting a chapter from the Handbook the
Word processor will open at the same time.

To select and open a chapter from the manual, proceed as follows:

1. open the Pronto menu by pressing the Windows key (WIN), or S3 for
a short while. If S3 has not been held long enough, the Command
menu will open; if so, it must be closed by pressing S3 once again
briefly.
2. the Pronto menu will open at one of its entries. Move up or down
with the Navistick to access other entries in the menu.
3. when “Help” has been reached, stop and press Return or move the
Navistick once to the right.
4. a submenu will open which contains further entries.
5. go up or down with the Navistick to “Manual”, and press Return or
move the Navistick once to the right.
6. the individual chapters of the Handbook are listed. Move up or down
with the Navistick to the desired chapter and open it by pressing
Return.

You have by now learned a lot: you can write and save texts, open the
Manual, delete files, and consult the local time and other information.

To finish, let’s listen to some music and at the same time learn how to
use Pronto’s mp3 player. Proceed as follows:
1. open the Pronto menu by pressing the Windows key (WIN), or by
pressing S3 for a short while – S3 is the recessed square key to the
right of the Navistick. If S3 has not been held long enough, the
Command menu will open; if so, it must be closed by pressing Escape,
or S3 once again briefly.
2. the Pronto menu will open at one of its entries. Move up or down
with the Navistick to access other entries in the menu.
3. when you have reached “mp3 player” stop, and press Return.
4. the mp3 player will either announce that there is no playlist or that
it is empty, or will display the file name of the last mp3 file to have
been played. To listen to a different file either press the Alt key, or
press S3 once briefly – this will open the Command menu.
5. stay on the first entry in the menu, “File”, move once to the right
with the Navistick and confirm “open” entry by pressing Return.
6. A list of files and folders will now open, similar to the word
processor.
7. go up or down with the Navistick to “Storage card”. Move the
Navistick to the right to access the different levels in the sub-folder.
Now go up or down with the Navistick to the “Music” folder and open it
by moving the Navistick once more to the right.
8. the “Music” folder contains all the individual mp3 files. To open one
of them select it simply by browsing through the list with the Navistick
and pressing Return.
9. the file list will close and the music will play. (If a Braille display has
been connected, it will display the file name. The first three Braille
elements will display how much of the file has already been played in
percent). This information can also be consulted and read out by
pressing the Windows key together with the minus key (-).
10. pause and resume music from the same place by pressing Return.
11. during play, moving to the left will rewind 10 seconds at a time,
and moving to the right will fast forward 10 seconds at a time.
12. to stop the music press the space bar, or CTRL together with
Return.
13. the volume of the mp3 player can be adjusted with the wheel on
the left side of the device (device volume).
14. quit the mp3 player by pressing one of the System keys for a short
while: with S1, S2 and S3 the mp3 player will continue playing in the
background; S4 will stop the player.

It is thus possible to use the Word processor and listen to music in the
background at the same time.
Recap: S1 opens the Word processor; S2 opens the Planner; S3 opens
the Pronto menu; S4 switches the device to Stand-by mode.

How is Pronto switched off?

Press and hold S4 (the second key on the right of the Navistick) to
switch Pronto to Stand-by mode.
If you forget to switch Pronto off, don’t worry about finding a flat
battery; the automatic shutdown function is so designed, as a standard
feature, that Pronto will shut itself down automatically after 10
minutes’ inactivity or 10 minutes after an mp3 file has finished playing.
Even when Pronto is “asleep”, however, it is still able to tell the date
and time, give the battery status or give a reminder of an
appointment.
If Pronto cannot be “woken up” after pressing S1, S2 or S3 for a short
while and the time cannot be consulted by pressing them briefly, it has
either shut down completely or has been forced into Stand-by mode
because the battery urgently needs charging.
In this situation unsaved data are still available for a few hours, but the
charger must be connected as soon as possible to charge the battery
and avoid any loss of data. As soon as the charger is connected Pronto
can be woken up from its enforced Stand-by mode in the usual manner
by pressing S1, S2 or S3 for a short while.
Pronto is a Windows CE device and as such is never completely shut
down. If, however, the device is shut down completely following a
power cut or System reset (on/off button), some loss of data is to be
expected. Warning of a complete shutdown is given in the form of a
clear falling two-tone signal.
Part II - Software Installation and further
programmes
To exchange data with a PC you need to install the program Microsoft
ActiveSync from the CD-ROM provided. It can be used with Windows
ME, Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
Put the CD in the CD-drive of your computer, select the ActiveSync
folder and start the "activesync45setup.msi" file.
Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
When the set up has finished, you will find the item "Microsoft
ActiveSync” in the “Start menu/Programs”.

With Windows Vista you have to install Windows mobile Device Center,
which is the official program for symchronising Outlook Data.
You find both programs on the official microsoft homepage:

http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/en-
us/help/synchronize/default.mspx

You access the relative download links for ActiveSync 4.5 and Mobile
Device Center in your language.

For more information on data exchange between PRONTO and a PC see

the corresponding chapter of the manual.

Note: Some settings of firewall or virus security programs can permit a

data exchange between computer and Pronto. Therefore please check
the options, configurations and settings if you have installed this kind
of programms on your computer and if you have problems to start
ActiveSync. If the computer is part of a net work also check its
configuration before installing ActiveSync.

Note on CD content:
In addition to the installation program, you will also find the manual
and the introduction to PRONTO in mp3-format. (Folder:
pro_LNG/1033/manual.rtf)

The various additional programms and drivers can be found in the

“Pronto > Tools” folder. The “ActiveSync to serial” converter can be
installed on your PC with the “as2com.exe” file. The Braille display
driver for JAWS can be found in the “JFW” folder.
The latest version of “BAUM Talks Braille Interface” and its instruction
manual can be downloaded from www.baum.de in the area support /
downloads.
For any subsequent reinstallation of the PRONTO operating system and
PRONTO itself, the appropriate files can be found as a compressed Zip
archive in the “Prontosoft” folder.

New option for Pronto! 18 – Remote Screen Reader

The “Remote Screen Reader” (RSR) application in Pronto 18 allows a

connection to be made to a remote system (PC), so that any Braille-
and/or speech output produced on the remote system by its installed
screenreader can be transferred to Pronto 18’s Braille display or
speech output. This can be used anywhere in the world so that Pronto
18 can link up to a PC connected to the Internet and then use
manipulate/use it as though you were sitting in front of your PC and
connected to it through the “Pronto as Braille display” function.

For further information please consult “Appendix 5 – Remote Screen

Reader” which can be accessed from Pronto’s main menu under “Help
– Pronto manual”.
The files required to install the RSR application as an update, from
Pronto version 2.4 to Pronto 18, and the files required to install the
necessary PC components, can be downloaded as a ZIP-file from:

http://download.baum-retec.info/pms/pronto/rsr/rsr_remotesystem.zip
Part III - Manual

1. Preface
We are delighted that you have chosen an organizer with speech
output and relating on the PRONTO device with additional integrated
braille display.

However you work with PRONTO 18, PRONTO 40 or PRONTO QS, each
member of this organizer family will be your true companion in many
situations in your daily life. You want to record a memo, write or read
something, listen to your favourite music or e-books - PRONTO will
always be there with you.

Thanks to the latest technology PRONTO offers this variety of functions

and options in a pocket-sized device weighing and size depend only on
the length of the braille display or key board size. This makes it the
smallest and lightest device of its kind.

The following description will help you to become familiar with the
device and its most important features. If you have any questions or
problems, the PRONTO support and development team is on hand to
help.
An email discussion group has been set up specially for this purpose. It
is designed for questions and suggestions about PRONTO, contact with
other PRONTO users, and for expert advice from our partners.
To subscribe to this list send a email to listserv@listserv.baum.de with
Text body “SUBSCRIBE pronto name surname” without quotes.
Note: The language of this email group is german, but you can ask in
english, too.
Help is also available over the telephone by ringing +49
(0)6223/49090.

Enjoy using PRONTO from BAUM Retec AG

BAUM Retec AG
Schloss Langenzell
D-69257 Wiesenbach
Tel: +49 (0) 6223 4909-0
Fax: +49 (0) 6223 4909-399
dmail: info@baum.de
Web: www.baum.de
2a. Description of the Device (Pronto! 18)

2.1 General
PRONTO is roughly the size of a paperback book. All connectivity ports
can be found on the narrow back of the device. The operating buttons
are all situated on the upper side and the narrow front of the device.

Underneath are four small feet and the screws.

2.2 Buttons
At the back of the upper side you will find eight flat square Braille keys
comprising the Braille keyboard. From left to right they are designated
B7, B3, B2, B1, B4, B5, B6, B8.

The integrated speaker is round and somewhat higher than the

housing. It can be found behind keys B1 and B4.

On the front you will find the two thumb keys roughly 2cm wide; the
left one (B9) is the command button, and the right one (B0) is the
space button.

At the front there are four small, flat round system buttons which allow
different values and settings to be input, or PRONTO applications to be
switched on. Buttons S1 and S2 are on the left of the left thumb key,
and S3 and S4 are on the right of the right thumb key.

Between these buttons and the Braille keyboard you will find the 18-
cell Braille display. On top of each Braille cell there is a positioning or
cursorrouting button (P). On each side of the Braille display there are
three small round Display buttons numbered from the top down D1,
D2, D3 on the left and D4, D5, D6 on the right.

Between the two thumb keys in the middle of the front you will find the
Navistick. It can be moved up (N-up) and down (N-down), to the left (N-
left) and to the right (N-right) and pressed in the middle position (N-
center). It allows navigating in menus and applications.

Under system button S2 on the front you will find the REC button for
voice recording. Alongside, hidden in the housing, is the microphone.
2.3 Connectors and Interfaces
Directions and descriptions are given from the user’s position.

In the middle of the back side, just under the speaker, you will find the
antenna for Bluetooth. On its left side there is a slot of about 5cm wide
where Compact Flash Cards (CF) can be inserted. PRONTO is delivered
with a CF card already inserted. On the card text files or mp3 music
files can be saved to be used with other devices with CF card readers.

To remove the card, run your fingernail under the front edge of the
card sticking out from the slot and pull it out of the device. When
inserting the CF-card, make sure that it is pushed all the way into the
device.

On the very left at the rear you will find a small round hole for
connecting the charger cable.

On the right of the Bluetooth antenna there is a round connector for

earphones, then a small square USB-port, and alongside two small
round holes.
The square opening on the very right of the back is a combined serial
port and external keyboard interface (PS2 port).

2.4 Cables and Accessories

The USB-cable is used to connect PRONTO to a PC. It is approx. 1.5m
long. At one end there is a common USB-plug that can be plugged into
a free USB-port on the computer; at the other end there is a mini USB-
plug for connecting to PRONTO. Make sure it is plugged in the right
way; if it does not fit into the port, simply turn it round.

To exchange data with a computer you will need to start the program
Microsoft ActiveSync (on Windows 2000 / XP) or Microsoft Mobile
Device Center (on windows Vista)

The combicable is a combination of serial cable and PS2 port for

connecting to an external keyboard. At one end there is a 9-pole plug
(female) for connecting to a serial port on the computer. There are two
cables attached to the plug. The longer one with a small square plug is
for connecting to PRONTO. When plugging it into PRONTO, make sure
that the thick side shows down. To pull it out, you must first press the
small ridges on the two sides of the plug, and then pull it out.

The second cable is shorter and has a round plug which can be
connected to the PS2 plug of the keyboard cable. Standard PC
keyboards usually consume little energy and can therefore be used
without any problems with PRONTO. Special keyboards may have a
substantially higher energy consumption than standard keyboards and
therefore cannot be used with PRONTO.

2.4.1 Storage Cards

A type II Compact Flash (CF) storage card can be used with PRONTO for
storing files and transferring them to other devices with CF card-
readers; Type I, Type II or Type III may also be used. A 1 GB CF-card is
part of the delivery. You will find it already inserted in the respective
slot on the back of PRONTO. CF-cards with more memory can also be
used.

NB: the increased speed of Type III CF-cards is meaningless with

PRONTO. It is possible to install Microdrive hard disks but this is not
recommended due to the greater power requirements.

Memory cards allow files to be transferred quickly and easily between

Pronto and other devices that are memory card compatible. To do so, a
connection can be established via ActiveSync (Windows XP / 2000) or
Mobile Device Center (Windows Vista). Pronto will be connected to your
PC, with the Storage card inserted in Pronto), or a so-called card reader
used.

2.5 The Bag

PRONTO is well protected in its bag and can be used at any moment.
The bag can be fixed to a belt using the two loops, or carried over the
shoulder using the shoulder strap.

While the upper side of the bag can be easily opened or closed with
the Velcro fastener, PRONTO’s edges are firmly fixed in the bag, so it
can not drop out.
On the narrow front side, there are two openings for the Dictaphone’s
REC-button and the Navistick.
On the narrow rear side all connectors and interfaces are accessible
through an opening in the bag.

2.5.1 How to Use the Bag

Open the press-stud on the low rear side and pull out the flap. This
opens the bag and PRONTO can be pulled out or inserted. Make sure
the press-stud is closed properly after reinserting the flap.
2.6 Battery and Charger
With its internal battery (Ion Lithium) you can work with PRONTO!or
about 20 hours or it is in stand by mode for several days. It runs
shorter depending on the size of an inserted storage card or if
bluetooth is switched on.
When the battery charge falls below a certain level, PRONTO
automatically alerts the user with a series of messages: firstly, "Battery
is discharging" when there is10% left; secondly, "Charge your battery";
lastly "Battery needs to be charged immediately". With PIC versions 8
and 12 PRONTO will then switch to “Stand-by” or “Suspend” mode; any
unsaved data will be saved. As PRONTO has been forced into this mode
it can no longer be switched on and will emit a short signal from time
to time.
Plug in the power cable to continue working with PRONTO, and
recharge the battery.
The forced Stand-by mode lasts some hours after which PRONTO will
shut down completely and all unsaved data will be lost.

When the battery is too low, a signal (high-high-low) and the message
"Battery low" on the Braille display will alert you that PRONTO has
been turned off automatically.

NOTE: PRONTO will not save your data automatically! When, after
ignoring all the warnings, PRONTO is turned off because of a low
battery, previously unsaved data will be lost!

To recharge the device, please use only the charger delivered with
PRONTO.
Connect the small plug of the charger cable into the round port at the
left rear of PRONTO, and the separate power cable to the charger and
then to a power socket. The battery will be fully recharged after 4 - 5
hours. First pull the power cable from the socket, then the cable from
PRONTO.

Pressing the system button S3 twice gives the level of charge in

percent. When PRONTO is connected to the charger, the message
"Quick charge" will appear when PRONTO is being charged, and
"Trickle charge" when PRONTO has been charged.

NOTE: PRONTO can be charged with a maximum of 5 Volts. The use of

an inappropriate charger will damage the battery.

A defective battery should only be replaced by a specialist. To avoid

damaging the device please contact your local dealer or the Service
Department of BAUM Retec AG.
2.6.1 Battery maintenance
to maximise the advertised running time of the battery, it should be
completely recharged every 3 months (5 hours connected to the
mains) and then run down within 60 hors until forced into Stand-by
mode.

NB: do not forget to save all files and amendments before the battery
is powered down.

Please note:
Even if the battery is fulli charged and you switch oFF the device and
do not use Pronto for a long time, the battery will discharge itself. If a
discharged battery is not recharged immediatly it probably cannot be
recharged the normal way by plugging the charger. So even if you do
not want to use pronto for some longer time make sure that the
battery is charged regularly.

2.7 Care and Maintenance

Avoid damp and water.
Use only a clean, dry cloth to clean the housing.
Do not use any cleaning fluids or solvents.
Protect the device from extreme heat, e.g. from the sun, heating units,
hot cars etc.
With extreme cold and frost the device becomes inoperable and must
be brought slowly back to room temperature. Under no circumstances
must the device be warmed up or “thawed out” in a conventional oven,
microwave oven or any other heating device!
Avoid any mechanical damage to the housing or accessories.
Use only the charger provided to charge the battery.

Please note:
Even when the bag is closed, the sensitive elements on the sides of the
device are only partially protected. When putting the bag down please
ensure that these elements are not dirty or water-damaged.

If there are any technical problems please contact:

BAUM Retec AG (Service),
In der Au 22,
D-69257 Wiesenbach
Germany.
Tel. +49 (0)6223 49090
E-mail: service@baum.de
2b. Description of the Device (Pronto 40)

2.1 General
Pronto 40 can used with a standard keyboard (alpha numeric normal
keyboard or QWERT keyboard) or with a 8 dot Braille keyboard. Both
keyboards are designed as modules and can be exchanged by the
user.
Connection ports are on the right and left side of the device
The keyboard and other elements are located on the upper surface and
some ohter element can be found on the front.

Underneath are 6 small feet and the screws.

2.2 Elements on the upper surface

Keys overview from the front to back:
- 4 round System keys, 2 square thumb keys and a Navistick
- 40 cell Braille Display with 40 positioning keys, 6 round Display
keys each 3 left (D1, D2, D3) and each 3 right (D4, D5, D6) besides the
Braille Display
- Keyboard modul (Standardor Braille)
- Round REC-Button (Voice recorder)
- Loudspeaker
- 2 interlock keys on the left and right of the keyboard modul

2.2.1 Keyboard
The upper surface behind the Braille display holds the keyboard. The
keyboard of Pronto 40 is either a small normal computer keyboard
(QWERT standard keyboard) or a 8 dot Braille keyboard. The used
keyboard module is fastened to the device. In delivery Pronto 40 holds
the standard keyboard and the Braille keyboard is equipment.

How to unfasten and exchange the keyboard module:

1. In the rear part of the upper side, left and right beside the keyboard
you find 2 interlock keys
2. Push simultaniously the rihgt key to the right and the left key to the
left. This unfastens the keyboard modul.
3. Lift the modul and remove it.
4. Without the keyboard modul the upper side of teh device shows a
deepening where the modul normally is placed.
5. To fasten the keyboard modul, put the front edge of the modul in th
 front part of the deepening then let it down to the rear side and press
it down.
6. The interlock keys fasten and the keyboard modul is connected to
the device.

2.2.1.1 The standard keyboard modul (QWERT)

This keyboard modul is a small normal computer keyboard (i.e. an
alphanumeric keyboard with 69 keys and tactile marking).
This keyboard dispenses with number pads and function keys as they
can be called up with specific key combinations.

The edges on the right, left and rear side of the module are
heightened.

The keyboard consists of 5 rows. The gaps between the keys display in
the overview table as blank fields.

They are arranged in english keyboard leyout as follows (from top to

bottom, and from left to right):

ESC 1! 2@super 3#§up 4$ 5% 6 7& 8* 9( 0) -_ =+ Delete Backsp

-script 2 er- Insert ace
script3
TAB q w e r t y u i o p [{ ]} Return
upper
half
Caps a s d f g h j k l ;: ‘” \| Return
lock lower
half
Shift none z x c v b n m ,< .> /- Shift Up arrow FN
CTRL Win FN Alt Space Space Alt Contex CTRL Left Down arrow Right
bar-left bar - Gr t arrow arrow
right

Keys with multiple entries written on them execute the normal function
first, the second function in conjunction with the Shift key, and the
third with Alt gr key.
Exception: the Insert key is used in conjunction with the FN key (FN+
delete).

The following keys are marked:

Top row: 2, 6, Minus
Second row: TAB, y
Third row: a, f, j, semicolon
Fourth row: n, right Shift key
Bottom row: both CTRL keys.

The function keys F1 to F10 are executed by pressing FN and the

corresponding number, eg. press FN+5 for F5.

FN and the arrow keys perform the following tasks:

FN + up arrow = page-up
FN + down arrow = page-down
FN + left arrow = Home
FN + right arrow = End.

These can be combined with the Control and Shift key as with Windows
commands.

Example:
CTRL+FN+right arrow = CTRL+END
CTRL+FN+left arrow = CTRL+HOME

2.2.1.2 The Braille Keyboard Modul

The edge on the rear side of the module is heightened.
The upper surface hold 8 square keys located ergonomical. From left to
right they are called: B7, B3, B2, B1, B4, B5, B6, B8.
The left thumb key (B9) is the command key, the right thumb key (B0)
is the space bar.
All functions, commands and entering text can completely be done by
this Braille keys.

2.2.2 The Braille Display

On the upper surface in front of the keyboard you find the 40 cell
Braille Display.
On top of each Braille cell there is a positioning or cursorrouting key
(P). On each side of the Braille display there are three small round
Display keys numbered from the top down D1, D2, D3 on the left and
D4, D5, D6 on the right.

2.2.3 Furter Elements and Buttons

- Loudspeaker: left and right beside teh keyboard
- REC-Button (Voice Recorder): round button left beside teh keybord,
underneath the loudspeaker
- internal microphone: small hole right beside the keyboard,
underneath the loudspeaker
On the sloped front side:
- in the middle: Navistick = a small movable switch for movements up,
down, right, and left; it can also be pressed in the middle
- directly besides left and right the Navistick = 2 square thumb keys
- to the left of the Navistick: system keys S1 and S2 = two small round
key, underneath the first Braille cells.
- to the right of the Navistick: system keys S3 and S4 = two small
round keys, underneath the last Braille cells.

2.3 Elements on the sides of the device

2.3.1 The right side

On the right side (from front to back):
- round button: Power on/off button
- square opening: USB port (Master) = for the USB memory stick
- small square opening: mini USB port (Slave) = for connection to a PC
- small slot with finger recess: for inserting the SD or SD HC memory
card
- small slot: serial port

2.3.2 The left Side

On the left side (from front to back):
- a small wheel set into the housing: volume adjustment – turn
forwards to decrease the volume, and backwards to increase it.
- small round opening: microphone socket = for connecting an
external microphone (electret-Condensator mikrophone)
- small round opening: headphone socket (stereo).
- small square opening with a round socket: mains connector (charger).

2.4 Cable and accessories

The USB cable is intended for connection to a computer, and is ca. 1.5
metres long. One end has a standard USB plug for insertion into a free
USB port on the computer. The other end has a mini USB plug for use
with Pronto’s mini USB port. When inserting the vaguely trapeziform
plug, make sure it is inserted in the correct way: if it does not fit into
the socket simply turn it round.
When exchanging data with your computer the Microsoft ActiveSync
(under Windows 2000 / Windows XP) or Microsoft Mobile Device
Center (under Windows Vista) application must also be launched.

One end of the serial cable has a 9-pole (female) serial plug for
connecting to a serial port on your computer. The other end has a
small square plug for connecting to Pronto: when connecting to
Pronto’s serial port, make sure that the thick side is facing down. To
terminate the connection, press the small raised parts on either side of
the plug to disconnect the plug, and then pull it out.

2.4.1 Memory cards

SD memory cards (Secure Digital card) can be used as a mobile
memory device. The memory card provided is already inserted into the
corresponding slot on the right side. SD cards of various sizes can be
used (e.g. 2 GB). SD cards have the lower right-hand corner removed
so that it easier to determine the correct way of inserting them. The
SD card must be introduced into the slot with this edge first, and then
pushed further in until it clicks into place. To remove it, use the eject
mechanism by pressing the card further in – the card will be released
and will partially emerge from the slot to allow it to be removed.

Memory cards allow files to be transferred quickly and easily between

Pronto and other devices that are SD-card compatible. To do so, a
connection can be established via ActiveSync (Windows XP / 2000) or
Mobile Device Center (Windows Vista). Pronto will be connected to your
PC, with the SD card inserted in Pronto), or a so-called card reader
used. When inserting the SD card in the card reader, the side which
normally faces up in Pronto QS must now face down.

2.5 The bag

The bag protects Pronto well during transportation or whehn Pronto is
not in use. To avoid mechanical damagees of its keys or ports ant to
protect from dirt keep Pronto always in its bag.
Do not put Pronto in the bag when it is still connectet to earphones or
other cables.

2.6 Battery and Charger (mains connection)

2.6.1 Battery Charging

With its internal battery (Ion Lithium) you can work with PRONTO! for
about 15 - 20 hours or it is in stand by mode for several days. It runs
shorter depending on the size of an inserted storage card or if a uSB
memory stick is used or If bluetooth is switched on.
When the battery’s remaining life falls below a certain level, Pronto will
give warnings at irregular intervals (when the residual charge is at
10%, 5% to 0%). These messages can be quitt and you can continue
working. When the last message is given, Pronto will advise you to
charge the battery immediately, and shortly afterwards will switch to
Stand-by or Suspend mode. Any unsaved data will still be saved at this
point. In this enforced Stand-by mode, Pronto can no longer be
switched on and emits a tone at certain intervals.
Plug in the power cable to continue working with PRONTO, and
recharge the battery.
This enforced Stand-by mode lasts some hours, after which Pronto will
shut down fully and all unsaved data will be lost.
This automatic shutdown resulting from a residual battery strength
that is too low is accompanied by an audible signal (high-high-low).

NB: Pronto has no automatic saving of data, so if all the warnings are
ignored Pronto can lose unsaved data if the battery strength is too low.

To recharge the device, please use only the charger delivered with
PRONTO.
Connect the small plug of the charger cable into the small port at the
far end of the left side of PRONTO, and the separate power cable to the
charger and then to a power socket. The battery will be fully recharged
after 4 - 5 hours. First pull the power cable from the power socket, then
pull the cable rom the meins connector of PRONTO.

Press the system key S3 twice briefly to announce the battery status in
percent. When connected to the unit the message “Fast charge” will be
announced when the battery is being charged, and "Trickle charge”
when the battery is charged.

NB: The use of an inappropriate charger will damage the battery.

A defective battery should only be replaced by a specialist. To avoid
damaging the device please contact your local dealer or the Service
Department of BAUM Retec AG.

2.6.2 Battery maintenance:

to benefit from the maximum advertised life of the battery, it should
be completely recharged approximately every three months (5 hours
connected to the mains) and then discharged within 60 hours until
forced into Stand-by mode.
NB: do not forget to save all data and amendments before discharging.

Please note:
Even if the battery is fulli charged and you switch oFF the device and
do not use Pronto for a long time, the battery will discharge itself. If a
discharged battery is not recharged immediatly it probably cannot be
recharged the normal way by plugging the charger. So even if you do
not want to use pronto for some longer time make sure that the
battery is charged regularly.
Or keep PRONTO connected all the time to the charger,

2.7 Care and maintenance

Avoid damp and water.
Use only a clean, dry cloth to clean the housing.
Do not use any cleaning fluids or solvents.
Protect the device from extreme heat, e.g. from the sun, heating units,
hot cars etc.
With extreme cold and frost the device becomes inoperable and must
be brought slowly back to room temperature. Under no circumstances
must the device be warmed up or “thawed out” in a conventional oven,
microwave oven or any other heating device!
Avoid any mechanical damage to the housing or accessories.
Use only the charger provided to charge the battery.

Please note:
Even when the bag is closed, the sensitive elements on the sides of the
device are only partially protected. When putting the bag down please
ensure that these elements are not dirty or water-damaged.

Please contact our Service Department if you encounter any problems

or have any questions:
BAUM Retec AG,
Service,
In der Au 22,
D-69257 Wiesenbach
Germany.
Tel.: +49 06223 4909-0
E-mail: service@baum.de
 2c. Description of the Device (Pronto! QS)

2.1 General
Connection ports are at the back of the device on the lower left-hand
side.
The keyboard is located on the upper surface, and other elements can
be found on both sides and on the front.

2.2 Key layout on the upper surface

The upper surface holds the keyboard. The Pronto QS keyboard is a
small normal computer keyboard (i.e. an alphanumeric keyboard with
69 keys and tactile marking).
This space-saving keyboard dispenses with number pads and function
keys as they can be called up with specific key combinations.

The keyboard consists of 5 rows. The gaps between the keys display in
the overview table as blank fields.

They are arranged in english keyboard leyout as follows (from top to

bottom, and from left to right):

ESC 1! 2@supe 3#§uper 4$ 5% 6 7& 8* 9( 0) -_ =+ Delete Backsp

r-script -script3 Insert ace
2
TAB q w e r t y u i o p [ ]} Return
{ upper
half
Caps a s d f g h j k l ;: ‘” \| Return
lock lower
half
Shift none z x c v b n m ,< .> /- Shift Up FN
arrow
CTRL Win FN Alt Space Space Al Conte CTRL Left Down Right
bar- bar - t xt arrow arrow arrow
left right G
r

Keys with multiple entries written on them execute the normal function
first, the second function in conjunction with the Shift key, and the
third with Alt gr key.
Exception: the Insert key is used in conjunction with the FN key (FN+
delete).

The following keys are marked:

Top row: 2, 6, Minus
Second row: TAB, y
Third row: a, f, j, semicolon
Fourth row: n, right Shift key
Bottom row: both CTRL keys.

The function keys F1 to F10 are executed by pressing FN and the

corresponding number, eg. press FN+5 for F5.

FN and the arrow keys perform the following tasks:

FN + up arrow = page-up
FN + down arrow = page-down
FN + left arrow = Home
FN + right arrow = End.

These can be combined with the Control and Shift key as with Windows
commands.

In the word processor, the following commands are available:

CTRL+FN+right arrow = file end
CTRL+FN+left arrow = file beginning
FN+Left arrow = Beginning of line
FN+right arrow = end of line

2.3 Other keyboard elements

On the front side:
- in the middle: Navistick = a small movable switch for movements up,
down, right, and left; it can also be pressed in the middle
- to the left of the Navistick: system keys S1 and S2 = two small
square keys
- to the right of the Navistick: system keys S3 and S4 = two small
square keys
- to the right of these: a further small square key = the REC key for the
voice recorder (Dictaphone), underneath the right CTRL key.

On the left side (from front to back):

- a small wheel set into the housing: volume adjustment – turn
forwards to decrease the volume, and backwards to increase it.
- small round opening: microphone socket
- small round opening: headphone socket (stereo).
On the right side:
- round key: on/off button
- narrow window: Bluetooth antenna.

On the back (from left to right when the front of Pronto QS is facing the
user):

- far left – a small square opening with a round socket: mains

connector.
- in the middle – a small slot: serial port
- a small square opening: mini USB port = for connection to a PC
(slave)
- small slot with finger recess: for inserting the SD memory card
- on the far right – a square opening: USB port = for the USB memory
stick (Master).

Underneath:
6 small feet, the serial number, and model information.

The Voice recorders internal microphone is hidden in the housing. An

external microphone can be connected via the socket on the left-hand
side of the device.

2.4 Cable and accessories

The USB cable is intended for connection to a computer, and is ca. 1.5
metres long. One end has a standard USB plug for insertion into a free
USB port on the computer. The other end has a mini USB plug for use
with Pronto’s mini USB port. When inserting the vaguely trapeziform
plug, make sure it is inserted in the correct way: if it does not fit into
the socket simply turn it round. When exchanging data with your
computer the Microsoft ActiveSync application must also be launched –
please consult the relevant chapter in the Handbook.

One end of the serial cable has a 9-pole (female) serial plug for
connecting to a serial port on your computer. The other end has a
small square plug for connecting to Pronto: when connecting to
Pronto’s serial port, make sure that the thick side is facing down. To
terminate the connection, press the small raised parts on either side of
the plug to disconnect the plug, and then pull it out.

When connecting an external Braille display, a Bluetooth connection is

recommended; BAUM’s SuperVario, PocketVario, VarioConnect and
Conny are ideal Braille displays.
To connect SuperVario Braille displays, an optional special cable is
available.
2.4.1 Memory cards
SD memory cards (Secure Digital card) can be connected to Pronto QS
as a mobile memory device. The memory card provided is already
inserted into the corresponding slot on the back of Pronto QS. SD cards
of various sizes can be used (e.g. 2 GB). SD cards have the lower right-
hand corner removed so that it easier to determine the correct way of
inserting them. The SD card must be introduced into the slot with this
edge first, and then pushed further in until it clicks into place. To
remove it, use the eject mechanism by pressing the card further in –
the card will be released and will partially emerge from the slot to
allow it to be removed.

Memory cards allow files to be transferred quickly and easily between

Pronto and other devices that are SD-card compatible. To do so, a
connection can be established via ActiveSync (Windows XP / 2000) or
Mobile Device Center (Windows Vista). Pronto will be connected to your
PC, with the SD card inserted in Pronto), or a so-called card reader
used. When inserting the SD card in the card reader, the side which
normally faces up in Pronto QS must now face down.

2.5 The bag

The bag protects Pronto QS well during transportation or whehn Pronto
is not in use. To avoid mechanical damagees of its keys or ports ant to
protect from dirt keep Pronto QS always in its bag.
Do not put Pronto in the bag when it is still connectet to earphones or
other cables.

2.6 Battery and Charger (mains connection)

With its internal battery (Ion Lithium) you can work with PRONTO! for
about 15 - 20 hours or it is in stand by mode for several days. It runs
shorter depending on the size of an inserted storage card or if a uSB
memory stick is used or If bluetooth is switched on.
When the battery’s remaining life falls below a certain level, Pronto will
give warnings at irregular intervals (when the residual charge is at
10%, 5% to 0%). These messages can be quitt and you can continue
working. When the last message is given, Pronto will advise you to
charge the battery immediately, and shortly afterwards will switch to
Stand-by or Suspend mode. Any unsaved data will still be saved at this
point. In this enforced Stand-by mode, Pronto can no longer be
switched on and emits a tone at certain intervals.
Plug in the power cable to continue working with PRONTO, and
recharge the battery.
This enforced Stand-by mode lasts some hours, after which Pronto will
shut down fully and all unsaved data will be lost.
This automatic shutdown resulting from a residual battery strength
that is too low is accompanied by an audible signal (high-high-low).

NB: Pronto has no automatic saving of data, so if all the warnings are
ignored Pronto can lose unsaved data if the battery strength is too low.

To recharge the device, please use only the charger delivered with
PRONTO.
Connect the small plug of the charger cable into the small port at the
left rear of PRONTO, and the separate power cable to the charger and
then to a power socket. The battery will be fully recharged after 4 - 5
hours. First pull the power cable from the

Press the system key S3 twice briefly to announce the battery status in
percent. When connected to the unit the message “Fast charge” will be
announced when the battery is being charged, and "Trickle charge”
when the battery is charged.

NB: The use of an inappropriate charger will damage the battery.

A defective battery should only be replaced by a specialist. To avoid
damaging the device please contact your local dealer or the Service
Department of BAUM Retec AG.

2.6.1 Battery maintenance:

to benefit from the maximum advertised life of the battery, it should
be completely recharged approximately every three months (5 hours
connected to the mains) and then discharged within 60 hours until
forced into Stand-by mode.
NB: do not forget to save all data and amendments before discharging.

Please note:
Even if the battery is fulli charged and you switch oFF the device and
do not use Pronto for a long time, the battery will discharge itself. If a
discharged battery is not recharged immediatly it probably cannot be
recharged the normal way by plugging the charger. So even if you do
not want to use pronto for some longer time make sure that the
battery is charged regularly.
2.7 Care and maintenance
Avoid damp and water.
Use only a clean, dry cloth to clean the housing.
Do not use any cleaning fluids or solvents.
Protect the device from extreme heat, e.g. from the sun, heating units,
hot cars etc.
With extreme cold and frost the device becomes inoperable and must
be brought slowly back to room temperature. Under no circumstances
must the device be warmed up or “thawed out” in a conventional oven,
microwave oven or any other heating device!
Avoid any mechanical damage to the housing or accessories.
Use only the charger provided to charge the battery.

Please note:
Even when the bag is closed, the sensitive elements on the sides of the
device are only partially protected. When putting the bag down please
ensure that these elements are not dirty or water-damaged.

Please contact our Service Department if you encounter any problems

or have any questions:
BAUM Retec AG,
Service,
In der Au 22,
D-69257 Wiesenbach
Germany.
Tel.: +49 06223 4909-0
E-mail: service@baum.de
3. General usage, functions and the Help
system

This chapter explains the general operating functions, how to use

menus and dialogs, the different means of navigation, the most
important commands, the Help system and the “Where am I?”
function.

3.1 Braille Mode and QWERTY mode

There are two different ways of using Pronto:
1. Braille mode: Braille input on the Braille keyboard :
- Default for Pronto 18
- Pronto 40 with Braille key board modul
- Pronto QS or Pronto 40 with standard key board switched to Braille
Input (Pronto Menu / Settings / key board or shortcut Fn+B)
The Braille keys can be found on the following keys, from left to right:
B7 = a, B3 = s, B2 = d, B1 = f, B4 = j, B5 = k, B6 = l, B8 = semicolon,
B9 = left space bar, B0 = right space bar.

2. QWERTY mode: character input with the standard, normal keyboard:

- Default for Pronto QS).
- Pronto 40 with the normal key board modul
- Pronto 18 with a external standard keyboard attached

This chapter will give the keystrokes for both Braille keyboard and
standard keyboard.

Details for the Braille display or for the position and display keys refer
to the integrated Braille display (Pronto 18 / Pronto 40) or to an
optional external Braille display attached to Pronto QS (e.g.
SuperVario, VarioConnect).

Some users prefer to work with the keyboard and shortcuts, whilst
others prefer to navigate through menus with the Navistick and the
arrow keys. These different methods will be described in the following
chapters.

3.2 Working with the Navistick and the arrow keys

The Navistick and arrow keys are mainly used to move through menus
or lists.
Navistick and arrow-key movements are: “up” (N-up, up-arrow),
“down” (N-down, down-arrow), “right” (N-right, right arrow), “left” (N-
left, left arrow) and “Middle” (N-center, the return key).

Use N-up or the up-arrow to move:

- one line up in the word processor
- up to the previous entry in a menu
- to the previous folder or file in a file list
- to the previous element in a dialog
- to browse backwards to previous appointments in the Calendar
- to browse backwards to previous contacts in Contacts (the address
database)
- to the previous file in the Dictaphone and mp3 player and play it
- to select the previous navigation level in the Daisy Reader
- to the previous saved radio station in the Internet Radio and play it.

Use N-down or the down-arrow to move:

- one line down in the word processor
- down to the next entry in a menu
- to the next folder or file in a file list
- to the next element in a dialog
- to browse forwards to future appointments in the Calendar
- to browse forwards in Contacts (the address database)
- to the next file in the Dictaphone and mp3 player and play it
- to select the next navigation level in the Daisy Reader
- to the next saved radio station in the Internet Radio and play it.

Use N-right or the right-arrow to:

- move one character to the right in the word processor (Cursor right)
- open a submenu in a menu (to access further entries on different
levels)
- open a folder in a file list (to access the folders and files)
- move one character (cursor) to the right in an edit box in a dialog
- browse forwards to the next day in the Calendar
- move to the next field in an entry in Contacts (the address database)
- move to the next element in a list
- fast forward 10 seconds within a recording in the mp3 player
- move forwards through the navigation level in the Daisy Reader
- move to the next found radio station in the Internet Radio and play it.

Use N-left or the left-arrow to:

- move one character to the left in the word processor (Cursor left)
- close a submenu in a menu (back to the next highest menu level)
- close an open subfolder in a file list (the highest level is the root
directory)
- move one character (cursor) to the left in an edit box in a dialog
- browse backwards to the previous day in the Calendar
- move to the previous field in an entry in Contacts (the address
database)
- move to the previous element in a list
- rewind 10 seconds within a recording in the mp3 player
- move backwards through the navigation level in the Daisy Reader
- move to the previous found radio station in the Internet Radio and
play it.

Use N-center or the Return key to confirm an action, e.g.:

- a general “OK” command
- to open a file from a file list in the word processor
- to execute commands or select menu entries.

3.3a Working with the Braille keys (Braille mode)

The 8-dot Braille keyboard and its two thumb keys allow a large variety
of letter commands and dot pattern commands to be input.

3.3b Working with the standard keyboard (QWERTY

mode)
The keyboard allows text and commands to be input, functions to be
executed and menus opened.
When opening menus, calling up functions or executing commands, it
is often the case that several keys must be pressed in a specific order.
It is generally the case that the appropriate keys for the command
must first be pressed and then held. Some special commands then
require an extra key to be pressed, before all keys must be released.
Such keys are: Alt, Control, Shift, the Windows key, the FN key and
Caps Lock.

3.3.1a Inputting text (Braille mode)

Input text with the 8-dot Braille display. Write the text in Computer
Braille for optimum speech output support.
Input capital letters in conjunction with the B7 Braille key.
The cursor (text marker) will move to the position of the next character
input. When adding or editing texts the cursor can be moved to the
desired position with the appropriate commands (see Chapter 3.4.1).
Moving to the right or left (Navistick or arrow keys) will move the
cursor one character forwards or backwards in the text respectively.

3.3.1b Inputting text (QWERTY mode)

Input text with the letter keys on the keyboard.
Capital letters can be input and a key’s secondary function executed in
conjunction with the right or left shift key.
The cursor (text marker) will move to the position of the next character
input. When adding or editing texts the cursor can be moved to the
desired position with the appropriate commands (see Chapter 3.4.1).
Moving to the right or left (Navistick or arrow keys) will move the
cursor one character forwards or backwards in the text respectively.

3.3.2a Letter commands (Braille mode)

These are shortcuts in conjunction with both B8 and B9, or just B9.
They execute the assigned command quickly and securely. The Braille
form of the letter with the B8 Braille key and the left thumb key (B9)
are pressed, e.g. to open the “File” menu in the word processor, press
“f” with B8 and the left thumb key (f+B8B9).
The shortcuts (also called Hotkeys) are generally linked to the
command or function name, i.e. they resemble the assigned shortcuts
in Windows applications.
In menus, the individual entries can be selected directly by inputting
the letter assigned to them (accelerator) , e.g. in the Pronto menu,
type “s” to select and open the “ME s Settings” option.

3.3.2b Letter commands (QWERTY mode)

These are shortcuts in conjunction with the following control keys:
Control, Alt, Shift or the Windows key. They execute a function quickly
and securely. Press and hold the appropriate control key and then the
appropriate letter key, and then release them.
In the word processor, for example, press “Alt + f” to open the “File”
menu.
The shortcuts (also called Hotkeys) are generally linked to the
command or function name, i.e. they resemble the assigned shortcuts
in Windows applications.
In menus, the individual entries can be selected directly by inputting
the letter assigned to them (accelerator), e.g. in the Pronto menu, type
“s” to select and open the “Settings” option.

3.3.3a Dot patterns and their assigned area (Braille mode)

Symmetrical dot pattern commands are used to jump between certain
text areas with the basic movements: forwards, backwards, current.
- The left-hand Braille keys govern movement to the left or
backwards,
- the right-hand keys govern movement to the right or forewards;
- keys involving both hands govern commands relating to the
current area.

The following summary gives dot patterns for movement to the left,
right and the current area:
Character: left B1, right B4, current B1B4.
Word: left B2, right B5, current B2B5.
Sentence: left B3, right B6, current B3B6.
Line: left B1B2, right B4B5, current B1B2B4B5.
Paragraph: left B1B3, right B4B6, current B1B3B4B6.
Page: left B2B3, right B5B6, current B2B3B5B6.
Beginning of text B1B2B3, end of text B4B5B6, entire text
B1B2B3B4B5B6.

These dot patterns can be used in conjunction with the command keys
B9 and B7, B8 or B0 to execute special commands in the word
processor.
- dot pattern plus B9 and B0: read out the area.
- dot pattern plus B9 and B7: delete area.
- dot pattern right/left plus B9: places the cursor on the first character
of the next/previous area (silent).
- dot pattern for the current area plus B9: highlights the area.

3.3.4a Functions on individual Braille keys (Braille mode)

The following frequently used commands are not assigned to letter or
dot pattern commands:
Left thumb key, B9 = command key, confirms the selection or function.
Right thumb key, B0 = space bar, in conjunction with B9 becomes an
extended command key.
B7 = delete characters backwards, default setting (it is possible to
switch over to the character input functions of dot 7 in: Pronto
menu/Settings/Keyboard).
B8 = new line (line break), default setting (it is possible to switch over
to the character input functions of dot 8 in: Pronto
menu/Settings/Keyboard).
B9B7B8 = general cancel command, the opposite of B9.
B9B7 = delete command for highlighted areas or files.

3.3.4b The functions of individual keys (QWERTY mode)

Return key = command key – confirms a selection or function, new line
in the word processor.
Backspace = deletes characters backwards.
Escape = general cancel command, the opposite of the Return key.
Delete = delete command for the current character, element or file.
Alt = opens commands menus. A command key when used in
conjunction with other keys.
Control (Ctrl) = a command key when used in conjunction with other
keys.
Shift = for capital letters, and to access the secondary functions in
conjunction with other keys.

3.4 Reading, highlighting and deleting text

3.4.1a Reading commands in Braille mode

In addition to the above dot patterns, both thumb keys (B9 and B0) are
pressed. The cursor does not move and stays on the first character of
the text area.

Read character: left B9B0B1, right B9B0B4, current B9B0B1B4

Read word: left B9B0B2, right B9B0B5, current B9B0B2B5
Read sentence: left B9B0B3, right B9B0B6, current B9B0B3B6
Read line: left B9B0B1B2, right B9B0B4B5, current B9B0B1B2B4B5
Read paragraph: left B9B0B1B3, right B9B0B4B6, current
B9B0B1B3B4B6
Read page: left B9B0B2B3, right B9B0B5B6, current B9B0B2B3B5B6
Read document: B9B0B1B2B3B4B5B6.

To move and position the cursor:

Go to beginning of line and read line: B9B0B1B2B3B7
Go to end of line and read line: B9B0B4B5B6B8
Go to beginning of document (do not read): B9B0B1B2B3
Go to end of document (do not read): B9B0B4B5B6

Spell out characters: twice B9B0B1B4

Spell out word: twice B9B0B2B5.

When moving line-by-line through the text the cursor will remain in the
position it occupied in the displayed segment (window). When a blank
line is reached it will jump to the beginning of the line. When a line of
text is next encountered it will jump to the same column it occupied
before.

Continuous reading from the cursor position where the cursor follows
the text is also available (see Chapter 5.2).
- start with B9, N-center or r+B8B9.
- stop with B9, N-center.
3.4.1b Reading commands in QWERTY mode
Use the following command to navigate in the text and read the
current area. The cursor does not move and stays on the first character
of the text area.

One character to the left/right: Left arrow/Right arrow

One word to the left/right: Ctrl+left arrow / Ctrl+right arrow
One sentence to the left/right: Shift+Ctrl+minus sign / Shift+Ctrl+plus
sign
Current sentence: Shift+Ctrl+space bar
Previous/next line: Up arrow / Down arrow
Previous/next page : Page-up (FN+up arrow) / Page down (FN+down
arrow).
Spell out characters: Ctrl+full stop
Spell out word: Ctrl+comma.

To move and position the cursor:

Go to beginning of line and read line: Home key (FN+left arrow)
Go to end of line and read line: End key (FN+right arrow)
Go to beginning of document (do not read): Ctrl+Home
(FN+Shift+Ctrl+left arrow)
Go to end of document (do not read): Ctrl+End (FN+Shift+Ctrl+right
arrow).

When moving line-by-line through the text the cursor will remain in the
position it occupied in the displayed segment (window). When a blank
line is reached it will jump to the beginning of the line. When a line of
text is next encountered it will jump to the same column it occupied
before.

Continuous reading from the cursor position where the cursor follows
the text, is also available (see Chapter 5.2).
- start with N-center or Shift+Ctrl+r.
- stop with N-center or Ctrl.

3.4.2a Highlight text blocks (Braille mode)

In addition to the above-mentioned dot pattern commands for the
current block, only the left thumb key (B9) must be pressed.

Highlight character: B9B1B4

Highlight word: B9B2B5
Highlight sentence: B9B3B6
Highlight line: B9B1B2B4B5
Highlight paragraph: B9B1B3B4B6
Highlight page: B9B2B3B5B6
Highlight document: B9B1B2B3B4B5B6
Highlighting blocks:
Highlight the first character of the desired block (beginning of block)
with B9B1B4, and the last character (end of block) with B9B1B4. This
will highlight the entire text between these two points.

Copy highlighted text to clipboard: c+B8B9

Remove highlighting: B9B7B8
Delete highlighted block: B9B7.

3.4.2b Highlight text block (QWERTY mode)

In addition to the above-mentioned commands for navigating in text,
the Shift key must be pressed. The text is highlighted from the position
of the cursor as follows:

Character by character right/left: Shift+right arrow / Shift+left arrow

Word by word right/left: Shift+Ctrl+right arrow / Shift+Ctrl+left arrow
Line by line next/previous: Shift+down arrow / Shift+up arrow
To end of line: Shift+End (FN+Shift+right arrow)
To beginning of line: Shift+Home (FN+Shift+left arrow)
To beginning of document: Shift+Ctrl+Home (FN+Shift+Ctrl+left
arrow)
To end of document: Shift+Ctrl+End (FN+Shift+Ctrl+right arrow)
Entire text: Ctrl+a.

To highlight blocks:
Highlight the first character of the desired block (beginning of block)
with Ctrl+space bar, and the last character (end of block) with
Ctrl+space bar. This will highlight the entire text between these two
points.

Copy highlighted text to clipboard: Ctrl+c

Remove highlighting: Escape
Delete highlighted block: Ctrl+Delete.

3.4.3a Delete text blocks (Braille mode)

Highlight the desired block and delete with B9B7, or press the dot
command for the desired block directly, together with B7B9.
Delete characters: left B9B7B1 or B7, right B9B7B4, current B9B7B1B4
Delete word: left B9B7B2, right B9B7B5, current B9B7B2B5
Delete sentence: left B9B7B3, right B9B7B6, current B9B7B3B6
Delete line: left B9B7B1B2, right B9B7B4B5, current B9B7B1B2B4B5
Delete paragraph: left B9B7B1B3, right B9B7B4B6, current
B9B7B1B3B4B6
Delete page: left B9B7B2B3, right B9B7B5B6, current B9B7B2B3B5B6.

3.4.3b Delete text blocks (QWERTY mode)

Highlight the desired block and delete with Ctrl+Delete.

3.5a Navigate in the Planner and Addressbook (Braille

mode)
Dot commands can be used to jump between entries and fields, as
follows:

Planner (Calendar)
Day: backwards B1, forwards B4.
Week or 7-days: backwards B2, forwards B5.
Appointment: backwards B3, forwards B6.
Month: backwards B1B2, forwards B4B5.
6 months: backwards B1B3, forwards B4B6.
Year: backwards B2B3, forwards B5B6.
Go to “Today” B0.

Addressbook (Contacts):
First/last contact: B1B2B3 / B4B5B6
Previous/next contact: B3 / B6
One field to the left/right: B1 / B4
Five fields to the left/right: B2 / B5,
First/Last contact field: B1B2 / B4B5.

3.5b Navigate in the Planner and Addressbook

(QWERTY mode)
Commands can be used to jump between entries and fields, as follows:

Planner (Calendar):

Day: backwards, left arrow, forwards, right arrow.

Week or 7 days: backwards, Shift+left arrow, forwards, Shift+right
arrow.
Appointment: backwards, up arrow, forwards, down arrow.
Month: backwards, Shift+up arrow, forwards, Shift+down arrow.
6 months: backwards, Page-up (FN+up arrow), forwards, Page-down
(FN+down arrow).
Year: backwards, Shift+Page up, forwards, Shift+Page down.
Go to “Today” space bar.

Addressbook (Contacts):
First/last contact: Ctrl+up arrow / Ctrl+down arrow
Previous/Next contact: Up arrow / Down arrow
One field to the left/right: Left arrow / Right arrow
Five fields to the left/right: Shift+Ctrl+left arrow / Shift+Ctrl+right
arrow
First/last contact field: Home / End (FN+left arrow / FN+right arrow.

3.6 Working with menus

Generally speaking, menus are lists where different settings, functions
and commands can be selected. They can consist of several levels. The
entries of a menu level are placed underneath each other. A lower
level of menu is called a submenu – its entries refer to the entries on
the higher menu level and help subdivide it. When an entry is selected
and confirmed from a menu, its assigned function is executed – a
dialog may be opened, a command executed or an application or
setting activated.

3.6.1 Navigating in a menu

Within a menu it is possible to navigate up or down as follows:
- with the Navistick up or down
- with Braille keys B3 or B6 (Braille mode)
- with the arrow keys up or down (QWERTY mode)
- with display keys D1 and D3 (on the Braille display).

A submenu can be opened or closed (change in menu level):

- with the Navistick to the right or left
- with Braille keys B4 or B1 (Braille mode)
- with the arrow keys to the right or left (QWERTY mode).

The Return key, B9 or N-center can only open a submenu.

3.6.2 Selecting a menu entry

When an entry has been selected or confirmed, its assigned function
will be executed and the menu closed. To confirm selection of the
menu entry, press:
- the Navistick N-center
- the command key B9 (Braille mode)
- the Return key (QWERTY mode)
- the display key D6 or a position key (on the Braille display).

In an open menu the assigned letters can be pressed to save time. The
relevant menu entry will be activated immediately and there will be no
need to browse and confirm.

To quit a menu or submenu (cancel), press:

- B7B8 with the left thumb key (Braille mode)
- Escape (QWERTY mode)
- the display key D4 (on the Braille display).

3.6.3 Closing and opening menus

The Pronto menu is a main menu where all applications can be opened,
and settings adjusted. Press and hold the system key S3 to open it.
If you are already in a submenu of the Pronto menu and you press and
hold S3, you will be taken to the next highest level in the Pronto menu.
The uppermost level in the main menu is “Word processor”.

In QWERTY mode the Pronto menu can also be opened by pressing the
Windows key.

A command menu can be opened from any application and some

dialogs. To open it, press:
- the system key S3 once briefly
- The braille keys B9B3B5, (Braille mode)
- the Alt key (QWERTY mode).

This menu contains application-specific entries, many of which lead to

submenus or functions – confirm the desired entry to open the function
or open a submenu. If a shortcut has been assigned to the entry, the
function can be executed directly by selecting this shortcut without
having to open the command menu.

NB:
Whilst the command menu or one of its submenus is open, no other
application can be accessed or Pronto switched to standby mode. The
command menu must first be closed by pressing S3, the Alt key or
B9B3B5.

NB – appearance of menus on a Braille display:

A menu entry will appear on the Braille display with the letters ME,
followed by the assigned letter, then the entry description or a note on
dialogs or submenus, and finally the shortcut.
The assigned letter can be used to open the entry directly in an open
menu, without further confirmation.
Three dots mean that the entry leads to a dialog. A curly right-hand
bracket (or greater than sign) means that the entry leads to a
submenu.

3.7 Working with dialogs

In their simplest form, dialogs contain a piece of information and one
or two command buttons: “Yes”, “No” or “OK”, “Cancel” (e.g. with the
security question following the delete command).
Larger dialogs help change settings, input data or select functions;
such dialogs contain various elements which will be described below.

On a Braille display, the dialog elements show the short form of the
element type, the shortcut letter and the element’s description.

Within a dialog, move forwards from element to element with:

- N-down
- B9B4B6 (Braille Mode),
- the Tab key (QWERTY mode),
- D4D6 (on the Braille display)
and backwards with:
- N-up
- B9B1B3 (Braille mode).
- Shift+Tab (QWERTY mode).
- D1D3 (on the Braille display).

It is possible to jump directly to dialog elements which have a shortcut

assigned.
- shortcut key with the left thumb key, e.g. s+B9 (Braille mode)
- Alt key with the shortcut key, e.g. Alt+s (QWERTY mode).
Command buttons will be executed immediately, and with check boxes
the status will be changed.

In some dialogs, buttons lead to further dialogs or you can open a

command menu with further functions.

To quit a dialog without changing anything select “Cancel” or:

- B9B7B8 (Braille mode)
- Escape key (QWERTY mode)
- D4 (on the Braille display)

To close a dialog and confirm its entries or functions select “OK” or:
- B9 (Braille mode)
- Return key (QWERTY mode)
- D6 or a position key (on the Braille display).
3.7.1 Buttons
To confirm a command assigned to a key, press:
- N-center
- the left thumb key = B9 (Braille mode)
- Return key (QWERTY mode)
- D6 or a position key (on the Braille display).

3.7.2 Edit boxes

Edit boxes are used to input text or characters. Current or default
entries can be overwritten, deleted or amended with the usual
commands found in the word processor.

On a Braille display edit boxes are denoted with “EB”.

Infofields (IF) are edit boxes which cannot be edited as they display
only one type of information.

3.7.3 Check Boxes

Check boxes are used to activate or deactivate functions. The status of
a check box can be changed from “activated” to “deactivated”.
A check box can be checked or unchecked as follows:
- moving to the right/left
- pressing the right thumb key = B0 (Braille mode)
- pressing the space bar (QWERTY mode)
- pressing a position key (on the Braille display)

On a Braille display the status “checked” is assigned by letter “c” in

brackets;

3.7.4 List Box

List boxes offer the various entries and functions that are available.
The highlighted or shown entry is the one currently selected.
To select an entry from a list:
- move to the left or right to the previous or next entry respectively
- jump to the first entry at the beginning of the list with B9B1B2B3B7
(Braille mode) or “Home” (QWERTY mode)
- jump to the last entry in the list with B9B4B5B6B8 (Braille mode) or
“End” (QWERTY mode)
- jump to the desired entry by quickly pressing the first or first three
letters or characters of the entry’s name.

On a Braille display all lists are denoted with “LB”. The list name comes
behind the displayed, and thus selected, entry.
3.8 Working with the Braille display
The keys of the Pronto 18 Braille display or a plugged-in Braille display
such as SuperVario or VarioConnect, can be used to access many
functions. In Pronto’s many applications, the commands executed with
the display keys (described in the key summary in Appendix 2) are to
be used.

The Braille display shows all text, messages and information in 8-dot
computer Braille.
The cursor can be identified by the underlining with dots 7 and 8. A
different appearance for the cursor can be set independently in the
“Settings/Braille/Cursor” option of the Pronto menu.
At any one time the Braille elements show a part of the corresponding
number of characters. This part can be pushed forwards or backwards
(so-called ‘scrolling’) so that all the information can be read.
Use the right middle display key (D5) to scroll to the right, i.e.
forwards, and the left middle display key (D2) to scroll to the left or
backwards.

This allows a text, a menu entry or a message to be read through

quietly in its entirety.
The upper left display key D1 moves one line up, and the lower left D3
key one line down.
The upper left and the middle display keys D1D2 moves to the
beginning of the line, and the lower left and the middle keys D2D3
move to the end of the line.
To place the cursor at a specific point in the text, press the position
key (cursor routing key) above the character.
In menus and dialogs, the lower right display key D6 will select an
entry, and the upper right D4 key will cancel or end it.

In menus and dialogs the position keys can be used to click on, and
thus select, an element. In edit boxes a specific character can be
selected, for example to move the cursor when proofreading a text.
Pressing B7 together with a position key at the cursor position will
delete the character.

Pressing both middle display keys D2D5 together in Pronto 18 will turn
the speech output off and back on.

3.9 General speech settings

The most important settings such as volume, pitch and selection of the
reading voice are described briefly below:
1. open the Pronto menu and select “Settings”, then “Audio and
speech”.
2. select “Reading voice” and a dialog will open. Select the desired
voice from the list by browsing to the right or left.
3. in the “Volume”, “Speed” and “Pitch” fields, the current values are
given. A different value can be input directly, or a value between 0 and
100 can be selected in stages by moving to the right or left.
4. confirm by selecting “OK”.

The volume of the reading voice depends on the value input here in
the dialog and the selected device volume. The selected device volume
affects both the volume of the speech output and the volume of files
played on mp3 player and the Daisy Reader, and the volume of
signals.

To set the reading voice volume at a comfortable level when the

device volume has a high value, set the volume of the reading voice at
a lower value (e.g. 65) in the dialog.

NB:
Switching the speech output on and off is only useful and possible with
Pronto 18: press both middle display keys D2D5 simultaneously.

3.10 The Help system

3.10.1 Automatic help

Automatic help provides brief spoken information in menus and
dialogs. It is particularly useful for beginners as it explains the current
element and what it does.
Automatic help is read out by the system voice with a slightly different
pitch and is activated by default.
If you do not need the automatic help or you want to change the pitch,
open the Pronto menu with S3, select “Settings/Audio and speech
/Automatic help” and make the necessary changes in the dialog.

3.10.2 Detailed context help

Context help provides detailed help on the current situation or selected
element in menus, dialogs or individual applications. Context help
provides information on the type of element and its characteristics. If
shortcuts are available these will be given by the context help along
with any tips or examples.

Call up the context help for the current entry, element or application
with:
- B9B2B6 (Braille mode)
- the function key F1 or FN+1 (QWERTY mode).

Context help is read out by the system voice and shown on the Braille
display. Scroll with the middle display keys D5 and D2 to read the
context help on the Braille display.
Use the commands for character-by-character or word-by word moving
(similar to those in the word processor) to read the help text or to jump
to the end or beginning of the line.
To have the help read out again, navigate down to the “OK” button and
then back up.

To close the context help, press the OK button.

You will be taken back to the position you occupied before calling up
the context help.

NB:
You can determine whether or not the context help should read out the
Braille shortcuts or the QWERTY shortcuts for the standard keyboard,
or both. This can be useful if you use Pronto 18 with an external
standard keyboard or have switched Pronto QS to Braille mode.
Open the Pronto menu with S3, select “Presentation/Menu
presentation” and activate the appropriate check boxes in the dialog.

3.10.3 The Manual in the “Help” menu

The complete manual has been saved as a text document in Pronto. It
can be opened at any time when you are working with Pronto. To open
the desired chapter from the manual, proceed as follows:
1. open the Pronto menu by pressing the system key S3 long.
2. navigate up or down to the Help entry and open the submenu by
moving to the right. The shortcut “h with B9B7B8” (Braille mode) or
“Windows key+h” (QWERTY mode) can also be used to open the Help
entry directly.
3. confirm the entry “Pronto manual”. A submenu will open which has
entries for each chapters.
4. navigate up or down to the chapter featuring your desired topic and
confirm the entry (left thumb key or Return).
5. the word processor will open and will display the chapter selected
from the handbook.
6. press N-center to have the text read out continuously, or use the
reading commands from Chapter 3.4.1.

To open another chapter from the manual, proceed as described

above.
A special feature has been built into Pronto for reading out the manual.
If the last action performed was to open a chapter from the manual in
the Pronto menu as described above, and then the Pronto menu is
opened by pressing S3 long, you will be taken to the menu level
containing the other chapters from the manual. Navigating up or down
will allow another chapter to be selected quickly. If you wish to access
another entry from main menu, press S3 long again until you reach the
desired higher level.

NB:
Each opened chapter from the manual remains open in the word
processor until it is closed. To close a chapter, open the command
menu by pressing S3 briefly, select “File”, then “Close”.

3.11 The “Where am I?” function and repetition of

spoken messages
With simple shortcuts Pronto’s “Where am I?” function offers the user
the possibility of getting his bearings in any application, menu or dialog
and to have the last message read out again.

The “Where am I?” function can be accessed by pressing:

- “Minus with B7, B8 and the left thumb key” (Braille mode)
- the Windows key + the minus sign (QWERTY mode).

The speech output will name the application in which you are currently
situated or the currently displayed message about the application,
menu or dialog. In the word processor the document name, position in
the text and current line of the text will be given.
This function can also be accessed from the Pronto menu (Pronto
menu/Settings/Audio and speech/Where am I).

The last message read out by the speech output can be read out again
with:
- “Number sign [#] with B7, B8 and the left thumb key” (Braille mode)
- Windows key + Number sign (QWERTY mode).
This function can also be accessed from the Pronto menu (Pronto
menu/ Settings/Audio and speech/Last message).

The last 10 messages read out by the speech output can be displayed
in a list and played again. To open this list, use the command:
- “Plus with B7, B8 and the left thumb key” (Braille mode)
- Windows key + Plus sign (QWERTY mode).
The list gives the last spoken messages. Move to the right to access
previous messages, and then to the left to take you back to the
beginning.
The dialog with these entries will also be displayed on a connected
Braille display.
Select “OK” to close the dialog.

NB:
In the word processor the word- and line-echo each add their own
message to this list. Letters and characters will be displayed according
to the output file.
4. System Buttons, the REC-Button, keyboard
lock, Reset Commands, Version Information,
Switch to Braille Mode / Qwert Mode

4.1 System Buttons

Each system button has several functions assigned. By pressing them
quickly (short), slowly (long) or repeatedly the different functions can
be accessed, as follows:

S1 long = Enter Word-processor

S1 quickly = PRONTO temperature
S1 twice quickly = Air pressure
S1 three times quickly = Altitude above NN (calculated from the air
pressure)

S2 long = Enter planner

S2 quickly = Reminded appointments
S2 twice quickly = Open stop watch
S2 three times quickly = Open timer

S3 long = Open PRONTO menu

S3 quickly = Open/close command menu
S3 twice quickly = Battery Status
S3 three times quickly = Compass
S2+S3 = keyboard lock on/off

S4 long = Switch to standby mode

S4 quickly = Time
S4 twice quickly = Date

4.2 REC Button (Voice Recorder)

REC press and hold = Start voice recording after a short pip; when
released two pips sound and the recording is saved.
REC quickly = Play last recording
REC quickly, then Navistick or Arrow key up/down = Play other
recordings

4.3 Keybord Lock and Braille Mode Switch

Press S2 plus S3 to turn on/off keyboard lock. The speech output gives
a corresponding message.
When keyboard lock is active it is only possible to switch to standby
mode (S4). Other keys or commands will be ignored.
To switch on again Pronto when the keyboard lock is still activated,
first press S2 plus S3 to unlock and then S1, S2 or S3 long..

On Pronto QS or Pronto 40 with standard keyboard:

You can change the functionality of the keyboard from QWERT Mode
to Braille Mode. QWERT Mode means working with the normal
keyboard (alpha numeric). Braille Mode means Braille Input with only a
few keys. In Braille Mode Pronto reacts like a Braille device and you
can work with Prontos Braille Commands.
The key command to toogle between both modes is “FN key plus b
key” and the speech output gives a corresponding message.

The keys for Braille Input are:

a = B7, s = B3, d = B2, f = B1
j = B4, k = B5, l = B6, semi colon = B8
left space bar = B9, right space bar = B0
(The following keys keep their functionality in both Modes: Enter, Tab,
Escape, Delete, Control, FN and Arrow keys)

On Pronto 40:
You can change between Braille Mode and Qwert Mode by using the
corresponding keyboard modules.

4.4 Reset Commands

4.4.1 Application Reset

When problems arise the application reset function can be really
helpful:

On Pronto 18, Pronto 40: D1+D4+B3+B6

On Pronto QS Pronto 40: „FN + Shift-left + Control-left + 7“. Note:

Press and keep pressing the keyss key by key in the asigned order.

(If necessary press this combination several times or hold the keys for
a little longer. Settings, unsaved appointments and contacts are kept,
but unsaved text will be lost).

4.4.2 Operating System Reset

The operating system reset restarts the operating system and the
application. It is helpful if the simple application reset function has no
effect. Press the following command:

On Pronto 18, Pronto 40: D1+D4+B1+B2+B4+B5.

On Pronto QS, Pronto 40: „FN + Shift-left + 0”. Note: Press and keep
pressing the keyss key by key in the asigned order.

(Beware of data loss through deletion of the scratch pad, unsaved

appointments, contacts and files, and settings).

4.4.3 System Reset

A system reset completely shuts down/reboots the device. (Beware of
data loss through deletion of the scratch pad, unsaved appointments,
contacts and files, and settings).

To execute the system reset use the following buttons:

- On Pronto 18: Shut down with S1+S4 pressed for about 10 seconds,
reboot with S1+S4 pressed short.
- On Pronto QS, Pronto 40: Press the Power on/off button on the right
side.

4.5 Version Information

The version informations are presented in a dialog. Use the following
key commands to open the dialog:

- On Pronto 18, Pronto 40: “v with B7,B8 and both thumb keys”
(B1B2B3B4B6B7B8B9B0)

- On Pronto QS, Pronto 40: “Shift + Control + v”.

You get the version number of software, operating system (OS), BIOS
and UID (User Identify number). Move up or down with the Navistick or
arrow keys, close the dialog by confirming “OK” or “Cancel”.
5. Word processor
There are four ways of launching the word processor:
1. Press and hold S1
2. In the Pronto menu select “Word processor”
3. Press “w with B9B7B8” or “Windows key + w”. This can be used to
access the word processor from any application, or to go back to it.
4. In “File manager” select an .rtf or .txt file and open it by pressing
the left thumb key (B9) or Return key. This will open the word
processor and display the selected document in Read mode (read
only).

NB:
Some of the word processor settings, commands and functions only
work when using a Braille keyboard or in Braille Mode

The Pronto manual describes both Braille Mode and QWERTY mode ,
i.e. working with a standard keyboard.

See Chapter 3 for a short summary of the most important keys for both
Braille mode and QWERTY mode.

5.1 Writing text

Type your text using the keyboard.)
The key assignment is explained in the device description (see Chapter
2).

With the Braille keyboard or in Braille Mode all 8 Braille keys can be
used to input text, preferably in ComputerBraille or 8-dot Braille.
ComputerBraille is best for optimum use of the speech output. To learn
or consult ComputerBraille dot combinations for european
Computerbraille use the Pronto file “Charactertable-
ComputerBraille.rtf”.

With the standard key board or in QWERT Mode capital letters or

secondary functions are executed in conjunction with the right or left
Shift key.

The cursor moves along with the characters as they are typed. To add
or edit text the cursor must be moved to the appropriate place with the
relevant commands (see Chapter 5.2 or 3.4.1).
When navigating to the right or left (with the Navistick or arrow keys)
the cursor will move forwards or backwards in the text character-by-
character.
5.1.1 Deleting text
In addition to the delete commands in Chapter 3.4.3, Pronto is set by
default so that pressing the Backspace key or braille key B7 will delete
a character to the left of the cursor.
The Delete key or braille key command B1B4B9B7 will delete the
character on which the cursor is currently standing.

This default B7 setting can be altered, for example to input a single P7

Braille dot with the B7 key:
This command is available in the PRONTO menu. Open the PRONTO
menu, select Settings>Keyboard and change the appropriate chec box
in the dialog.

5.1.2 Double Stroke

The double stroke function only works in in conjunction with the Braille
keyboard or in Braille Mode.)
When the double stroke function is activated, press the space bar (B0)
together with the last letter in a word, so that a space automatically
appears at the end of the word.
The double stroke function is activated/deactivated in the Pronto
menu; open the Pronto menu, select “Settings/Keyboard” and change
the appropriate check box in the dialog.

5.1.3 Insert formatting, date, and time

Place the cursor at the position where the desired element is to be
added.
Call up the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt key,
and select “Insert”. The submenu contains all the entries required to
add a new line, paragraph or page, and to insert the current date or
time.

The following shortcuts can also be used:

New line (line feed): B9B8B4B5, B8 or Return
New paragraph: B9B8B4B6 or Shift+Return
New page (form feed): B9B8B5B6 or Shift+Ctrl+Return
Add date: 5+B8B9 or F5 (FN+5)
Add time: 6+B8B9 or F6 (FN+6)
Set Tab: B9B8B4 or Tab key.

Braille presentation of formatting characters:

New line: dots P1, 3, 4, 7, 8.
New paragraph: dots P1, 3, 4, 7, 8 twice.
New page: dots P1, 2, 3, 7, 8.
Tab: dots P2, 4, 7, 8.

NB: You cannot insert this formating by entering the dots of their
braille presentation.

5.1.4 Set word- and character-echo

Speech output when writing and deleting can be set separately in the
Pronto menu. Proceed as follows:
1. open the Pronto menu by pressing S3 long or with the Windows key
2. select “Settings”, then “Keyboard”
3. a dialog will open. Navigate down to the relevant list
4. navigate to the right or left to select the desired entry from the list
5. confirm with “OK” to save the setting.

5.1.5 Special assignment of some Braille keys in Braille

mode
When working in Braille Mode, please note the following peculiarities:

- Braille keys B7 and B8 are, as a matter of priority, assigned the

“Delete character backwards” (B7) and “New line” (B8) functions when
pressed individually. To have them input dot 7 and dot 8, open the
Pronto menu, select “Settings/keyboard” and activate/deactivate the
appropriate check boxes in the dialog.

When Qwert keyboard is switched to Braille mode via FN+B

- the assignment of keys a, s, d, f, j, k, l, semicolon changes to B7, B3,
B2, B1, B4, B5, B6, B8 and can be used for the input of 8-dot Braille.
- The right space bar change to space (B0), the left space bar changes
to command key (B9)

It is possible to load different Braille tables for Braille input and output.
This means that you can switch between these and the standard Braille
table to read or write a foreign-language text in the appropriate Braille
display for that language, for example. To select and switch between
the available Braille tables use the options in the Pronto menu under
“Settings/Braille” (see Chapter 13.2.3).

5.1.6 Word wrap and hiding of formatting characters

The following option is available on Pronto 18, Pronto 40 or when a
Braille display is attached to Pronto QS.
For easier reading on the Braille display, the Braille form of the
formatting characters (line break, page break, etc.) can be hidden.
Word wrap can also be set up so that only complete words are shown
on the Braille display.
1. call up the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt
key.
2. select “Tools”, then “Braille”.
3. you will be taken to a dialog with the check boxes “Show whole
words” and “Show formatting characters”. Activate or deactivate the
desired settings and select “OK”.

Hiding of Braille dots 7 and 8 for all braille presentations is possible. To

activate this setting open the Pronto menu with S3, select “Braille” and
select the corresponding item.

5.1.7 Position in the document

When reading or editing large documents it can be useful to know
where one is in relation to the document as a whole.

Press S3 once brievly or Alt key to open teh command menu, select
“Tools”, then “Position in text”. You will receive a message on the
position of the cursor with regard to the length of the text in percent,
and on the current position of the cursor as measured from the
beginning of the document. Select “OK” to close the message.

This message can also be accessed with the shortcut “p+B8B9” or

“Ctrl+p”.

5.1.8 Setting the cursors shape

The following option is available when working with Pronto 18, Pronto
40 or a Braille display is attached to Pronto QS.
The form the cursor takes on the Braille display can be changed. In
read-only documents in Read mode, the default appearance of the
cursor is a flashing Braille dot B8. In Write mode, when a text can be
edited, the cursor is displayed by default through Braille dots B7 and
B8. The settings are valid in the word processor and edit boxes.

To set the form of the cursor and its flash rate separately in Write and
Read mode, proceed as follows:
1. open the Pronto menu by pressing S3 long or by pressing the
Windows key.
2. select “Settings/Braille/Cursor”, then “Reading mode” or “Edit
mode”.
3. a dialog will open. The “Cursor shape” edit box will display the
numbers which make up the Braille form of the cursor, e.g. 7 8.
4. input the numbers of the desired Braille form.
5. to have the cursor flash, select the appropriate check box; when it is
activated an edit box will open where the flash rate can be input or
edited.
6. the cursor can also be displayed in an inverted form – select the
appropriate check box.
7. close the dialog by selecting “OK”.

5.1.9 Draging/jumping in the line display and margin

settings
The following option is available when working with Pronto 18, Pronto
40 or a Braille display is attached to Pronto QS.
It is possible to switch between the “Drag” and “Jump” functions in the
Braille display; “Jump” is the default setting. This means that when the
cursor reaches the right or left margin, it will jump to the first or last
position of the following line segment.
This setting is valid in both the word processor and in edit boxes.

When editing or revising texts it can sometimes be useful to see the

characters before and after the cursor; this is where the “Drag”
function can help. When the cursor reaches the right or left margin, it
remains where it is but when moved along it drags the line segment to
the right or left with it.
A right and left margin can be defined for both “Jump” and “Drag” -
depending on this setting the cursor will not then remain on the last
Braille module on the right-hand margin or on the first Braille module
on the left-hand margin.

To switch between “Drag” and “Jump” and to set the margins, proceed
as follows:
1. open the Pronto menu by pressing S3 long or by pressing the
Windows key.
2. select “Settings/Braillepresentation”.
3. a dialog will open. Input the desired values for the right and left
margins.
4. select “jump” to activate the jump function; if not selected, the
“Drag” function will be activated by default.
5. close the dialog with “OK”.

NB:
During continuous reading or when the “show whole words” function
has been selected, the margin settings are ignored and the “Drag”
function is not available.
5.2 Reading texts
To navigate in texts and to read characters, words and text blocks, the
following shortcuts can be used (Braille Mode and QWERT Mode) . With
reading commands the cursor will be placed on the first character in
the text block.
Exception: if the cursor is situated on a character within a line, its
relative position will be kept when navigating to the previous or
following line.

5.2.1 Reading and navigation commands

Next/previous character: B9B0B4 / B9B0B1 or Right arrow / Left arrow
Current character: B9B0B1B4
Next/previous word: B9B0B5 / B9B0B2 or Ctrl+right arrow / Ctrl+left
arrow
Current word: B9B0B2B5
Next /previous sentence: B9B0B6 / B9B0B3 or Shift+Ctrl+plus /
Shift+Ctrl+minus
Current sentence (no change in the position of the cursor): B9B0B3B6
or Shift+Ctrl+space bar
Next/previous line: B9B0B4B5 / B9B0B1B2 or Down arrow / Up arrow
Current line: B9B0B1B2B4B5
Beginning of line and read current line: B9B0B1B2B3B7 or Pos1
(FN+left arrow)
End of line and read current line: B9B0B4B5B6B8 or End (FN+right
arrow)
Next/previous page (assuming that there are page breaks in the
document): B9B0B5B6 / B9B0B2B3 or Page down (FN+down arrow) /
Page up (FN+up arrow).
Current page (assuming that there are form feeds set in the
document): B9B0B2B3B5B6

To position the cursor only:

Beginning of document: B9B0B1B2B3 or Ctrl+Pos1 (FN+Ctrl+left
arrow)
End of document: B9B0B4B5B6 or Ctrl+End (FN+Ctrl+right arrow).
In Braille Mode also all reading commands for next or previous but
without B0.

5.2.2 Continuous reading

The speech output reads out the desired text from the cursor position
to the end of the file at a speed that can be set separately. The cursor
moves along accordingly.
Pressing the Navistick (N-center) launches the “Read from cursor”
function.
The reading starts also with the left thumb key (B9) or key combination
“Shift+Ctrl+r”.
During reading the following commands are available:

Move Navistick up: read more slowly

Move Navistick down: read more quickly (the normal speed will not be
affected)
Move Navistick to the left: jump 2 words backwards
Move Navistick to the right: jump 2 words forwards
Navistick center, B9, D6, Cursor routing key or Control key, Alt Gr or
any letter key: stops reading, with the cursor remaining on the current
(or next) word.
B9B7B8, D4 or Escape key: stop without cursor positioning, i.e. the
cursor remains at the start position.

If a braille key is pressed by mistake, the reading resumes with the last
word.

Key lock and continuous reading:

During continuous reading the key lock can be activated or deactivated
with S2+S3 without interrupting the reading. The usual message that
key lock has been activated/deactivated will not be read out.

The following option is available on Pronto 18, Pronto 40 or when a

Braille display has been attached to Pronto QS.
The Braille display automatically displays the current section being
read out, although only complete words will be shown (no word wrap)
The Braille display of formatting (line, paragraph, page) will be hidden.
Tracking with the Braille output during reading can be turned off. Open
the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key, select
“Tools”, then “Braille” and deactivate the appropriate check box.

5.3 Spelling
In simple spelling mode the word will be spelt out.
Navigate to the desired word and type twice the command B9B0B2B5
or press “Ctrl+comma”. Pronto will now be in simple spelling mode, i.e.
when the reading recommences (B9B0B5 / B9B0B2 or Ctrl+right arrow
or left arrow) the words will now be spelt out. Any other reading
commands will cancel this mode.

In advanced spelling mode the character on which the cursor rests will
be spelt out depending on the spelling table, or the dot pattern for the
Braille form will be read out. Go to the character and press B9B0B1B4
or “Ctrl+full stop” several times in succession. The spelling option will
now switch between the letter, spelling table and Braille dot pattern
options.
When reading character-by-character with the Navistick or the
right/left arrows, the characters will be spelt out according to the
manner selected. Any other reading commands will cancel this mode.

5.4 Editing functions

The “Edit” menu or its assigned shortcuts can be used to edit texts.
Text blocks can be highlighted, deleted or copied, and entire
documents added. Words or syllables can be found and replaced.

5.4.1 Highlighting
Highlighting commands are used to select or mark specific text blocks
for further editing. Highlighting is thus a prerequisite for many further
editing functions.

In Braille Mode:
To highlight elements such as words, sentences or blocks of text use
the following commands, the reading command for current area is
pressed together with only the left thumb key (B9) .
Highlight current character: B9B2B4
Highlight current word: B9B2B5
Hieghlight current sentence: B9B3B6
Highlight current line: B9B1B2B4B5
Highlight current paragraph: B9B1B3B4B6
Highlight current page (assuming that there are form feeds set in the
document) : B9B1B2B3B4B5B6

In QWERT Mode
To highlight text blocks from the cursor position (characters, words,
lines) the following Windows highlighting commands can be used:
Highlight next character: Shift+right arrow
Highlight previous character: Shift+left arrow
Highlight next word or to the end of the word: Shift+Ctrl+right arrow
Highlight previous word or to the beginning of the word: Shift+Ctrl+left
arrow
Highlight next line: Shift+down arrow (NB: if the cursor is located
within the line, the rest of the line from this position to the
corresponding position in the next line will be highlighted).
Highlight previous line: Shift+up arrow (NB: if the cursor is located
within the line, the rest of the line from this position back to the
corresponding position in the previous line will be highlighted)
Highlight to end of line: Shift+End (FN+Shift+right arrow)
Highlight to beginning of line: Shift+Home (FN+Shift+left arrow)
Highlight to end of text: Shift+Ctrl+End (FN+Shift+Ctrl+right arrow)
Highlight to beginning of text: Shift+Ctrl+Home (FN+Shift+Ctrl+left
arrow).

To highlight an entire document, call up the command menu by

pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt key and select “Edit/Highlight all”.
The shortcut B9B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B8 or “Ctrl+a” will also highlight the
entire text.

To highlight a specific section (block) of text place the cursor on the

first character of the block, call up the command menu by pressing S3
once briefly and select “Edit/Highlight beginning/end of block”. Then
place the cursor on the last character of the block and select the same
item.
The shortcut B9B1B4 or “Ctrl+space bar” will also highlight the
beginning or end of a block.

Highlighted blocks remain highlighted until another highlighting

command is executed or the Cancel command B9B7B8, D4 or Escape
key is pressed.
Moving the cursor through the text will not remove the highlighting.

When reading character-by-character or word-by-word, the speech

output will read out the word “highlighted” – this will allow you to
check whether or not the desired text or block has indeed been
highlighted.

To have the entire highlighted text read out, open the command menu
by pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt key, select “Navigation/Speak
highlighted text”, or use the shortcut “k+B8B9” or “Ctrl+k”.

Highlighted text blocks will be indicated on the Braille display by dot 8.

5.4.2 Cutting
Cutting removes a highlighted text block to the so-called clipboard,
from where it can be inserted at another position. The cut block
remains on the clipboard until another block is moved or copied to the
clipboard and overwrites it.
Proceed as follows:
1. highlight the desired text block.
2. open the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt key,
select “Edit” and then “Cut”.
3. a message will state that the block has been moved to the
clipboard.

Option:
The shortcut „x+B8B9“ or “Ctrl+x” will move a highlighted block to the
clipboard.

5.4.3 Copying
When copying, a highlighted text block remains where it is but is
copied to the clipboard. It can be added (copied) to another place. The
originally highlighted text block remains highlighted. The copied block
remains on the clipboard until another block is moved or copied to the
clipboard and overwrites it.

Proceed as follows:
1. highlight the desired text block
2. open the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt key,
select “Edit” and then “Copy”.
3. a message will state that the block has been copied to the clipboard.

Option:
The shortcut „c+B8B9“ or “Ctrl+c” will copy a highlighted text block to
the clipboard.

5.4.4 Pasting
Pasting inserts a text from the clipboard to the current position of the
cursor in the document. Pasting generally follows copying or cutting.

Proceed as follows:
1. make sure that the desired text is on the clipboard (copied or cut)
2. move the cursor to the position where the text is to be added – this
can be in another open document or edit box.
3. open the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt key,
select “Edit” then “Paste”.
4. a message will state that the block has been pasted.

Option:
The shortcut „v+B8B9“ or “Ctrl+v” will paste the block from the
clipboard to the current position of the cursor.

5.4.5 Deleting
Deleting will remove a highlighted text block from its position when a
security question is confirmed with “Yes”. Exception: characters and
words are deleted directly.

Proceed as follows:
1. highlight the desired text block.
2. open the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt key,
select “Edit” then “Delete”.
3. a dialog will open with a security question. Select “Yes” to delete the
block. Select “No” or press B9B7B8, D4 or Escape to prevent the block
from being deleted.

Option:
The shortcut „B9B7“ or “Ctrl+Delete” will delete a highlighted block if
the security question is confirmed with “Yes”.

NB:
This command only works for a highlighted block and is independent of
the current position of the cursor. in QWERT Mode characters can be
deleted elsewhere in the text with the backspace or delete key,
without changing the highlighted block.
In Braille Mode characters can be deleted with B7 and other areas can
be deleted by using the corresponding commands “dot patter with
B9B7” elsewhere in the text, without changing the highlighted block.

5.4.6 Find and find next

To find a word or syllable (string) proceed as follows:
1. open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key.
2. select “Edit” then “Find”.
3. the “Find” dialog will open. In the “Find what” edit box, type the
term to be found and select “OK”. Any previous search term will be
overwritten.
4. you will be taken back to the text and the cursor will be sitting on
the first character of the term found. The shortcut minus+B9B7B8 or
“Windows key+minus” (Where am I?) will read out the line, so that the
search term can be situated within the context.
5. if more than one instance of the search term is found in the text and
the first instance is not the correct one, open the command menu with
S3, select “Edit”, then “Find next”. Or use the shortcut “3+B8B9 or F3
(FN+3) to quickly re-launch the search.
6. if the term is not found in the text or the last instance has been
found or you have arrived at the end of the document, the message
“Not found” will be given.

It is also possible to search for some types of formatting. These cannot

be typed directly into the “find what” edit box but can be pasted from
the clipboard.
The Find dialog contains other elements and options. After typing the
search term, these can be accessed by moving up or down through the
dialog with the Navistick or arrow keys, D4D6 or D1D3, the Tab key or
Shift+Tab.

The “Match capitals” check box:

Select or deselect with B0 or the space bar or by moving to the right or
left. If selected, only terms that exactly match the search term will be
found.

The “Whole words only” check box:

Select or deselect with B0 or the space bar or by moving to the right or
left. If selected, the term input will only be searched for as a whole
word and not as a syllable or part of a larger word.

The “Find backwards” check box:

Select or deselect with B0 or the space bar or by moving to the right or
left. when selected the text will be searched from the current cursor
position to the beginning of the text only.
If selected, the term will be searched for from the current position
back to the beginning of the text.

The “Replace” check box:

Select or deselect with B0 or the space bar or by moving to the right or
left. If selected, a further “Replace with” edit box will appear and the
Find dialog will swap over to the Replace dialog (see Chapter 5.4.7).
This option is not available with read-only documents.

5.4.7 Replace
Replace does not differ too much from the Find function described
above and uses the same dialog with the “Replace” check box already
selected. With Replace, the search term is replaced for the one in the
second edit box.

Proceed as follows:
1. open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key.
2. select “Edit”, then “Replace”.
3. the Replace dialog will open. Type the search term in the “Find
what” edit box, and then go to the “Replace with” edit box and type
the desired term. Then select “OK”. Any previous search terms will be
overwritten (the other elements in the dialog are described in Chapter
5.4.6).
4. you will be taken to another dialog containing the elements
described below. In this dialog you can select specific occurrences for
replacement, jump to the next instance or replace every instance.

- The “Found” field:

Here, for example, you will be given the information 2/19 and the
search term. This means that the search term occurs 19 times in the
document and you are already at the second instance.

- The “Skip” button

This will jump to the next instance which you can easily check in the
“Found” field.

- The “Replace” button

The search term will be replaced by the term you input at this
particular instance.

- The “Replace all” button

Independent of the particular instance of the search term, all terms
that match the search term will be replaced.

5.5 Saving documents

NB: an open document will not automatically be saved following a
complete shutdown (Reset).

Text files are generally saved in .rtf format and can be found in the
“Edit” folder. Both Pronto’s internal memory “Flashdisk” and the
inserted “Storage card” have an “Edit” folder which can be used to
save your documents.
When word processing, only the files in an “Edit” folder are accessible.
Pronto notices which “Edit” folder was last selected and suggests it
when saving or opening other documents.
Saving text documents in unauthorised folders, i.e. outside the “Edit”
folder, is not possible. An appropriate message will be given.
In addition to the standard .rtf format, documents can also be saved in
text-only format (ANSI or UNICODE).

NB:
Documents on a plugged-in USB memory stick in Pronto QS or Pronto
40 cannot be opened in the word processor or saved to it. Such files
can only be accessed and opened in File manager.

5.5.1 Save
The first blank file in the word processor is automatically given the
name “Document.rtf” when the device is switched on or following a
reset, and is located on the plugged-in storage card under “Edit”.
To save text input in the document, proceed as follows:

1. open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key.

2. you will be taken to the first entry, “File”. Open its submenu by
moving to the right with the Navistick or the arrow key.
3. you will be taken to the first entry, “New”. Move up or down to
“Save”.
4. confirm this selection by pressing B9, Return or N-center. A message
will appear and you will be taken back to the document. Large
documents can take time to save and short tones will be emitted to
mark the progress.

The shortcut “s+B8B9” or “Ctrl+s” will save a file without opening the
menu.

All open files which already have a name and save location assigned
can be saved in this manner. Files in .rtf format will also save the
cursor position so that when the file is next opened the last point
accessed in the text (bookmark) will be displayed.

5.5.2 Save as
To save an open document under another name, in a different format
or to a different location, use the “Save as” function.
A dialog will open where all further settings can be made and
commands input.

Proceed as follows:
1. open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key, and
select “File”
2. move up or down to select “Save as”.
3. the Save dialog will open (it can also be opened directly with the
shortcut “a+B8B9” or “Ctrl+e”.
4. you will first be taken to an edit box for the file name. Pronto will
suggest the name “Document”, or another available name. Typing a
new name will delete the old one.
5. to select the save location go down with the Navistick. You will be
taken to a list of documents stored in the current save location.
Possible save locations include “Storage card/Edit” or “Flashdisk/Edit”
and their assigned subfolders (system folders or folders which are not
in the “Edit” folder will not be displayed here).
6. to change the save location, move the Navistick or arrow key to the
left to the “Folder selection” list. Move up or down to change folders,
and move the Navistick or arrow key to the right to go back to the
“Edit” folder.
7. to quit the list and access the other dialog elements and buttons,
press D4D6 resp. Tab or D1D3 resp. Shift+Tab.
8. confirm “OK” to save the file to .rtf format. If the file is to be saved
in text-only format,go to the “Text only” check box and change the
status to “checked”.
9. a further check box “Unicode” will appear in the dialog. If the status
of this check box is activated the file will be saved in UNICODE format,
otherwise in ANSI text format. In both cases the file will acquire the .txt
extension.
10. then confirm “OK”.

Press B9B7B8, D4, or Escape to quit the dialog unchanged, and it will
not be saved.

NB:
The message “File could not be saved” means that the file name
selected contains not allowed characters or you have selected a not
allowed saving location.

5.5.3 Tips on saving in text-only format

In “Save as” Pronto overwrites the current format of the open file and
adds the correct file extension (.rtf or .txt).
With text-only files other extensions can be added to the file name,
e.g. .dic or .brl. The .rtf ending is not allowed in this instance.

A file which was once saved as text-only (UNICODE format) can no

longer be correctly saved as text-only (ANSI format). It is
recommended that all new documents are saved as .rtf as this is the
best format for the word processor.

5.6 New blank Document

To open a new blank document, proceed as follows:
1. call up the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key.
2. select “File” and then “New”.
3. a dialog will open, type the file name in the edit box and press
Return. The file will now be saved in .rtf format in the current save
location, and you will be in the newly opened file.
4. do not forget to save the new file and new text (use the shortcut
“s+B8B9” or “Ctrl+s”).

Option:
The shortcut “n+B8B9” or “Ctrl+n” will also open this dialog.
When creating a new document you can also determine the file format
and save location as well as the file name, as long as you do not wish
to overwrite the previously input entries. The dialog contains the same
elements as “Save as” (see Chapter 5.5.2).

5.7 Opening documents

Pronto can open and edit the file formats .rtf and .txt.
With .txt format both ANSI and UNICODE files will be opened correctly,
i.e. all diacritics will be shown correctly.

NB: If the size of a document is about 1,5 MB or more, it can not be

opened. The ability to open one or more large documents also depend
on the current free memory space and how many other documents are
opened. Large documents can take time to open and short tones will
be emitted to mark the progress.

5.7.1 Open (Edit mode)

To open a file, proceed as follows:
1. call up the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key.
2. select “File” and then “Open”.
3. you will be taken to a file list in a dialog. Normally you will be taken
to the first file in the “Edit” folder on the storage card or Flashdisk.
Move down or up to the desired file and press B9 or Return. In long
lists you can move quickly to the end of the list with B9B4B5B6B8 or
End (FN+right arrow), or to the beginning with B9B1B2B3B7 or Pos1
(FN+left arrow), or type in the first letters of the desired file name to
access it directly.
4. the file will open and you will taken to it. With .rtf files you will be
taken to the last recorded cursor position (bookmark) when the file was
last saved.

Option:
The shortcut o+B8B9 or Ctrl+o will also open this dialog and take you
to the file list.

To access the various elements in the “Open” dialog use D4D6 or the
Tab key resp. D1D3 or Shift+Tab.

The “Path” field displays the current save location: “Flashdisk” for
Pronto’s internal memory, or “Storage card” for the inserted memory
card.

Within the file list use the Navistick or the arrow keys to move down or
up to the individual files. Moving to the left will quit the current file
folder and take you one level higher. Move down or up to navigate
within this hierarchy. The uppermost level contains the “Flashdisk” and
“Storage card” folders. To open a folder and access its files, move to
the right with the Navistick or right arrow.
(On the Braille display folders are prefixed with a plus sign for
identification purposes).

NB:
Text files which are not in the “Edit” folder or its subfolders will not be
displayed in the file list and cannot be opened here. They can be
accessed and opened, however, in File manager.

5.7.2 Open read-only files (Reading mode)

There are some files (e.g. books) that we only wish to read and to
protect from any accidental text input whilst reading them. The “Open
read only” option in the Open dialog can be used for this purpose.
To open a file in read-only status (Read mode) proceed as described in
Chapter 5.7.1. Do not, however, open the file directly by pressing B9 or
Return, but use D4D6 or the Tab key to access the “Open read only
file” button and confirm its selection.

NB:
When a document is opened in File manager, it will be displayed as
read-only in Read mode.

When working, the shortcut “z+B8B9” or “Ctrl+z” can be used to

switch easily between Edit mode and Read-only mode; this is also
possible from the command menu under “File/Protect text” or
“File/Unprotect text”.

Write-protected documents can easily be distinguished from open

documents in edit mode on the Braille display by the appearance of
their cursor. In open documents the cursor is identified with dots 7 and
8; with write-protected documents the cursor is identified with a
flashing dot 8.
The appearance of the cursor can be set individually (Pronto menu,
“Settings/Braille/cursor”). It is recommended that different cursor
forms are retained in Read mode and Write mode.

5.7.3 Closing documents

Pronto can have several documents open at the same time.
Documents remain open and ready for editing until they are closed
individually. To use the bookmark function in .rtf files, place the cursor
at the desired point in the text before closing the document and save
its position Command menu / File / Save ).
This bookmark can also be inserted and saved in opened write-
protected documents.

To close a file, proceed as follows:

1. call up the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key
2. select “File” and then “Close”
3. if the document has been amended or edited but the changes have
not yet been saved, you will receive a security question. Select “Yes”
to save these changes.
4. if several other documents are still open, you will be taken to the
uppermost document, otherwise you will be taken to a normal blank
document.

Option:
The shortcut “u+B8B9” or “Ctrl+u” will also close the currently
displayed document.

NB:
As every document reduces the size of the working memory, all
unnecessary documents should be closed to avoid so-called “Memory
spill”.

5.8 Switching between open documents

Pronto can have several documents open at the same time. When
reading or editing you can quickly switch between them, to copy a text
block from one to another, for example. The number of open
documents depends on the file size and available working memory
capacity.

All open files “lie” on top of each other like a pile of paper. The current
document lies “on top” and is the one displayed. When another
document is brought to the front or a new document is added, this will
be “on top” and the order of the open documents will change.

5.8.1 Previous file

To toggle quickly between two open files, open the command menu
with S3 or Alt key, select “File” and then “Previous file”.
The name of the new visible file will be announced.

This shortcut can still be used when more than two files are open, but
only to toggle between the last two files to be edited.

Option:
The shortcut „Minus+B8B9“ or “Ctrl+minus” will also toggle between
the files.

5.8.2 List of open files

To bring a specific file to the top when several are open, select “File”
and then “List of open files” from the command menu.

A dialog will open and all open files (file name and save location) will
be displayed. Move to the right or left to access all the files. As soon as
you have reached the desired file, press B9 or Return or confirm “OK”.

Option:
The shortcut “l+B8B9” or “Ctrl+l” opens the dialog with the open files
list..

5.9 Mark position and jump to it

In an open document a marker can be placed at the position of the
cursor. It is then possible to jump to this marker if, for example, one
has moved away from the original position with reading commands
and wants to return to it. This marker cannot be saved – it is a fugitive
bookmark which is deleted when the document is closed.

5.9.1 Mark position

Press the shortcut “=+B8B9” or “Ctrl+m” at the current position of the
cursor to set the marker or fugitive bookmark.
This function can also be accessed from the command menu. Open the
command menu by pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key, select “Edit” and
then “Set bookmark”. Only one marker can be set at a time.

5.9.2 Jump to marker

Use the shortcut “m+b8B9” or “Shift+Ctrl+m”to jump to the marked
position or fugitive bookmark.
This function can also be accessed from the command menu. Open the
command menu by quickly pressing S3 or the Alt key, select “Edit” and
then “Jump to bookmark”.
5.10 The “Navigate” menu
The entries in this menu lead to functions which more often than not
are executed with shortcuts.

- Read from cursor position: starts continuous reading; shortcut

“r+B8B9” or “Shift+Ctrl+r” (see Chapter 5.2.2).
- Current sentence: reads the sentence containing the cursor; shortcut
B9B0B3B6 or “Shift+Ctrl+space bar”
- Sentence left: reads the previous sentence, with the cursor being
placed at the beginning of the sentence; shortcut B9B0B3, “Ctrl+less-
than”
- Sentence right: reads the next sentence, with the cursor being placed
at the beginning of the sentence, shortcut B9B0B6 or “Ctrl+greater-
than”.
- Speak highlighted text: reads out highlighted text from a document;
shortcut “k+B8b9” or “Ctrl+k”.
6. File Manager
In File manager, files can be highlighted, deleted, copied, renamed or
moved to other folders, just like in Windows Explorer. New folders can
be created, file properties retrieved and the detail in the file display
adjusted.

To access File manager open the Pronto menu by pressing S3 or

Windows key and select “File manager”. (Shortcut “f+B7B8B9” or
“Windowskey+F.)
This will open the list of files and folders.
In the file list, folders and files are displayed in a hierarchical order; the
display is the same as that in the “Open” and “Save as” dialogs in
Word Processor.
To go down the list use N-down or B9B6, and to move up use N-up or
B9B3; this will access all folders or files on a particular level (e.g. all
files in a selected folder).

Inputting one character, or several in quick succession will take you to

the first file or folder that begins with this character or sequence of
characters

N-right or Arrow right goes to the right one level down and opens, for
example, the “Edit” folder;
N-left or Arrow left goes to the left one level higher and closes, for
example, the “Edit” folder. The upper most level contains either the
Pronto memory “Flashdisk”, or the plug-in memory card “Storage
Card”. On Pronto QS / Pronto 40 an eventual plugged-in USB memory
stick is announced as “Stick”.
The next level down contains either the “Edit” folder or other folders
and files.

The current folder- or file-name is displayed.

B9, N-center or the return key will open a folder or a file. When
opening a file the corresponding application will also be opened.

All File manager functions and options can be accessed from the
command menu which can be opened by pressing the Alt key or S3
once briefly.
Most functions have shortcuts assigned to them. Working with File
manager is thus similar to Word Processor.
6.1 The “File” menu

6.1.1 New Folder

This command allows a sub-folder to be created in the “Edit” folder, for
example; the new folder will be created on the same level.
To create a sub-folder in “Edit”:
1. Go to the uppermost level of the file list in “Storage card” and enter
it by moving to the right;
2. This will access the level containing the “Edit” folder. Move up or
down to “Edit” and open it by moving to the right;
3. This will take you to the first file in the “Edit” folder; an
announcement will be made if the folder is empty;
4. Open the command menu with Alt key or S3 once briefly, select
“File”, then “New folder”;
5. A dialog will open at the edit box for the folder name – the
suggested name “Newfolder” can be overwritten. Confirm “OK”.
6. A new folder has thus been created and you will be returned to the
file list.

Option:
Tthe shortcut n+B8B9 or Control+n will open this dialog.

The dialog contains other potentially useful elements.

The “Path” field gives the selected save location.
The three check boxes “Read-only”, “Hidden” and “System” are
generally not activated. By pressing B0 or space they can be checked
or unchecked.

6.1.2 Open
The Open command is used to open folders and files. When a folder is
opened its files and subfolders will be displayed in a list. When a file is
opened the user is transferred to the appropriate application:
- txt and rtf files open the Word Processor (NB: text files with other
extensions e.g. BRL must be opened in the Word Processor)
- mp3 and m3u files open the mp3 player
- wav files open the voice recorder.

Proceed as follows:
1. in the file list go to the folder or file you wish to open
2. open the command menu, select “File” and then “Open”
3. with folders a lower hierarchical level will be displayed with the files
or subfolders contained in it; with files, the file will be opened in the
appropriate application.
B9, the return key, N-center or the shortcut o+B8B9 or Control+o will
open the selected folder or file.

6.1.3 Delete
With the delete command you can delete files and folders from the
Flashdisk or the storage card. Files in a folder will be deleted if the
folder itself is deleted.
NB: deleting is final – there is no “Recycle bin”. If, however, the file is
open in the Word Processor it will still be on the RAM memory and can
be saved from there. To delete the document from the RAM
definitively, it must be closed in the Word Processor.

1. In the file list go to the folder or file to be deleted;

2. Open with Alt key or S3 briefly the command menu, select “File”,
then “Delete”.
3. A dialog will open with a security question, and a message about
the number of files in the folder and the file size. Then select “Yes”.

Option:
The Delete key or shortcut B9B7 also opens this dialog and then leads
on to delete files and folders)

Several files can be highlighted and deleted together with B9B7 or

Delete key.

NB: if a folder cannot be deleted it may be because it contains hidden

or read-only files. In this case you get a corresponding message.
Change the options in “view/details”.

6.1.4 Renaming
A file or folder can be renamed, i.e. the file or folder name can be
changed without any effect on the file or folder content.

1. In the file list go to the file or folder and open the command
menu with S3 briefly or Alt key. Select “File”, then “Rename”.
2. A dialog will open at an edit box.
3. This field contains the file or folder name which can be
overwritten or changed. With rtf-, mp3- and wav-files make sure
that the extension is not changed.
4. Finally, confirm “OK”.

Option:
The shortcut 2+B8B9 or F2 (FN+2) will directly open this dialog.
6.1.5 Properties
In command menu select “File > Properties” to open a dialog
containing information on the file or folder.

Option:
The shortcut p+B8B9, Control+“p or Alt+return opens the dialog
directly.

The following information is given:

- the name of the selected folder or file
- the path: detailed information on the save location
- the file size in bytes; for folders select “Size info”
- the date: day and time the folder or file was created
- “Read-only” option: press B0 or Space to change the status
- “Hidden”: change the status by pressing B0 or Space a hidden
folder or file is generally not visible in the displayed file list and
cannot be accessed (see Chapter 6.3.1)
- “System”: change the status by pressing B0 or Space. A system
file or directory is generally not visible in the displayed file list
and cannot be accessed (see Chapter 6.3.1)

The properties dialog for folders has the button “size info”.
This opens a further dialog which shows the size in bytes, the number
of subfolders and files. Asking the properties of root directories
(storage card, Flashdisk, you get here also the size of free memory in
bytes.

6.2 The “Edit” Menu

6.2.1 Cut
This command is similar to the “Cut” command in Word Processor.
One or more selected files or folders can be moved from their original
position and moved to another location.
Unlike the “Delete” command (B9B7 or Delete key) the file will not be
removed from its current location until it has reached its new location.

1. In the file list select the desired folder or file. The highlighting
function (see Chapter 6.2.4) allows several files to be selected at
once.
2. Open the command menu with Alt key or S3 briefly, select “Edit”,
then “Cut”;
3. The selected file(s), folders or highlighted elements are prepared
for cutting.
4. From the file list move to the desired location.

Option:
The shortcut “x+B8B9” or “Control+x” executes directly the cutting
command.

6.2.2 Copy
This command is similar to the “Copy” function in Word Processor.
Selected file(s), or folder(s) can be copied (duplicated) to a different
location.

1. Select the desired file or folder from the file list. Several files can
be selected together with the highlighting function (see Chapter
6.2.4);
2. Open the Command Menu with Alt key or S3 briefly, select “Edit”,
then “Copy”;
3. The selected file or files are now ready for copying.
4. In the file list move to the desired location.

Option:
The shortcut “c+B8B9” or “Control+c” executes directly the copying
command.

If a file is to be inserted into the original location, the second file’s

name will acquire “Copy of”.

6.2.3 Paste
This function usually follows the cutting or copying functions, so that
prepared files or folders can be pasted into a new location. When you
paste great files or folders, pronto emits short sounds to inform about
the process. When pasting has been finished you get a corresponding
message.

Open the Command Menu, select “Edit”, then “Paste”. The shortcut
“v+B8B9” or “Control+v” also pastes cut or copied files and folders.

6.2.4 Highlighting
Highlighting allows several files or folders to be displayed as
“selected”. The group of highlighted elements behaves like a single
selected file and can be deleted, cut, copied or pasted as one.
With “k+B8B9” or “Control+k” or with the item Command Menu / Tools
/ Highlighted objects” you get the information how many elements ar
highlighted.
Browsing the file and folder list highlighted elements are announced
and on a Braille display the name is displayed with dot 8.

There are several ways of highlighting files and folders within a

particular level.
1. Move up and down the file list and highlight the desired files or
folders by pressing B9 or Space; pressing the same key a second time
removes the highlighting;
2. To highlight all files on a particular level, e.g. the entire contents
of a folder, go to the relevant folder and use the shortcut
B9B8B1B2B3B4B5B6 or Control+a (or: Command Menu, “Edit”,
“Highlight all”);
3. If, for example, 17 files from a total of 23 are to be highlighted, it
is not necessary to highlight each of the 17 individually: use the “Invert
highlighting”
In the file list go only to those files which are not to be highlighted and
highlight these by pressing B0 or Space. Finally, use the shortcut
“i+B8B9” or “shift+space” (or: Command Menu, “Edit”, “Invert
highlighting”). The previously highlighted files will no longer be
highlighted, and the previously un-highlighted files will now be
highlighted.

6.3 The “View” Menu

6.3.1 Details
In the Command Menu, selecting “View”, then “Details” will access a
dialog with three check boxes. These are usually not selected; their
status can be altered by pressing B0 or the Space key.

- “Show hidden files”: this displays, and allows access to, folders
and files in the file list which have the check box “Hidden” activated in
“Properties”;
- “Show system files”: this allows access to system files in the file
list. Those files which have the “System” check box activated in
“Properties” will also be displayed.

NB: Pronto will not function properly, i.e. will no longer be operational,
if system files or folders are deleted, relocated or renamed.

- “Show internal files”: this is similar to the “Show system files”

function.
6.4 The “Tools” Menu

6.4.1 Memory Query

When several documents are opened in Word Processor, the number
that can be opened is dependent on the amount of RAM memory
available. A maximum of 128MB is available, of which a large
proportion is for routine operations.

To find out how much RAM is available open the Command Menu,
select “Tools” and then “Memory.

The shortcut “m+B8B9” or “Shift+Control+m” will also access this

memory information.

6.4.2 Highlighted Objects

The Commands for copying, cutting or deleting affect not only the
selected file but all higlighted elements. Therefore it is helpful to know
how many objects are highlighted bevore executing this commands.
To announce the number of highlighted elements in the file and folder
list, open the Command Menu, select „Tools“, then select „“highlighted
objects“ or use the shortcut “k+B8B9” or „Control+k“.
7. The mp3 player
The built-in mp3 player plays audio files that are stored on the inserted
storage card; the files can be found in the root directory, folders and
subfolders. When several audio files are to be played one after the
other or in a specific order, the order must be determined in an m3u
file, or playlist.
Playlists (m3u files) for many different audio files can be created,
edited or deleted in different folders.
The following data format can be played: MP3, WAV, WMA.

Note on m3u files:

An m3u file does not contain the audio files, but simply the information
on the file’s name, where it is saved (the path) and when it is to be
played in relation to the other audio files. The only m3u files that can
be launched are those created by PRONTO and whose assigned audio
files are located in the assigned storage location (path on Storage
card).

7.1 Playing audio files

The following sections describe the various ways to open the mp3
player and play audio files.

When an audio file has been launched, the main mp3 player can be
minimized and another application opened, e.g. the word processor;
you will be able to hear the music in the background as you work.
While another application is in use the mp3 player cannot be paused or
stopped: to do this you must go back to the main view of mp3 player
itself. In the PRONTO menu select “mp3 player”.
During playback the automatic shutdown function (if set up) will have
no effect.

7.1.1 Playing individual audio files

The audio files (MP3, WAV, WMA) must be stored on the storage card,
or in one of its folders or subfolders. There are two ways of playback:

Firstly:
1. in the PRONTO menu select “mp3 player”.
2. the main mp3 player will appear. Either you will receive a message
that the playlist is missing or empty, or the name of the last audio file
to be played will be displayed in Braille. With the “Where am i”
command (Windowskey+Minuskey or Minus+B7B8B9) this information
will be announced.
3. to listen to a new audio file press Alt key or S3 once briefly, open the
command menu and select “File>open”
4. a list of files and folders will open, similar to File manager
5. move up or down, left or right with the Navistick or the Arrow keys
to the desired folder and audio file (e.g. Storage card/Music)
6. pressing B9 or the return key) will launch the selected audio file and
the file list will close
7. With the “Where am I” Command (Windowskey+Minuskey or
Minus+B7B8B9) the file name will be announced and you get the
information in percent how much of the audio file has already been
played. On the Braille display the name is displayed and the first three
Braille elements will display in percentage terms how much of the
audio file has already been played
8. pressing B9 or the return key again will pause and restart the player
(Pause/resume)
9. during play moving left or right will rewind and fast forward 10
seconds respectively
10. pressing B0, space or control+return will stop play
11. the volume can be adjusted through the device volume settings.
Within the mp3 player you also can use the volume settings of the
command Menu.
12. to quit the mp3 player, open another application, e.g. by pressing
long a system key: By pressing S1, S2 or S3 a launched audio file will
continue in the background; S4 will stop play.

Secondly:
In file manager go to the desired audio file and press B9 or Return.
Play will begin and you will switch to the main view of mp3 player.

7.1.2 Playing several audio files (album)

To play several audio files e.g. all the tracks from an album, the file
information must be recorded in a playlist. The playlist default.m3u will
be created automatically when the mp3 player is launched.

In this list (default.m3u) the path and order of play for each audio file
to be played will be saved. Every time an audio file is launched this
information is recalled allowing you to launch the track quickly. Several
audio files can be saved simultaneously in this m3u file: go to File
manager, highlight the relevant audio files in a folder and start play
with B9 or Return.

7.1.3 Play options

If only one audio file is open and the playlist (default.m3u) contains
only the information for this file, the following options are available:
- Start (pause/resume) = B9, D6 or Return or “r+B8B9, Control+r
- Stop = B0, Space or B9B7B8, D4 or Escape
- Rewind 10 seconds = B2, Arrow left or N-left
- Fast forward 10 seconds = B5, Arrow right or N-right

NB: when play is interrupted and PRONTO is closed down with S4, play
can only resume from the last stop position by launching with
“r+B8B9” or “Control+r”. Pressing B9 or Return here will play from the
beginning of the file.

If several audio files have been launched, i.e. the playlist contains
information on several audio files, the following functions are available:
- next track = B4, Arrow down or N-down
- previous track = B1, Arrow up or N-up
- first track = B3 or Home (FN+Arrow left)
- last track = B6 or End (FN+Arrow right)

These functions are also available in the command menu. From the
main mp3 player open the command menu by pressing Alt key or S3
briefly, and select “Playback” or the relevant entries from the
submenu.

NB: if you delete or move audio files to a different storage location,

the information held in the default.m3u file is no longer relevant, and
when you try to play them you will receive an error message. It is
recommended that before deleting or moving audio files the playlist be
edited appropriately, or new playlists created and saved under new
names (see Chapter 7.2).

7.2 Playlists
By creating and saving playlists (m3u files) it is possible to group
several audio files together so that they can be played in a specific
order, called up quickly and played again. Audio files can be added to
playlists, their playing order can be changed and they can be deleted.
In the playlist, the way the tracks are to be played can be determined
(random, repeat, automatic play of next track).

7.2.1 The “Playlist” dialog

In the main mp3 player open the command menu by pressing Alt key
or S3 briefly and select “Playlist” to access the settings for the current
playlist.
Pressing Alt key or S3 briefly within this dialog will open a further
command menu with options to edit the playlist.

Option:
The shortcut “y+B8B9” or “Alt+y” will open this dialog directly.

The dialog contains the following elements:

- The “Audio file” list gives the name of the audio files available in the
current playlist (m3u file). The individual entries can be selected by
moving the Arrow keys or the Navistick to the right or to the left.
- the “Position” field shows the relative position of the selected track
(audio file) in relation to the total number of tracks.
- the “autoplay next title” check box can be used to determine whether
or not the next track in the current playlist (m3u file) should be played
automatically
- the “Repeat playlist” check box can be used to determine whether or
not the playlist should be played again, thus providing continuous,
uninterrupted play
- the “Random play” check box can be used to determine whether or
not the tracks should be played in a non-specified random order. The
position assigned in the playlist would be ignored here
- the “Playback” button will play the track (audio file) offered in the list.

Select “Close” to return to the main mp3 player without playing an

audio file.

NB: Open within the dialog a second command menu by pressing Alt
key or S3 briefly to add a new file, alter the track position, remove a
file from the playlist or to save the playlist again.

7.2.2 Create new playlist (m3u file)

To create a new playlist (m3u file), proceed as follows:
1. open the “Playlist” dialog (Command menu>playlist.
2. open another command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key, and
select “Playlist>new”.
3. you will be taken to a “Playlist” dialog with an empty playlist
4. to add audio files or folders containing audio files to this list, open
the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key, and select
“Edit>add>file” or “Edit>add>folder”
5. a list of files and folders will open, similar to File manager. Move the
Arrow keys or the Navistick to the desired audio file or folder
containing the desired audio file and select it by pressing B9 or Return.
6. the file and folder list will be closed. You will be taken back to the
“Playlist” dialog and the selected audio file or all the audio files from
the selected folder will be displayed
7. it is recommended that the new playlist be saved under a new name
as an m3u file; open the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt
key and select “Playlist>save as”
8. a dialog will open – overwrite the name “Default” with the new name
for the playlist (e.g. “Pop music”)
9. in the following element select the save location or path of the new
m3u file e.g. “Storage card>music”. You reach this element by using
D4D6 or Tab.
10. press B9, Return or confirm “Save”.

The new playlist (m3u file) is now ready for new audio files.

7.2.3 Open playlist (m3u file)

To edit, amend the play options, add or delete audio files in a playlist,
it must first be opened and displayed in the “Playlist” dialog.

Proceed as follows:
1. open the “Playlist” dialog (Command menu>playlist.
2. open another command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key, and
select “Playlist>open”.
3. a list of files and folders will open, similar to File manager. Move the
Arrow keys or the Navistick to the desired m3u file and confirm the
“Open” button
4. you will be taken to the “Playlist” dialog containing a title list of the
audio files selected for the opened playlist (m3u file).

Use the appropriate check boxes to adjust the play functions (see
Chapter 7.1.2), or briefly press S3 or Alt key to call up the command
menu for further edit functions.

7.2.4 Save playlist as an m3u file

An existing playlist (m3u file) can be saved under a different name
and/or to a different save location. Open the desired playlist (m3u file)
as described in Chapter 7.2.3 and make any changes as required (add
or delete audio files, change play options).
Then open the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key and
select “Playlist/save as”.
Edit the displayed file name and/or select the desired save location,
and close the dialog by pressing B9 or Return or by selecting the
“Save” button (cf. Chapter 7.2.2).

7.2.5 Place files or folders in the playlist

Further audio files can be added to an existing playlist (m3u file). The
procedure is the same as for creating a new playlist (see Chapter
7.2.2).
1. open the “Playlist” dialog for the existing playlist to which the new
files are to be added (see Chapter 7.2.2)
2. you will be taken to a list containing the tracks selected for this
particular m3u file. Move to the right to the end of the list to insert the
new audio file (or the new audio files from a folder) to the last place in
the list, otherwise the new track will be inserted immediately after the
highlighted track, thus altering the position of the following tracks
3. open the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key, and
select “Edit>add>file” or “Edit>add>folder”
4. a list of files and folders will open, similar to File manager. Move the
Arrow keys or the Navistick to the desired audio file or folder
containing the desired audio files and select by pressing B9 or Return.
5. the list of files and folders will close and you will be taken back to
the “Playlist” dialog where the selected audio files or all the audio files
from the selected folder will be displayed in a list and will have been
placed in the m3u file.

NB: Audio files which are directly launched and opened in File
Manager,will be added automatically to the m3u file (current playlist).

7.2.6 Change the position of a track in the playlist

The order in which the audio files are to be played can be changed in
the playlist (m3u file) and reassigned.
1. open the appropriate playlist to edit it (cf. Chapter 7.2.3)
2. from the list select the track (audio file) whose position you wish to
alter. Within the list the track can be moved one position to the left or
to the right, or to the beginning or end of the list
3. open the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key and select
“Edit>move”
4. select the corresponding entry from the submenu according to
where you wish to position the selected track.
5. the track’s new position will be displayed in the “Playlist” dialog and
is saved in the assigned m3u file.

7.2.7 Delete individual audio files from the playlist

To delete an audio file from a playlist (m3u file), proceed as follows:
1. open the relevant playlist (see Chapter 7.2.3)
2. from the list in the dialog select the track (the name of the audio
file) that you wish to delete
3. open the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key and select
“Edit>delete”.
4. the track will now be deleted from the playlist, i.e. this audio file can
no longer be played from the assigned m3u file.

The audio file can now be deleted from its save location on the storage
card without error messages appearing in the playlist.

7.3 Info on the audio file

The following information can be obtained on the audio file displayed in
the main view of mp3 player:
- Title (name of the audio file)
- Position (position of the audio file in relation to the other audio files in
the m3u playlist)
- Length (playing time)

Proceed as follows:
1. open the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key.
2. select “Info”.
3. a dialog will open and the info. will be presented in a list
4. move the Navistick or Arrow key to the right or left to access the
individual pieces of information
5. select “Close” to quit the Info dialog and return to the main view of
mp3 player

7.4 Audio functions

In the mp3 player you have additionally audio functions.

Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key. Then select
“Audio” and the desired item.

7.4.1 Volume
With the item “volume” you can adjust teh volume in 10 steps. This
setting is relative to the master volume setting. (S4 +Braille key on
Pronto 18, Wheel on the left side of teh device on Pronto QS / Pronto
40).
If the playback of a audio file is not loud enough you can first increase
master volume of the device and then decrease the mp3 Volume as
follows:

1. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key.

2. Select the menu item Audio“.
3. Then select „Volume“.
4. here you find the items „increase and “decrease”. Select the desired
item to change the volume acordingly.

During playback you can also increase or decrease the volume step by
step by using the corresponding shortcuts.
- Increase: B4B5 or Control+Arrow up
- decrease: B1B2 or Control+Arrow down
There are 10 steps available. If you reach the maximum or minimum
setting you hear a sound.
8. The Voice recorder (Dictaphone)
Recorded voice messages are automatically saved by PRONTO and
given a file name. The files are stored on the Storage card in the
“VOICE” folder. When browsing the list of messages in the voice
recorder application the name will be announced after the recording
has been played. The file name appears on the Braille display.
The file name consists of the date and running number (10 figures in
total); this is followed by a dot and the extension “mp3”. The running
number denotes the relative order of messages recorded on the same
date. If there is no VOICE folder on the storage card, one will be
created automatically when the first message is recorded.

NB: voice messages can only be recorded if a storage card has been
inserted and PRONTO is not in stand-by mode.

8.1 Recording a voice message

There are two ways of recording a voice message: by pressing the REC
key, or by using the functions in the Voice recorder application.

Pronto has an internal microphone.

With Pronto QS and Pronto 40 you can use additionally an external
microphone which is connected to the corresponding port on the left
side. (Use mono electred condensed microphones.).

8.1.1 Recording with the REC key

1. press and hold the REC key.
2. you will hear a short beep. Now speak into the internal or external
microphone.
3. to end the recording release the REC key; you will now hear two
short beeps
4. the recording has now finished and has been saved on the Storage
Card in the VOICE folder.

With this method the voice recorder application is not opened, so that
you may return to your previously opened application as soon as the
recording is over.

8.1.2 Recording with the opened Voice Recorder

1. open the PRONTO menu by pressing S3 for a few seconds or the
windows key and select “Voice Recorder”.
2. the application will open at a list of available recordings; the last
recording will play automatically and its name announced
3. to start a new recording in the command menu select “Tools>start
recording”. A short beep will be emitted to signal the start of the
recording
4. to stop the recording press any key. If the recording is not stopped
manually it will run for a maximum of ten minutes before stopping
automatically. Two beeps signal the end of the recording
5. the recording will stop and be saved on the Storage card in the
VOICE folder. The list in the Voice Recorder will show the name of the
new file.

Option:
The shortcut “v+B7B8B9” or “Windows key+v” opens the voice
recorder directly.

8.2 Playback of a recording

There are two ways of listening to, or playing a voice message: by
briefly pressing the REC key, or by using the functions in the Voice
Recorder application. Pressing B0 or Space will stop the playback.

The volume at which the recording is to be played can be adjusted by

changing the device volume settings.

Please note:
At the moment there is no pause function.
But you can also playback the recordings with PRONTOS mp3 player.

8.2.1 Playback with the REC key

By briefly pressing the REC key the last recording will be played,
regardless of which application is currently open. During this time the
Voice Recorder’s list of saved recordings will be displayed briefly. The
Voice Recorder will not really be opened so that after listening to the
recording you will remain in the application you had previously opened.

If, during play, the Navistick or Arrow keys are moved up or down to
other files, these recordings will be played. The list remains open and
you will be in the Voice Recorder application.

8.2.2 Recording with open Voice Recorder

1. open the PRONTO menu by pressing S3 for a few seconds and select
“Voice Recorder; or open the Voice Recorder directly by pressing the
REC key and moving the Navistick.
2. the application will open at a file list containing the available
recordings; the last recording will play automatically and its name
announced
3. to play another recording move the Navistick or the Arrow keys up
or down; the selected recording will be played. Pressing B0 or Space
will stop playing and the file name is announced.
4. within the list, the shortcut B9B1B2B3B7 or Home (FN+Arrow left)
will jump to the first entry in the list, and the shortcut B9B4B5B6B8 or
End (FN+Arrow right) to the last entry. To jump directly to a file or
folder, type at least one of the first few characters of the desired file or
folder name.
Moving the Navistick or Arrow keys to the right or left will open and
close a folder
5. by pressing B9, Return or N-center, the selected file will be played
(again). You can also open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly
or the Alt key and then select “Tools>Play recorded file”
6. when the selected recording or file has been played, you will still be
in the file list where you can play or delete files, start a new recording,
or open and close folders.

NB: The recordings can also be played with the mp3 player wether
they are in the folder VOICE or subfolders. To create a subfolder, copy
recordings to folders or rename a recording, use PRONTO’s File
manager.

8.3 Deleting a recording

To delete a recording proceed as follows:
1. open the PRONTO menu by pressing Windows key or S3 for a few
seconds and select “Voice Recorder” or open the Voice Recorder
directly by pressing the REC key and moving the Navistick.
2. the application will open at a list of available recordings. The last
recording will play automatically and its name announced
3. simply move the Navistick or Arrow keys up and down within the list
to search for and select the desired file which will then be played.
Stopping playback with B0 or Space announces the file name directly.
4. within the list, B9B1B2B3B7 or Hone (FN+Arrow left) will jump to the
first entry in the list, and B9B4B5B6B8 or End (FN+Arrow right) will
jump to the last entry. To jump directly to a file or folder, type at least
one of the first few characters of the desired file or folder name.
Moving the Navistick or Arrow keys to the right or left will open and
close a folder
5. pressing B9B7 or Delete key will delete the selected file. You can
also open the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or Alt key and
select “File>delete”.Confirm the security question with “OK” to delete
the recording permanently
6. when the recording or file has been deleted, you will still be in the
file list where you can play or delete files, start a new recording, or
open and close folders.

NB: voice messages can also be deleted from the Storage card/VOICE
folder in File manager; deleting them from the Dictaphone, however,
has the advantage that you can listen to the message before deleting
it, thus avoiding any accidental deletion.

8.4 Sorting voice recordings in the file list

All voice recordings (files) are arranged alphabetically; names

beginning with numbers come before those beginning with letters. Any
subfolders will appear at the beginning of the list. The automatic
arranging of the file names means that the files are almost sorted by
date: the last recording has the most recent date and the highest
running number, and appears at the end of the list. Whenever the
voice recorder is opened the last entry in the list will always be shown
and played.

Please note:
If several messages are recorded then deleted and new ones recorded,
these new ones will be assigned the deleted file names.
This means that the recording played when the voice recorder is
opened is not really the last recording to have been made.

If you wish to keep a voice message, it is sensible to change the

automatically assigned file name to one that is content-specific, and
move it to a subfolder. This way files can be grouped clearly and easily
found.
Use Pronto’s File manager to rename files in the VOICE folder, create
subfolders or move files.

NB: it is possible to open these files in File manager – this opens the
mp3 player and you will quit the File manager.

8.5 Recording Quality

You can record voice messages in various sampling rates. The size of a
voice message file depends on its duration and teh selected sampling
rate..

To set the sampling rate proceed as follows:

1. Within the voice recorder open the command menu by pressing S3
briefly or ALT key.
2. Select “Tools”.
3. Select “Recording Quality”.
4. The submenu presents the sampling rates and the preset entry is
checked.
5. Select teh desired entry. Thus will also alter its sttatus.

You can select between the following sampling rates:

- normal: 96 kilobyte per second, 44100 Hertz
- middle: 128 kilobyte per second, 44100 Hertz
- high: 192 kilobyte per second, 48000 Hertz

8.6 Record CardID and Alarm Sound

8.6.1 Record CardID

You can easily record a CardID.wav file and save it automatically on
the inserted storage card.
This file will be played each time you insert the storage card. This
informs that the storage card haas been inserted properly. On the
other hand, when handling with several storage cards, this recorded
CardID informs which card has been inserted.

To record a CardID file proceed as follows:

1. Within the voice recorder open the command menu by pressing S3
briefly or ALT key.
2. Select “Tools”.
3. Select “Record CardID”.
4. If a CardID file already exists on the inserted storage card you get a
message to ask whether youwant to overwrite this CardID.
5. If there is no CardID file on the storage card or if you confirm the
message with “yes”, a short beep will be emitted to signal the start of
the recording
6. Speak the message and stop the recording by pressing any key.
7. Two beeps will be emitted to signal the end of the recording an the
recorded CardID is automatically played once.
8. The recording is saved automatically as CardID.wav file in the root
folder of storage card

Use Pronto’s File Manager to delete a CardID file from the storage card.

8.6.2 Record Alarm Sound

You can easily record a Timalarm.wav file which can be used as alarm
sound in Prontos alarm clock.
It is possible to record several timalarm files so each alarm clock may
have its own alarm sound. Recorded Alarm sounds however should not
last longer than 3 seconds.

To record a timalarm file proceed as follows:

1. Within the voice recorder open the command menu by pressing S3
briefly or ALT key.
2. Select “Tools”.
3. Select “Record alarm sound”.
4. A short beep will be emitted to signal the start of the recording
5. Speak the message and stop the recording by pressing any key.
6. Two beeps will be emitted to signal the end of the recording an the
recorded timealarm is automatically played once.
7. The recording is saved automatically as timalarm_00.wav file in the
folder flashdisk/pronto/beep. When recording several alarm sound the
corresponding file names are numbered.

Use Pronto’s File Manager to delete a timalarm file.

9. Calculator
Press S3 long or Windows key to open the Pronto menu and select
"Calculator". The shortcut “c+B7B8B9” or “Windows key + c” opens
the calculator directly. Simple and scientific calculations can be carried
out.

Input figures and symbols and then press B8 or Return or type the
equals sign. The calculation and result will be announced and
presented on the Braille display.

To delete the previous calculation and carry out a new one, open the
command menu with S3 briefly or ALT key, select “Edit”, then“Clear
calculator line”.)

Option:
The shortcut “c+B9” or “Shift+Delete” deletes the previous calculation
directly.

The following sub-chapters describe the various options and functions

in detail and with examples.

9.1 Generalities and basic calculations

To access the calculator open the Pronto menu with S3 or Windows key
and select “Calculator”;
The calculator displays either the last-performed calculation, or a
blank field containing “0”. Numbers and operators are input directly.
Decimals can be input either with a decimal point or comma, but the
decimal point is used for default (the comma can be set as user
specific setting therefore open the Command Menu, select “Tools >
Options” and then “Comma instead of decimal point”).

Like all Pronto applications the calculator has a Command menu which
can be opened with Alt key or by pressing S3 once briefly. It contains
settings options and advanced mathematical (scientific) functions.

9.1.1 Calculations
Input your calculation in the line displayed and press B8, Return or the
“equals sign”. The equals sign will be inserted and the calculation and
its result will be announced. The command “Shift+Control+a” will read
or repeat the calculation and its result.

To repeat the result, open the command menu, select “Tools”, then
“Read calculator line verbalized”.

The result can be used as the basis for another calculation with the
appropriate operator. If a new value is to be input, the previous result
will be overwritten and the new calculation begun.

Pronto can be set up so that the speech output reads only the result
itself; open the Command Menu, select “Tools”, then “Options” and
activate “read result only” check box.

If errors occur a corresponding message will appear.

Remind: The shortcut “c+B9” or “Shift+Delete” will clear the calculator

line for new inputs.

The previous 10 calculations are automatically saved in the Results list

(Calculations list) – use Arrow keys or the Navistick up/down to go
through this list.

9.1.2 Editing calculations

When inputting a calculation errors can be corrected immediately, as
in Word-processor. To delete backwards character by character press
B7 or Backspace, or move the cursor to the desired position and press
Delete key. To amend the calculation, place the cursor at the
appropriate place and amend as required.

- B7 or Backspace key deletes the character to the left of the cursor,

and the deleted character is spoken.
- B9B7 or Delete key deletes the current character.
- if a character to the left of the “equals” sign is edited, B8, Return or
“=” will perform the new calculation.
- if a number is input on the right of the “=” sign it will appear on a
new line. If anything other than a number is input on the right of the
“=” sign the result will also appear in the new line.
- spaces can be input freely.
- a negative will be indicated with the minus sign: a positive sign
cannot be used.

When a correction has been made the new result will be calculated and
displayed by pressing B8, Return or the “equals” sign.

9.1.3 Navigating in calculations and results

Within a calculation move the cursor with the Arrow keys or Navistick
to the left or right.

The previous 10 calculations are kept in the calculations list and can be
consulted: Use Arrow keys or Navistick up and down. Calculations in
this list can be edited to perform further calculations.

9.1.4a How to enter numbers and operators (raille Mode)

On Pronto 18 and Pronto 40 in Braille Mode all numbers, figures and
operators must be input in Computer Braille:

Example for US / UK Computer Braille US/UK:

Plus + B3B4B6
Minus - B3B6
Multiply * B1B6
Divide / B4B3
Decimal point . B4B6
Equals = B1B2B3B4B5B6
open Bracket ( B1B2B3B5B6
close Bracket ) B2B3B4B5B6

Figures in US / UK ComputerBraille:
1 B2
2 B2B3
3 B2B5
4 B2B5B6
5 B2B6
6 B2B3B5
7 B2B3B5B6
8 B2B3B6
9 B3B5
0 B3B5B6

Example for German / European Computer Braille:

Plus + B2B3B5
Minus - B3B6
Multiply * B3B5
Divide / B2B5B6
Decimal point . B3
Equals = B2B3B5B6
Bracket open ( B2B3B6
Bracket close ) B3B5B6

Figures in German / European ComputerBraille:

1 B1B6 a with dot 6
2 B1B2B6 b with dot 6
3 B1B4B6 c with dot 6
4 B1B4B5B6 d with dot 6
5 B1B5B6 e with dot 6
6 B1B2B4B6 f with dot 6
7 B1B2B4B5B6 g with dot 6
8 B1B2B5B6 h with dot 6
9 B2B4B6 i with dot 6
0 B3B4B6

9.1.4b How to enter numbers and operators (QWERT

Mode)
If the keyboard of Pronto QS or Pronto 40 in QWERT Mode has keys for
teh individual numbers and operators just press the corresponding key.
i.e numbers 1 to 0, plus, minus equals etc.
To enter operators, which consist of several characters, just enter
these corresponding characters. i. e. sqrt for square root

9.1.5 Using the Clipboard

Calculations and equations moved to the clipboard und can be pasted
into the calculator line using the shortcut “v+B8B9” or “Control+v”.

With “c+B8B9” or “Control+c” the current calculation and with

“z+B8B9” or “Control+z” just its result can be copied to the clipboard,
and subsequently pasted within word-processor.

9.2 Settings and list views

9.2.1 Settings
The following settings are available:
- number of positions after decimal point/comma
- result display with decimal point or comma
- result only spoken

Open the command menu, select “Tools > Options” and select the
appropriate check box.

9.2.2 Calculations list

The Calculations or Results list contains the previous 10 calculations.

New entries are added to the bottom of the list, and when more than
10 are added the uppermost one is deleted. The following commands
are available:

- go to previous calculation: Arrow up, N-up, or Command menu “View

> Calculations list > Previous entry”
- go to next calculation: Arrow down, N-down, or in the Command
menu “View > Calculations list > Next entry”
- go to the last calculation: Shift+Arrow down or in the Command menu
“View > Last entry of calculations list”
- clear calculations list: in the Command menu “Edit > Clear
calculations list”.

9.2.3 The memory list and memory functions

A memory list is available which can contain up to 10 calculations
which can be called up and edited for further calculations.
New entries are added to the bottom of the list, and when more than
10 are added the uppermost one is deleted.

In addition, the usual pocket calculator memory functions (M+, M-) are
also available.
These values are also added to the memory list.

The following commands are available:

- add calculation to memory list: in the command menu “Tools >
memory functions > Add to memory list”
- go to previous entry in memory list: in the Command menu “View >
Memory list > Previous entry”
- go to next entry in memory list: in the Command menu “View >
Memory list > Next entry”
- last memory value: in the Command menu “View > Last memory
value”
- clear memory list: in the Command menu “Edit > Clear memory list”
- add value to the memory, or “M+”: in the Command menu “Tools >
Memory functions > M+ add to last memory value”
- subtract value from memory, or “M-“: in the Command menu “Tools
> Memory functions > M- subtract from last memory value”
- speak only last memory entry”: in the Command menu “Tools >
Memory functions > Speak last memory entry”
- insert last memory entry: in the Command menu “Tools > Memory
functions > Insert last memory entry”
- Insert last memory entry into calculator line and then clear it: in the
Command menu “Edit > Insert and clear last memory entry”.

Example 1 (sing shortcuts):

we wish to memory a calculation to work out the gross price of an
article with a net price of 100 plus 16%VAT. Input: 100 + 16% 100, and
press “a+B9” or “shift+control+h” to add it to the memory list.
To carry out further price calculations all we need to do is press
“y+B9” or “y+B8B9” resp. page down or page up to recall this formula,
edit the “100” value and perform the calculation with B8 or Return.

Example 2: When checking a cash register’s entries, we add up the

individual calculations by pressing plus+B8B9”or “Control+plus” after
each calculation. The final value will be displayed by pressing “r+B9”
or “Control+”r. Pressing this command once again will display the last
subtotal, and so on.

9.3 Scientific mathematical functions

Mathematical functions and operators can be input directly or from the
menu “Math functions > Basic functions” or “Math functions >
Advanced”.

Calculations involving division and/or multiplication take precedence

over those containing addition and subtraction (BODMAS precedence)
– the inclusion of brackets allows calculations to be ordered.
The ‘minus’ sign must be used to denote a negative number e.g. 3 x
-2.

A list of functions, their operators and examples follows.

Note.
To hear clearly which caracters must be entered by entering operators
of several characters these operators are also spelled in the following
overview.

9.3.1 Basic calculations

- Addition (plus): + (plus key) ; 2+3
- Subtraction (minus): - (minus key); 3-2
- Multiplication (times): * (asterisk key) ; 3*2
- Division (devided by): / (slash key); 7/8
- Percent (x percent of y): % (percent key); 7%50
- Brackets: (open and close paramphesis) ; 3*(7+5)
- Square root : sqrt (s q r t); sqrt 36

9.3.2 Powers, logarithms, etc.

- Powers (to the power of x): pow (p o w) ; 2pow3
- Exponent (10 to the power x): exp ( e x p); 2exp-5
- Common logarithms (to base 10): log (l o g) ; 5*log 70
- Natural logarithms: ln (l n); 2/ln10
- Euler: e ; epow-3 (e to the power -3)
- Pi: pi (p i) ; pi*36
- Modulo: mod (m o d); 5mod4
This functions displays the modulus or reminder of x/y.
Example: 5 divided by 4 gives a remainder of 1 (i.e. 5mod4=1).

9.3.3 Trigonometrical functions

- Sine (in degrees): sin (s i n); sin90
- Sine in radians: sinr (s I n r); sinr(4+7)
- Hyperbolic sine: sinh (s I n h); sinh0,75
- Arcus sine degrees (Inverse): asin (a s I n); asin0,5
- Cosine (degrees): cos (c o s); cos 90
- Cosine in radians: cosr (c o s r); cosr(4+7)
- Hyberbolic cosine: cosh (c o s h); cosh0,75
- Arcus cosine degrees (Inverse); acos (a c o s); acos0,75
- Tangent (degrees): tan (t a n); tan 45
- Tangent in radians; tanr (t a n r); tanr(4+7)
- Hyperbolic tangent: tanh (t a n h); tanh0,75
- Arcus tangent degrees (Inverse): atan (a t a n); atan0,5

9.4 User constants

The variables x, y and z can have any constant values assigned to
them.
For example, they can be used to denote specific factors frequently
used in your calculations.
The variable will then be used instead of a number, e.g. sqrtx will
calculate the square root of this assigned value x.
To enter x, y or z you can either type this character directly into the
calculation or select the corresponding item from the command menu.

To define a value for the variable x, input the value, open the
Command menu and select “User constants > x > insert value of
calculator line in x” or use the shortcut “1+B8B9” or
“Shift+Control+1”.
Such assignments can be helpful if you work frequently with large
numbers, e.g. interest rates, physical quantities, etc.

The following commands are available in Command menu > User

constants > x:
- insert x into calculation (shortcut: x)
- insert value of x into calculator line
- insert value of calculator line in x (shortcut: 1+B8B9 or
Shift+Control+1
- show x entry (shortcut: 1+B9 or control+1)

This is the same for the variables y respectively z. The corresponding

shortcuts ar combined with 2 respectively 3.

9.5 Conversions
The “Conversions” option and its functions allows various conversions
to be made.
Example:
How many centimetres is 17 inches?
Type 17, open the Command menu and select “Conversion > Inches to
centimetres”. The correct answer will be displayed -43.18 in this
example.
10. Planner
Press S3 long or Windows key to open the Pronto menu, then select
“Planner”.

Option:
The shortcut S2 long or “p+B7B8b9” resp “Windows key+p” will also
open the Planner.

The Planner contains a command menu which can be opened by

pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key. Appointments can be input and
edited with the help of the dialogs. Appointments can have a reminder
switched on and can be set up as regular recurrent events. By using
PRONTO in conjunction with a PC and a full partnership (Windows XP
with ActiveSync or Windows Vista with Mobile Dievice Center),
appointments can be synchronised with Outlook Calendar (see Chapter
15.2.2 and Appendix x3).

The Planner has many features and dialogs which are similar to
Outlook Calendar.

10.1 Navigating in Planner

The Navistick or Arrow keys provide a quick means of leafing through
days and appointments. Moving to the right or left goes forwards and
backwards day by day, moving up or down moves from appointment to
appointment.

10.1.1 The “Navigation” Menu

Call up the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key. Go
down to “Navigate” to open a submenu with various commands.
To go to the current date select “Today” (shortcut B0 or Space)
To go to a specific day select “Jump to” (shortcut “j+B8B9” or
“Control+j”), type the desired day in the edit box and close the dialog
with “OK”. The current date can be overwritten.
To move week by week, month by month, year by year etc., select the
appropriate command from the submenu or use the following key
combinations:

Previous day = B1, Arrow left or Navistick-left.

Next day = B4, Arrow right or Navistick-right.
Previous appointment = B3, Arrow up or Navistick-up.
Next appointment = B6, Arrow down or Navistick-down.
Previous week = B2 or Shift+Arrow left.
Next week = B5 or Shift+Arro right.
Previous month B1B2 or =Shift+Arrow up.
Next month = B4B5 or Shift+Arrow down.
Previous Half year (six months) = B1B3 or Page up (FN+Arrow up).
Next half year = B4B6 or Page down (FN+Arrow down).
Previous year = B2B 3 or Shift+Page up (FN+Shift+Arro up).
Next year = B5B6 or Shift+Page down (FN+Shift+Arrow down).

To move In edit boxes you can use the same commands as in word
processor.

10.2 The “File” Menu

10.2.1 New Appointment

Different types of appointment can be input and set up here, e.g.
appointments with definite start and end times, birthdays as all-day
appointments, recurrent events and appointments lasting several
days. Each appointment can have a reminder set up a certain length of
time beforehand.

To record an appointment proceed as follows:

1. Open the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key and
select “File”.
2. Open the submenu by moving to the right, and select “New
appointment”
3. This opens a dialog with edit boxes and buttons. Use the Navistick
(N-up/N-down) or the Arrow keys up/down to move up or down through
the various options. If this is the first sentry for this particular date the
dialog can be opened by pressing B9 or Return only
4. Enter the appropriate information in the edit boxes “Subject”,
“Location” and “Description”. The “Date” and “Time” boxes should not
be left empty and are therefore filled in by default with the
corresponding date and time
Text in the edit boxes can be overwritten with new information. Move
the cursor to remove the highlighting of the text and then edit it.
5. Appointments are given a default length of 30 minutes. When the
start time is input in the edit box “Start time”, 30 minutes will be
added and the time shown in the edit box “End time”. This time can be
overwritten. If the end time is earlier than the start time the error will
be pointed out for correction. If there is no specific timeframe select
“All-day event” by pressing the space bar– the edit boxes for start and
end time then disappear.
NB: “All-day” means a start and end time of 00:00, so a reminder will
be given at midnight.
6. The check box “Reminder” activates an alarm. It is selected by
default and linked to the “Reminder” edit box where you can
determine how long before the appointment you would like to be
reminded, set by default at 15 minutes (the format is hh:mm where ‘h’
stands for hour and ‘m’ for minute; the format dd:hh:mm, where ‘d’
stands for day, can also be used).
7. The “Set Recurrence” button opens another dialog, which will be
described in chapter 10.2.2.
8. In the “Busy status” list you can determine the appointment status.
This setting will be kept when synchronising with Outlook. “Busy” is set
as the default.
9. With the “Categories” edit box and its “Manage categories” option,
categories can be assigned to an appointment. A description of the
associated functions can be found in Chapter 10.7.
10. The “Private” option allows an appointment to be marked as such.
This setting can be used with the filter settings, to have only private or
non-private appointments displayed.
11. In the edit box “Description” additional information about the
appointment can be input. There is a limit of 5000 characters to the
length of text.
12. Close the dialog by pressing “OK”.

Option:
The shortcut “n+B8B9” or “Control+n” opens the appointments dialog
directly to record a new appointment.

The appointment has now been saved to RAM and can be synchronised
with Outlook Calendar.

NB:
When synchronising Contacts and the Outlook Calendar, any birthdays
entered in Contacts can appear in PRONTO as all-day events with no
reminder.

All entries and amendments currently go to the RAM memory only. To

avoid any undesirable loss of data, the current data will automatically
be saved to Storage card/DatabaseAppointments.xml when switched
off with S4, and a corresponding message given. The database can
also be saved to the internal PRONTO Flashdisk/User and uploaded
from there as required (see Chapter 13.7 Pronto Menu / Settings /
Outlook databases).

If, however, Pronto is used as a normal PDA and its database is

regularly synchronised with the computer, the default saving of the
database should be deactivated to avoid any potential synchronising
problems see Chapter 13.7 Outlook databases).
10.2.2 Recurrent Appointment
A recurrent appointment is one which is repeated at regular intervals
at the same time. It need only be entered once and then the frequency
determined (e.g. every three days, the first Wednesday in the month
etc). Make a new appointment as described above and then select “Set
Recurrence”.

Example: Wastepaper is collected every three weeks on a Tuesday

morning.
1. Open Planner with S3
2. Go through to the next Tuesday. Open the command menu by
pressing S3 briefly or ALT key, then select “file”, select “”new
appointment” to open the dialog.
3. Under “Subject” type “Wastepaper”. As Tuesday is the correct day
there is no need to change it. In “Start time” type “07:00” without the
quote marks. The same time can be input in the “End time” field
4. Keep the predefined reminder time and select “set recurrence”
5. A second dialog opens at the first option “recurrence type”. There
are six options which can be selected by moving to the right or left.
The further options vary according to the type selected. Select
“Weekly: every (x) weeks on day...”
6. Under “Intervall” type “3”
7. From the following check boxes of days activate “Tuesday” by
pressing the B0 or space bar.
8. We now determine the range of recurrence. The “No end date”
option is not activated by default. To determine an end date there are
two options: either input the end date itself, or input the number of
occurrences. “10” is the default number of occurrences which can be
overwritten
9. We want to stop at the end of the year, so in the “End by” field type
“31.12.2008”. Note that the number of occurrences has now changed
automatically
10. Close the dialog by selecting “OK” and the first dialog will appear
where the recurrence type was input. Close this dialog by selecting
“OK”.
11. We are now back in Planner and by using N-up or N-down
respectively Arrow up/down we can go through our appointments to
find those which occur on a regular basis.

NB: With a recurrent appointment, single occurrence can be deleted or

amended without affecting the series as a whole.
10.2.3 Saving Appointments
Planner data can be saved to various locations:
1. In PRONTO’s RAM if Planner is open and PRONTO is still switched on
or in Standby mode.
2. In PRONTO’s non volatile memory
(Flashdisk/USER/DatabaseAppointments.xml). In “Pronto menu >
Settings > Outlook databases”, if “backup databases to Flashdisk” has
been selected, appointments and Planner data will be saved there from
the RAM.
3. on the inserted memory card (Storage
Card/DatabaseAppointments.xml). In PRONTO menu>settings>Outlook
databases, if both “Automatically save upon shut down” and “Save to
storage card” have been selected, appointments and planner entries
will be saved from the RAM upon shutdown with S4
4. When synchronised, the data will be exchanged with Outlook and
located on the PC.

NB:
If Pronto is set up as an independent organizer and no contacts or
appointments are exchanged with your PC, the database must be
saved on Prontos non volatile memory to avoid any loss of data.
If, however, Pronto is set up like a normal PDA (Pocket PC) as an add-
on to your PC, the database should not be saved in Pronto’s memory or
loaded from it, otherwise undesirable consequences may ensue during
synchronisation

To save appointments permanently check the database file

DatabaseAppointments.xml regularly, especially when amendments
are made or new appointments created in the Planner.
Select PRONTO menu>settings>Outlook databases, then “Save
database to storage card” or “Save database to Flashdisk”.
This can also be set up automatically when PRONTO is shut down with
S4; select PRONTO menu>settings>Outlook databases, then “Save
automatically on shutdown” or “Save to storage card” as appropriate.

For external storage:

Depending on your settings, PRONTO’s appointments file can be found
either in PRONTO in the “Flashdisk/USER/DatabaseAppointments.xml”
database file, or on the inserted memory card “Storage
card/DatabaseAppointments.xml”

10.3 Appointment Alarm and Reminder

When an appointment time is reached a signal will be emitted and a
dialog opens. The dialog shows the appointment in the reminder list.
The time at which the reminder is given is calculated by taking the
start time of the appointment (edit box “Start time”) and the
determined reminder period (in “days:hours:minutes” before the start
time), e.g. 00:15 to be reminded 15 minutes before the start time. It is
independent of the length of the appointment.

All-day appointments have a default start time of 00.00; if the

reminder option is live Pronto will therefore give a reminder at
midnight, before the set time.

This reminded appointments dialog can be opened by pressing S2

briefly so that appointments can be viewed in the reminder list. This
list shows all reminded appointments which have not been confirmed.
Select “Cancel” to return to the previous application.

10.3.1 The “Reminded Appointments” Dialog

When an appointment time is reached a dialog will appear in the
foreground, even if PRONTO has been switched off with S4.
- if no key is pressed you will hear another short tone 5 times within
40 seconds. PRONTO will then switch back automatically to its previous
status, i.e. to the previous application or to stand-by mode. The
reminder will sound again 10 minutes later. This will continue until
either the appointment is confirmed by selecting “Close”, or other
settings in the dialog are accessed.
- if, after hearing the alarm, you go through the dialog but do not close
it, the time remaining before the appointment begins will be given
every minute alongside the appointment details themselves until the
start time is reached.
- if you quit Reminded Appointments and want to close the dialog,
select “Close this reminder”; the appointment will also be removed
from the reminder list.
- if you want to be reminded again of this appointment at a specific
time, type the desired time in the edit box “Remind again in”
(dd:hh:mm), e.g. 02:00 to be reminded again in two hours’ time. Then
select “Remind this again”. The dialog will close.
- If the dialog is interrupted by another message (e.g. the alarm), it will
be shown again approximately 30 seconds later.

The “Reminded Appointments” dialog contains the following features:

- “Reminded Appointments”
This list contains the appointments which have reminders activated. If
several appointments are present they are sorted by start time,
earliest first. It can be useful to go through the list from left to right to
see all the entries.
- The “Close this reminder” button
The selected appointment will be deleted from the reminder list and no
reminder will be given. The dialog will close and PRONTO will return to
the previous application or to stand-by mode. Expired appointments
are also removed from the reminder list.

- The “Close all reminders” button

Only appears when there is more than one appointment in the
reminder list. All appointments will be deleted from the list and the
dialog will close.

- The “Remind again in” edit box

The reminder time for a later reminder can be set here (dd:hh:mm for
days:hours:minutes). The appointment will be deleted from the list and
a reminder will be given when the new time is reached.

- The “Remind this again” button

For the highlighted appointment the reminder will be given again in
accordance with the reminder time input. The dialog will close and
PRONTO will return to the previous application. Note: The reminded
appointment will be removed from the list. So, if you open the dialog
by pressng S2 briefliy, the list will be blank.

- The “Remind all again” button

This only appears when there is more than one appointment in the
reminder list. A reminder will be given again for all appointments in
accordance with the reminder time input (simultaneously). The dialog
will close and PRONTO will return to the previous application. Note: The
reminded appointments will be removed from the list. So, if you open
the dialog by pressng S2 briefliy, the list will be blank.

- The “Open this Appointment” button

This opens a dialog for the appointment (cf. editing an appointment).

- The “Cancel” button

(or quit the reminder window by switching to another application, or
switch to stand-by mode).
All appointments remain in the reminder list which can be viewed at
any time by pressing S2 briefly. The dialog will close and PRONTO will
return to the previous application or switch to stand-by mode.

If there are no appointments in the reminder list the dialog contains

only the “Cancel” button.
10.4 Editing an Appointment

10.4.1 Changing an Appointment

This is similar to creating a new appointment, as the same dialog with
the same options is opened.
To change an appointment, its details or description, go to it and press
B9 or Return to open a dialog. Make the changes and close the dialog
by selecting “OK”. This dialog can also be opened from the Command
Menu by selecting “File > Open appointment”.

When opening a recurrent appointment, a message will appear asking

if you wish to open only the selected single appointment or the entire
series. If you open only a specific item, you can make the appropriate
amendments in the dialog which will then affect only this particular
item without affecting the settings for the series as a whole. The
“Private” and “Categories” options, and the ability to amend the rules
governing the whole series, are then not available.

To change the parameters of a recurrent appointment (e.g. the end

date), select “Change recurrence” in the appointment dialog, make the
changes and close both dialogs by selecting “OK”.

NB:
Any amendment will change the database file in RAM.
Using PDA Mode this means that the current changes will be
synchronised immediately. Using Pronto mode it is recommended to
save the changings manually with the options in Pronto menu >
Settings > Outlook databases.

10.4.2 Deleting an Appointment

To delete an appointment from Planner go to it and open the
Command Menu and select “Edit > “Delete appointment”. Answer
“Yes” to the security message to delete the entry.

When deleting a recurrent appointment a message will appear asking

if you want to delete only the single appointment in the series, or the
entire series. If you delete only an singel appointment, this will be
deleted without changing the other settings in the series.

NB:
As with amending an appointment, the database must be saved after
an appointment has been deleted.
10.4.3 Find
With this function you can quickly find appointments whose dates you
have forgotten. The function searches for words or syllables in the
“Subject ” and/or “Location” fields.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the command menu with S3 or Alt key, select “Edit”, then
“Find”.
2. In the “Find what” edit box type the search word or syllable
3. Use the check boxes “In subject” and “In location” to determine
which fields are to be searched. The search normally begins from the
current day forwards unless the check box “find backwards” is
activated. Select “OK” to start.
4. The first occurrence of the search term will be shown. To proceed
with the search open the Command Menu and select “Edit” then “Find
next”.

Option
The shortcut “?+B8B9” or “Control+f” opens the find what dialog
directly.

10.5 The “View” Menu

PRONTO offers different and independent ways of displaying planner
pages and appointments. The speech output and Braille display show
the same default entries: a day display contains the weekday, the date
and the week.
If the date is in the current year, the year will not be given.
The default settings for an appointment give the weekday, date, time,
week, subject, start time, end time and location.
The order of the fields can be changed. Fields can be hidden and fields
can be added to the appointment display.
The advantage of this variability is that the speech output can give, for
example, the weekday and date of an appointment and whether or not
it is recurrent, whereas, the Braille display could give more specific
information such as “subject”, “location”, “time”, etc.

These settings can be amended in the Menu item of Command Menu

“View”. These settings will be saved in Pronto in
Flashdisk/USER/calendar.xml

The following sub chapters describe how to make the settings for
praille and speech presentation of the planner data and appointments.
10.5.1 Braille and Speech presentation of Appointments
Use this option to determine which fields are to be given via the
speech output resp. on the praille display and in which order.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command Menu with S3 once briefly or Alt key and select
“View”
2. Depending on which kind of presentation you want to ament, either
select “Appointments in Braille or select “Appointments in Speech”.
3. A dialog will open at a list headed “Shown appointment elements” –
move to the left or right to select specific elements.
4. The number preceding the field indicates its position in the current
order. Entries with no number are hidden from the current view. The
list contains the following entries: day of week, date, time, week,
subject, start, end, location, recurring (*), exception (x), continuation
(>), alarm set (A), has description (D). category (C), private (P), busy
status: (free F, tentative T, busy B, out of office X).
5. Select the element you wish to amend and open a second Command
Menu with S3 once briefly or Alt key.
6. Here are the commands to change its position, to hide it, display it,
etc.
7. If a hidden field is now to be displayed it will appear with its previous
position in the list, e.g. “8”. To move it further up the list either move it
to the left step by step towards the beginning, or move it to the
beginning and then to the right. If a field is hidden the next field will
move one position higher.
8. Open another command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key and
use the menu items to ament the position of the selected entry.
9. To close the dialog and save the presentation settings for an
appointment select “OK”.

NB:
- the “Start” and “Time” fields show the same time, except in all-day
appointments
- with all-day appointments the “Start” and “End” fields are replaced
with “ad”. All-day appointments are defined as lasting from 00:00 until
00:00 the following day – 00.00 appears in the “Time” field
- continuous appointments (those lasting several days) have the
time/date of the beginning of the appointment in “Start” and the end
time/date in “End”
- to read the descriptions for an appointment, open the appointment:
with B9 or Return and go to the description edit box. Quit the dialog
with “Cancel” (Escape).
10.5.2 Braille and Speech presentation of Date only
Here you can determine which date fields on days without
appointments are to be given via the speech resp. Braille output, and
in which order.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command Menu with S3 once briefly or Alt key and select
“View”
2. Depending on which kind of presentation you want to ament, either
select “Date in Speech” or “Date in Braille”.
3. A dialog will open at a list headed “Shown elements” – move to the
right or left to select specific elements. The following elements are
available: weekday, date, week.
4. The number preceding the field indicates its position in the current
order. Entries with no number are hidden from the current view.
5. Select the element you wish to amend and open a second Command
Menu with S3 once briefly or Alt key.
6. There are the commands to change its position, hide it, show it, etc.
7. If a hidden field is now to be displayed it will appear with its previous
position in the list, e.g. “3”. To move it further up the list either move it
to the left step by step towards the beginning, or move it to the
beginning and then to the right. If an element is hidden the next
element will move one position higher.
8. To close the dialog and save the display options for the date
presentation, confirm “OK”.

10.5.3 Default Settings

All settings can be reset to the predefined default values with a
command. Open the Command Menu with S3 once briefly or Alt key.
Select “View”, then select “Set to defaults”. All displays will be reset to
their original values without confirmation.

10.5.4 Filter
Filters allow you to determine which appointments are to be displayed
in the planner.
The filters use the various options available within an appointment, i.e.
you can determine whether or not all appointments, only private or
non-private ones, recurrent appointments or certain categories of
recurrent appointment are to be displayed. The settings can be
combined which will reduce the number of displayed appointments
accordingly.

When searching for an appointment, only the currently displayed

appointments will be taken into consideration. The “Delete old
appointments” option in the “Tools” menu can be used to determine
whether or not deletion should affect those appointments which are
currently displayed because of a specific filter.

To set up a filter, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Command menu by pressing S3 or ALT key, select “View”
then “Filter”.
2. A dialog will open containing the filter settings.
3. Deactivate the “Show all” option to expand the dialog containing the
filter settings.
4. Select the appropriate settings and close the dialog with “OK”.
5. The filter settings will now have an immediate effect on the type and
number of displayed appointments.

Option:
The shortcut “r+B8B9” or “Control+r” opens the filter dialog directly.

To have all planner appointments displayed quickly, open the

“View/Filter” entry and select “Display all”. The filter settings will be
kept, but will not be applied in this instance.

The “Filter” dialog contains the following elements:

- “Show all”.
If checked, this option expands the dialog to allow filter rules to be set.
If not checked, no filter rules will be applied and all appointments in
the planner will be displayed.

- “Appointment type”
Here you can determine which types of appointment are to be affected
by the display and filter settings. Choose between: “Single
appointments and series”, “Single appointments only”, “Series only” or
“First appointment in a series only”.

- “Sensitivity””
Determine here whether or not “Private” is to be regarded as a filter
rule.

- “Show continuous appointments”

When checked, every day of an appointment lasting several days will
be displayed. If not checked only the first day of a continuous
appointment will be displayed and the remaining days will be cut out.

- “Show appointments with the following categories only”

If not checked, all categories will be ignored, i.e. it is irrelevant if any
categories have been assigned to the appointment.
If checked, the dialog will expand so that categories can be input or
built as filter rules (see Chapter 10.7.2). Then only those appointments
which contain these categories will be displayed.

- “Hide appointments with the following categories”.

If not checked, all categories will be ignored, i.e. it is irrelevant if any
categories have been assigned to the appointment.
If checked, the dialog will expand so that categories can be input or
built as filter rules (see Chapter 10.7.2). Then all appointments which
contain these categories will not be displayed.

10.6 The “Tools” Menu

10.6.1 Reminder
There are three ways of reminding an appointment:
1. an audible signal
2. a spoken message with information about the appointment
3. an indicator on the Braille display.

An unexpected or forgotten reminder can often be annoying. It is

therefore useful that each type of reminder can be switched off
temporarily without having to alter the default settings for each
individual appointment.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command Menu with S3 once briefly or Alt key.
2. Select “Tools” and then “Reminder”
3. Deactivate the check box “Remind” and confirm with “OK”.

The reminder alarm is independent of the speech output.

If you find the alarm sound annoying it can be switched off without
affecting the reminder.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command Menu with S3 once briefly or Alt key.
2. Select “Tools” then “Reminder”
3. Deactivate the check box “Remind with sound” and confirm with
“OK”.

10.6.2 Delete old appointments

Planner entries and appointments which occur before a certain date
can be deleted from the planner without having to be deleted
individually. Specific entries in the planner can be “cleaned up”.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key, select
“Tools” and then “Clean up old appointments”.
2. A dialog will open. Type the appropriate date in the edit box. All
appointments occurring before this date will be deleted. Recurrent
appointments will only be deleted if the last occurrence in the series
falls before this date. Appointments on this date will not be deleted.
3. Specific appointments may also deleted, e.g. old appointments
which are currently displayed according to specific filter rules. Select
“Use filter”. According to the filter rule in force only private
appointments or appointments with specific categories, for example,
will then be deleted (see Chapter 10.5.4).
If this option is not selected, all old appointments will be deleted
according to the date input, regardless of whether they are displayed
or hidden according to a specific filter rule.
4. Confirm with “OK”.
5. You will receive a security message giving the number of individual
and recurrent appointments which will be deleted with this planner
option.
6. Confirm with “OK” to delete these appointments.

NB: when synchronising, calendar entries deleted in this manner will

also be deleted in Outlook on the PC.

10.6.3 Categories Manager

This opens a dialog where the available categories can be viewed and
edited, and new categories defined or deleted.
Chapter 10.7 contains a more detailed description of how to work with
categories and this dialog.

10.6.4 Export
The “Export“ function allows planner appointments to be saved to an
xml file. Any file name and save location can be selected, although the
file name calendardata.xml will be suggested first.
The exported planner files are based on the entries in the database
files currently loaded. You can choose to export all appointments from
this period of time, or only those which are subject to a live filter rule.
The Export function allows appointments from the desired period of
time to be saved so that they can be imported later into another (new)
loaded database file.
It can also be used to save previous appointments before they are
deleted from the current database file with the “Delete all
appointments” command (personal archiving).
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALK key, select
“Tools” and then “Export”.
2. A dialog will open.
3. In the “Starts at” edit box, type the date from which the desired
period of time is to begin. Appointments which fall before this date will
not be considered for export.
4. In the “Ends before” edit box, type the date on which the desired
period of time is to end. Appointments which fall on or after this date
will not be considered for export.
NB: there must be at least one day between the start and end dates.
5. It is possible to be selective and select only those appointments
within a given time period which are subject to a live filter rule. Select
the “Use filter” option. Depending on the filter rule only certain
categories of appointments will be exported, for example only private
appointments (see Chapter 10.5.4).
If this check box has not been selected all appointments from the
defined period of time will be exported, regardless of any filter rules
which may be applicable.
6. The Info field shows the name and path of the xml file to which the
planner appointments are exported and saved. If you want to change
the file name and/or save location, select "Browse". Another dialog will
open where the desired changes can be made in a manner similar to
File manager.
7. Confirm with “OK”.
8. A security question will then appear giving the number of single and
recurrent appointments which will be exported to the displayed xml
file.
If such a file already exists it can be overwritten with new planner data,
or the procedure halted.
9. Confirm with “OK” to export the data.

10.6.5 Import
For this function to work, planner data must first have been exported.
The “Import” function allows planner data to be loaded from an
existing xml file, so that these data can be added to the existing
database file.
If several xml files exist each with different planner data, select
whichever you need.
The Import function allows planner appointments from different
database files or from different periods of time to be exported to a
database file and then saved to a single xml file and added to a current
loaded database file.
You may also determine whether or not certain entries from the
current database file are to be deleted before these data are added.
This allows you to avoid double entries or undesired mix-ups after
importing. The imported calendar file then replaces all the entries in
the planner.
The file containing the data for import is generally called
calendardata.xml.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key, select
“Tools” and then “Import”.
2. A dialog will open.
3. Select “Delete current appointments” only if you want all entries
from the current planner to be deleted before importing. The imported
calendar data will thus be written to an empty planner.
If you want the imported calendar files to be added to the entries
currently in your planner, do not select this check box.
4. The Info field displays the file name and path location of the xml file,
which contains the planner data you wish to import. If there is more
than one xml file and your desired file is not in the Info field, select
“Browse”. Another dialog will open where the desired file can be
selected in a manner similar to File manager.
5. Confirm with “OK”.
6. A security question will then appear giving the number of single and
recurrent appointments which will be imported to the planner.
If you decided to delete the planner entries before importing, the
number to be deleted will be given.
7. Confirm with “OK” to import the data.

10.7 Working with categories

10.7.1 General remarks

Categories allow different types of appointment to be ordered and thus
grouped according to category. When synchronising with Outlook
calendar files, the categories used in Outlook will be taken on. In
Pronto it is also possible to input unique new categories for assignment
to your appointments.
You can also use the categories to filter the way the appointment is
displayed, for example to display or hide appointments with specific
categories (see Chapter 10.5.4).

The databaseappointments.xml file contains both the relevant

appointment data and the categories assigned to the appointment.
Depending on the save settings for the calendar data in “Pronto
menu/Settings/Outlook databases”, the file will saved either to the
inserted Storage Card or the internal memory (Flashdisk/USER).

The categories displayed in the “My categories” list belong to the user-
defined settings and are saved in the Flashdisk/USER/Calendar.xml file.
The categories displayed in the “Other categories” list are taken from
the appointments in the plannr, if the appointment has a category
assigned to it.

10.7.2. Assigning categories in an appointment or filter

When recording a new appointment or opening an existing one, the
dialog contains two elements. With the categories input, you can filter
the way the appointment is displayed, or use the corresponding
settings when exporting or deleting old appointments.

- “Categories” ("Displayed categories” or “Hidden categories” in the

filter settings).
With new appointments or filter settings (display/hide appointments
with the following categories) the desired categories can be input
directly. With an open appointment the categories assigned to it will be
displayed and they can be edited or even deleted. The entries are
arranged in alphabetical order.
The field can contain several categories which must be separated by
commas.
It is also possible to add pre-defined categories to the edit box with the
“Manage categories” option (or Category selection in the filter
settings).
NB:
Categories typed or edited directly in the edit box will not be
automatically included in the list of user-defined categories.

- “Manage categories” (or Category selection in the filter settings).

This will open a dialog. It contains various lists and options for viewing
the user-defined categories in the “My categories” list and for selecting
the desired category for the new or open appointment.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the “New appointment” or “Open appointment” dialog (or, in
the filter settings select “Show/hide appointments with the following
categories”
2. Select “Manage categories” (or “Category Selection” in the filter
settings).
3. A second dialog will open.
4. The “My categories” list contains the available categories. If the list
is empty or does not contain the desired category, the missing
category cannot be selected and assigned to the appointment or filter.
The desired category must then be defined (see Chapter 10.7.3).
5. In the “My categories” list, go to the desired category by moving to
the right or left.
6. Select “Add”. This will add the category from the “Selected
categories” list to the dialog below.
7. If you want to add more categories to the appointment or filter,
repeat the procedure: select the category from the “My categories”
list, select “Add” and then check that the new entry now appears in
the “Selected categories” list.
8. If you inadvertently add a category to the “Selected categories” list,
it can be deleted by selecting “Remove”. The “Delete” option only
appears in the dialog when the “Selected categories” list contains at
least one entry.
9. Select “OK”. The dialog will close. All categories in the “Selected
categories” list will now feature in the “Categories” field of the
appointment dialog (or in the appropriate field in the filter settings).
10. Close the appointment dialog by selecting “OK” to save the new
categories.

NB: The dialog contains an additional option “Edit my categories”

which opens a second dialog to define new categories. It is the same
dialog that can be accessed through the “Tools/Categories manager”
menu (see Chapter 10.7.3).

10.7.3 Define categories

An appointment can only be assigned categories which have already
been defined and appear in the “My categories” list.
New categories with your own heading can be defined, or categories
taken from the list of available categories.

There are various ways of opening the category definition dialog:

a) “Tools/Categories manager” in the command menu
b) Through the options available under “Manage categories” in the
appointment dialog and then “Edit my categories"
c) Through the command menu option “View/Filter” and then
“Show/hide appointments with the following categories” and then
“Category selection”, “Edit my categories”.

10.7.3.1 Define new categories or delete existing ones

To define new categories or delete existing ones proceed as follows:
1. Open the command menu and select “Tools/Categories manager”,
or in the appointment dialog select "Manage categories” and then “Edit
my categories”
2. A dialog will open and the “My categories” list will display the
existing categories, or will be empty. Only those categories which
appear in this list are available for selection in the filter settings or in
the appointment dialog.
3. Select “New”.
4. A second dialog will open.
5. In the “New category” field type your desired category name and
then select “OK”.
6. You will be taken back to the first dialog and the “My categories” list
will now contain the new category in alphabetical order.
7. If you want to delete a category, select it from the “My categories”
list and then select “Remove”.

10.7.3.2 Define categories from existing categories

Appointments for which categories were input directly into the
“Categories” edit box in the appointments dialog, or appointments
which were transferred to Pronto’s calendar following synchronisation
can contain category descriptions which have not been defined. They
will thus not appear in the “My categories” list and will not be available
for the filter settings or when defining new appointments.

To define existing categories and add them to the “My categories” list,
proceed as follows:

1. Open the command menu and select “Tools/Categories manager”,

or in the appointment dialog select "Manage categories” and then “Edit
my categories”
2. A dialog will open and the “My categories” list will display the
existing categories, or will be empty. Only those categories which
appear in this list are available for selection in the filter settings or in
the appointment dialog.
3. Go to the “Other used categories” list. This contains, in alphabetical
order, all those categories which appear in individual appointments but
which have not yet been defined and therefore do not appear in the
“My categories” list.
4. Move to the right/left to the desired category and select “Add
selected category”.
5. The category will now appear in the “My categories” list and will no
longer appear in the “Other used categories” list.
6. Select “OK” to close the dialog and save the user-defined categories
(File: Flashdisk/USER/Calendar.xml).

Tip for the “Other used categories” list:

Pronto goes through all the appointments and checks if there are any
categories which do not correspond to the user-defined categories in
the “My categories” list. These will then be displayed.
If you use categories in Outlook on your PC which differ from those
defined in Pronto, these will be displayed after synchronisation.
When you are recording a new appointment and you type the category
directly into the edit box and typing errors creep in, these spellings will
be regarded as separate entries in the list.
11. Address book (Contacts database)
The address book database is so designed that it can be synchronised
with the Outlook Contacts of your PC (but not with Outlook Express). A
full partnership between PRONTO and your PC must be set up in
Microsoft ActiveSync for this to work (see Chapter 15.2.2 and Appendix
x3).

Thanks to corresponding settings in the ActiveSync program (Windows

XP/2000) or Windows Mobile Center (Windows Vista), data can be
exchanged (automatically) between the contact databases of PRONTO
and Outlook.

11.1 Structure of Contacts (Outline view and Detailed

view)
Each line in Address book contains data held in separate fields;
approximately 50 different fields are available which can be combined
according to personal preferences in output masks (Display masks). All
Contacts entries form a kind of tabular structure, with each contact
and its fields occupying its own line. There are two types of display:
outline view and detailed view.

1. Outline view
- contains the first field in a line
- displays all entries according to the output masks (Display masks)
chosen, compressed into one field
- On the Braille display you can read the entries by scrolling.
- the “Speech settings” function allows you to determine which fields, if
any, are to be read out aloud, independent of the entries on the Braille
display.

2. Detailed or Single field view

- contains all fields which occur to the right of Outline view
- each field contains a single entry
- each field can be accessed and its contents displayed by moving to
the right or left
- the field name can also be displayed or simply read out aloud.

The Standard setting (recommended for beginners) displays a default

selection of fields for editing: first name, last name, telephone number,
postcode, city, street, email, date of birth, category).

More experienced users can select other masks, or select different

input and output masks for display and editing purposes (see Chapter
11.5).

The menu item File>Restore standard settings in the command menu

will reinstall the default settings (Standard mask) for the appearance
and inputting of contacts.
All individual mask settings will then be lost.

11.2 Navigating in Contacts

Open the PRONTO menu by pressing S3 or Windows key, and select
"Address book".
Option: With the shortcut “a+B8B9” or “Windowskey+a” you can
access the adressbook directly.

Contacts will open at the first entry in Outline view. Should you switch
between Contacts and other applications, you will return to the same
field when you switch back to Contacts.

In Outline view everything is read out, depending on the output mask

and speech settings selected (see Chapter 11.5).

Fields are separated from each other by a comma. On the Braille

display you have to scroll to read all fields of the contact.

Moving to the right (N-right or Arrow right) will take you to the first
entry in Detailed view. Further movement to the right or left will access
other fields or take you back to Outline view.

Up or down movements (Navistick or Arrow keys) will access other

contacts without changing the display.

Example:
If you are in Outline view on the extreme left and go down, the
following contact will be displayed in Outline view. If you are in
Detailed view in the Last name field and go down, only the surname of
the next contact will be displayed.

11.2.1 The “Navigate” menu

Open the Command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key. Go up
or down to “Navigate” to access a submenu with various commands:
- one field left:
- one field right
- previous contact
- next contact
- 5 fields to the left
- 5 fields to the right
- to the first field
- to the last field
- first contact
- last contact

11.3 The “File” menu

11.3.1 New contact

Proceed as follows:
1. call up the Command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key,
select File > New contact.
2. a dialog will open at the first edit box.
3. the type and number of edit boxes depends on the input mask
selected or the default input mask (see Chapter 11.5.1 and 11.5.2)
4. Confirm with “OK”. (if the new contacts are not displayed in the
main view, oben the command menu with S3 briefly or ALT key and
select the Command menu > File > Refresh).

Option:
(The shortcut “n+B8B9” or “Control+n” opens the “New contact”
dialog directly.

New contacts are saved initially only on PRONTO’s volatile RAM

memory. If Pronto has been connected to your PC with a full
partnership in ActiveSync resp. Mobile Device Center, and Contact
Synchronisation has been set up all new data will be transferred
immediately to Outlook Contacts.

NB:
There are various ways of saving contacts (see chapters 11.3.3 and
13.7).
By default, when Pronto is switched off with S4 (Standby mode)
contacts are saved to the memory card (Storage Card/databases.pdb).

11.3.2 Open a contact

Opening a contact is similar to entering a new one as the same kind of
dialog is used. Different edit boxes can be offered, however, depending
on whether you have opened the contact in Outline or Detailed view. In
the open dialog, individual entries can be edited and deleted, and the
entire contact can be deleted.
Proceed as follows:
1. Go to the desired contact or one of its fields and open the command
menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key. In the Command menu select
“File > Open contact”.
2. In Outline view, when the dialog is opened all fields as defined in the
chosen input mask or the default mask are displayed; it will open in the
first edit box.
In Detailed view, when the dialog is opened it will display the edit
boxes as defined for the chosen mask or the default output mask, and
will open at the edit box that corresponds to the selected contact field
3. Make your amendments and close the dialog with “OK”.

NB:
Any amendment will alter the database file in the volatile RAM
memory.
Using PDA Mode this means that the current changes will be
synchronised immediately. Using Pronto mode it is recommended to
save the changings manually with the options in Pronto menu >
Settings > Outlook databases.

11.3.3 Saving contacts

Contacts data can be saved to various locations:
1. in PRONTO’s RAM if Contacts is open and PRONTO is still switched on
or in Standby mode
2. in PRONTO’s memory (Flashdisk/USER/databases.pdb). In “Pronto
menu > Settings > Outlook databases”, if “Backup databases to
Flashdisk” has been selected, address data will be saved there from
the RAM.
3. on the inserted memory card (Storage card/databases.pdb). In
“Pronto menu > Settings > Outlook databases”, if both check boxes
“Automatically save when switched off” and “Save to storage card”
have been activated, contacts will be saved here from the RAM when
shutting down with S4.
4. When synchronised the data will be compared with Outlook and
located on the PC.

NB:
If Pronto is set up as an independent organizer and no addresses or
appointments are exchanged with your PC, the database must be
saved on Pronto to avoid any loss of data (PRONTO mode).
If, however, Pronto is set up like a normal PDA (Pocket PC) as an add-
on to your PC, the database should not be saved in Pronto’s memory
on flashdisk or storage card or loaded from it, otherwise undesirable
consequences may ensue during synchronisation (PDA mode).
11.4 The “Edit” menu

11.4.1 Delete a contact

To delete a contact, go to it and press S3 brievly or ALT key to open
the Command menu and select “Edit > Delete contact”. Answer ‘Yes’
to the security question, and the entry will be deleted.

Options:
The shortcut B7B9 or Delete key deletes the selected contact directly.
Or oen the contact and confirm teh delete button within the dialog.

NB:
Deleting an entry will alter the database in the RAM memory – look out
for knock-on effects when synchronising. If the database is to be saved
in Pronto, the current database must be saved after any deletion (see
Chapters 11.3.3 and 13.7).

11.4.2 Find and Find next

The “Find” and “Find next” functions allow a specific contact to be
found quickly. The displayed fields are searched for a specific word or
syllable contained in them.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key.
Select "Edit" and then “Find”.
2. A dialog will open. In “Find what” type the word or syllable to be
found.
3. Normally the search works forwards, unless the option “Search
backward” is selected. Select “OK” to close the dialog and start the
search.
4. If successful you will be taken to the first contact that has a field
containing your search term. You will not be taken directly to the field
itself, but will remain at the same point where the search was
launched, e.g. in Outline view, or in the “Last name” field in Detailed
view.
5. To resume the search open the Command menu and select “Edit >
Find next”.
6. If your search term cannot be found a message will be announced,
and you can resume your search from the first contact. If the search
remains unsuccessful you will receive a further message.

Option: The shortcut “?+B8B9” or “Control+f” opens the search dialog

directly. F

NB:
Only words and terms which appear in the displayed contact field can
be sought. The current view (selected mask or output mask)
determines which fields are to be displayed. If your search is
unsuccessful you may select a different mask or output mask and try
again.

Example 1
The default output mask has been set (Select mask/Default). We wish
to search for Mr Smith’s address. Open the Command menu by
pressing S3 briefly, select “Edit”, then “Find”. Type “Smith” in the Find
edit box and confirm “OK”. The first entry found is for Mrs Smith-
Brown. Open command menu again, select “Edit”, hten “Find next”
and continue the search until Mr Smith’s details are found.

Example 2
The default mask has been selected for our contacts (Select
mask/Default), e.g. Mr Smith from London, with his telephone number
and full address. We then selected “Telephone mask” as the output
mask. When now searching for “London” the message “not found” will
be displayed as the telephone mask does not display the “City” field
and hence cannot find “London”. Be aware of the settings chosen
when searching contacts.

11.5 The “View” menu

Pronto offers various independent ways of displaying contacts through
a selection of masks. A mask determines which fields are to be
available for a contact and the order of their display.
As approximately 50 different contact fields are available, it is sensible
and easier to work with masks which display only certain fields. This is
why, for example, there is a default mask with the most important
contact details, and a telephone mask with fields for several telephone
numbers, etc.

With the default mask (Command menu>view>mask

selection>default) the following information is given, first in Outline
view then in Detailed view: first name, last name, telephone number,
post code, city, street, email, date of birth, and category. Fields with no
data remain empty and are not read out. In the default settings the
contact information in speech output and braille are identical.)

You can return to the Default setting at any time: open the Command
menu and select “File > Restore standard settings”. All individual mask
settings willb then be lost.

In addition to this default mask, 6 other pre-set masks are available.

In these masks various fields are grouped together thematically, e.g.
telephone numbers in the telephone mask. When one of these fields is
selected, the contact view and input dialog changes accordingly. Select
one of these masks in Command menu>View>mask selection.
It is also possible to determine your own contact fields and their order
of display for a mask. It is also possible to select different fields for the
contact view (output mask or display mask) and for contact input
(input mask).

11.5.1 Mask Selection

Masks can be used to determine which fields are to be displayed in a
contact and in which order.
The entry View>mask selection allows the pre-defined masks to be
selected.
The same contact fields are offered both in Outline view and Detailed
view, and when both opening and inputting a new contact. We hope
that these predefined settings will provide a useful selection.

To select a mask, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key,
and select “View”
2. Select “mask selection”
3. A dialog will open at a list containing the pre-defined masks.
4. Move to the right or left to the mask you wish to select (if you want
to change the name of the mask, open a further command menu with
S3 or Alt key, select “define name” and edit the name in the edit box.).
5. the dialog contains a second list which allows you to determine
whether or not the name of the field should be spoken, and whether
before or after the field content
6. Close the dialog with “OK” and your contacts will be displayed
according to the selected mask.

11.5.2 Input masks

The masks available here are the same as in the dialog
Command>view>mask selection. They can be altered according to
personal preferences: further fields can be added, the order changed,
fields deleted and the mask name changed.

Input masks and their settings allow you to determine which fields are
to be offered when a new contact is recorded or an existing one
opened in Outline view.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key and
select “View”.
2. Select “input masks”
3. A dialog will open at a list containing the masks.
4. move to the right or left to the mask you wish to select or amend
5. open another command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key.
6. Select “Define fields”
7. Move to the right or left to access a list of available contact fields.
First of all you will access the elements defined for this mask with the
number indicating its position in the contact. Further to the right are
the other elements arranged alphabetically.
8. Go to the element you would like to amend and open a further
command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or alt key; this contains
the commands to amend the order of the field, hide it, display it, etc
9. If a hidden element is now to be displayed it will appear with its last
known position in the contact, e.g. “8”. To move it nearer to the
beginning move it step-by-step to the left, or move it to the very
beginning and then to the right to the desired position. If an element is
hidden the next element will move one position nearer the beginning.
10. To ament the selected element open another command menu by
pressing S3 brievly or ALT key and select the coresponding menu item.
11. Close all dialogs with “OK”.

To change the name of an input mask, proceed as follows:

1. open the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key and
select “View”
2. select “Input masks”
3. a dialog will open at a list containing the different mask types.
4. move to the right or left to the mask you wish to select or would like
to amend
5. open another command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key.
6. select “Define name”
7. the current name of the mask will be displayed in the edit box– this
can be overwritten or edited.
8. close the dialog with “OK”. The list will now display the new name
9. close the dialog with “OK”.

The amended settings will be saved in PRONTO in

Flashdisk/USER/contactUSER.xml.

11.5.3 Output masks (display masks)

The masks available here are the same as in the dialog
Command>view>mask selection, and have the same names. They can
be altered according to personal preferences: further fields can be
added, the order changed, fields deleted and the mask name changed
Output masks (or display masks) are very similar to input masks and
can be edited in the same way. Open the command menu and select
View>output masks to open the dialog where output masks can be
selected and edited. Proceed as described in Chapter 11.5.2.

The dialog contains a second list which allows you to determine

whether or not the name of the field should be announced and whether
before or after the field content.

The amended settings will be saved in PRONTO in

Flashdisk/USER/contactUSER.xml.

11.5.4 Speech settings

Outline view allows the order and number of spoken fields to be set
independently of the Braille output. This variability has the advantage
of allowing only first name and last name, for example, to be read out
when moving through contacts, but allows more specific entries such
as telephone number and city, etc. to be consulted in Braille.
For this independent speech output the desired fields can be set in
their own mask. The following fields are set as default: first name, last
name, telephone number, postcode, city, street, and email.

NB: If Command menu>File>restore standard settings is selected, the

speech output will be reset to the pre-assigned entries.

The dialog for setting the spoken fields is similar to that for output
masks.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key and
select “View”.
2. select “speech presentation”
3. a dialog will open at a list headed “spoken fields”.
4. Move to the right or left to access a list of all available fields; the
predefined elements will be shown first with the predefined number
indicating their position. Further to the right are the other fields in
alphabetical order.
5. Select the element you wish to amend and open a further command
menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key.
6. here you will find the commands to amend the position, hide the
element, display the element, etc
7. if a previously hidden element is now to be displayed it will appear
with its last known position, e.g. “8”. To move it nearer to the
beginning move it step-by-step to the left, or move it to the very
beginning and then to the right to the desired position. If an element is
hidden the next element will move one place nearer the beginning.
8. Close the dialog with “OK”, and you will be taken back to the first
dialog with two further lists.
9. From the first list select “different output for speech and Braille” so
that in Outline view the selected speech settings will be adopted,
otherwise the same fields that are defined in output mask and appear
on the Braille display will be spoken
10. In the other list move to the right or left to determine whether or
not the field name is to be displayed before or after the entry, only if a
field is empty, or not at all in Detailed view. These settings will only
work if “different output for speech and Braille” was selected in the
previous list
11. Close the dialog with “OK”.

To summarise:
- The options in Speech presentation only are interesting, if an external
Braille display is attached to Pronto QS and the speech output shall
differ from the braille presentation.
- the separate speech settings will only be taken into account if
“different output for speech and Braille” is selected in the “Speech
mode” list
- settings in the “Field output” list only affect the speech output in
Detailed view
- settings in the “announced fields” list only affect the speech output in
Outline view

11.5.5 Sorting
This determines the order in which contacts should be displayed, e.g.
alphabetically by last name, first name, city, etc. The selected sorting
pattern will only work if the field selected as the sorting criterion is
displayed in Contacts.
The order of individual fields within a contact will not be altered, as this
order has been established in the mask or output mask selected.

Sorting simplifies the overall view and the comparison of specific

contacts.

Proceed as follows:
1. Call up the Command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt
key, select “View”, then “Sort order”.
2. A dialog will open at a list with different entries; these are the
field types to be used for sorting.
3. Move to the right or left to select the desired entry, e.g. “Last
name” and confirm “OK”
4. If the desired field type (sorting criterion) is not available in the
list, you can define your own - the process is similar to output mask
definition.
5. Select, for example “Free 1” and open a further Command menu
by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt key. Select “Define field” to
determine the field type to be used as the sorting criterion, e.g.
“Define name” to edit the name of the entry.
6. “Define field” will open a list containing all the available fields in
alphabetical order.
7. move to the right or left to select the field type to be used as the
sorting criterion, e.g. “File as” and select “OK”
8. the new sorting criterion has now been set up but retains its old
name in the list. It is therefore recommended that the entry “Free 1”
be renamed by opening the Command menu and selecting “Define
name”
9. Close all dialogs with “OK”
10. Sorting is now set up and the display order of the contacts will
have been altered.

NB: The advantage of sorting with “File as” is that the correct
alphabetical order of last name and first name will be taken into
account. “File as” automatically takes over the entries for “Last name
and “First name” when it is set up for the selected output mask.

11.5.5.1 The birthday list

Sorting by birthday has one peculiarity: contacts which have no date in
“Birthday” will not be displayed.
Sorting is organized, however, regardless of whether the birthday field
is displayed in the output mask.
Contacts are sorted so that the person whose birthday occurs next
appears first, and the person whose birthday is furthest away appears
last.
The order is based on the current date so that the person whose
birthday is next to occur will always appear first in Contacts.
It is recommended that the birthday mask be sorted by birthday
(Command menu>View>mask selection>Birthday mask, or Command
menu>view>Output masks>Birthday mask).

11.5.6 Filters
Contacts is a long list of columns and lines displaying the contact
information. Each line contains one contact, and the columns contain
the individual contact fields.
Depending on the mask selected the number, type and order of the
selected columns changes. This means that columns can be hidden by
determining which fields are to be displayed in the output mask. All
other fields for this particular view are then hidden and their specific
entries (contact information) inaccessible. The list thus has fewer
columns, is narrower and appears as though information has only been
entered for these particular fields for your contacts.

So what does a filter do?

From the entire list of contacts, only those that “pass through the
filter” will be displayed, thus limiting the number of contacts. The list
thus has fewer lines, is smaller and gives the impression that only
these contacts have been recorded.

If, for example, “City” has been selected as the filter criterion and a
name has been entered in the relevant field, only those contacts (lines)
containing this name in the “City” field will be displayed. It is therefore
irrelevant if this field has been selected for display in the selected
output mask.

Filtering has far-reaching effects: all operations involving data records,

e.g. searching, will now be restricted to the filtered visible contacts.

To filter, proceed as follows:

1. Call up the Command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or Alt
key, select “View” and then “Filter”
2. A dialog opens at a list containing various default filter criteria:
other Contacts fields cannot be used as filters.
3. Move to the right or left to the desired filter, e.g. “City”
4. Move down with Navistick or Arrow key to the edit box and type
the term to be used as the filter e.g. “London”. The previously selected
filter criterion will be adopted as the label for the edit box.
5. Close the dialog with OK.

Henceforth only those contacts with “London” in the field “City” will be
retrieved.

To return to the full Contacts list, open the filter dialog once again and
delete the term input. If the edit box is empty the filter rule cannot be
used, which means that all contacts will be displayed according to the
mask or output mask selected.

NB:
If a term is input that does not belong in the selected filter (e.g. Last
name: London), no contacts will be retrieved. It is therefore advisable
to check your filters rather than panic when the message “No contact
found” appears.
11.6 The “Tools” menu

11.6.1 Contact field information

When in a contact field in Detailed view, you can get information about
the field name, field content, field position and the position of the
contact itself in the retrieved list.
e.g. Field name: Private city; Field content: London; Field position: 5;
Contact no. : 10 of 25.

Open command menu with S3 or ALT key and select “Tools” >
“Details”.(Detailed view).

11.6.2 Making a telephone call direct from Contacts

Telephone numbers entered in contacts can be dialled directly or an
SMS sent to them via a connected mobile telephone and simple
command. This will quit Contacts and switch automatically to the
Mobile telephone application.
If no mobile telephone is connected and “Call number” or “Send SMS”
are selected, nothing will happen and you will be taken back to
Contacts.
If a mobile telephone is connected, a simple command allows calls to
be made, or SMS sent directly to telephone numbers held in Contacts.
The telephone number can also be emitted as a dial tone signal
(DTMF).

The following commands can be selected in Command menu >

“Tools”:
- Dial number
- Generate dial tones
- Send SMS

If there is only one number in the current contact this will be dialled
regardless of your position in the contact.

If there is more than one number, a list of all the numbers will open
from which the correct one must be selected.

If there is more than one number and you happen to be in one of the
telephone number fields in Detailed view, this particular one will be
dialled.
NB: If Pronto is only attached to the mobile phone as Braille display
(Pronto menu > Pronto as Braille display) this commands are not
available.

11.7 Synchronisation with Outlook

A full partnership between ActiveSync (on Windows XP) or Mobile
Dievice Center (on Windows Vista) and your computer must be set up
(see Chapter 15.2 and Appendix x3).
In Microsoft ActiveSync, resp. Microsoft Mobile Device Center settings
can be made in the relevant options tabs.
These settings regulate which and how data (addresses, appointments)
will be exchanged and synchronized between PRONTO and Outlook.
For more information about ActiveSync, resp. Mobile Device Center
please see the help file or help menu of this programs.

Note:
We strongly recommend that the PC’s database be saved before
synchronizing data Depending on the settings, the Program may delete
data from the PC. Learn more about the various ActiveSync resp.
Mobile Device Center options before rashly wasting the valuable
address data and appointments saved on your PC or PRONTO.
Do not forget: the synchronization of an (almost) empty database with
a full one can, depending on the settings, lead to an empty database in
both devices, a full one on both, or a new one with data from both
databases (see also Appendix x3).
12. Mobile telephone
With the mobile ‘phone application, Pronto can receive or make
telephone calls using the connected mobile ‘phone (connected with
Bluetooth). The telephone number can be dialled on the Pronto
keyboard or selected from a list displayed on Pronto. It is also possible
to dial a number or send an SMS directly from your Contacts. With
incoming calls the number is displayed on Pronto and, where available,
the name of the caller. SMS can also be written and sent from Pronto.

With some mobile ‘phones an incoming SMS can be transferred to

Pronto and can then be read or deleted.

NB:
For technical reasons, Symbian-based mobile ‘phones (e.g. Nokia
series 60, 2nd or 3rd editions) do not allow SMS to be transferred to
Pronto.

With Pronto 18 or Pronto 40 you have the possibility to attach Pronto

as a Braille display via bluetooth to a mobile phone. Therefore a valid
screenreader must be installed on the mobile phone i.e. TALKS
together with (TBI) Talks Braille Interface driver or Mobile Speak.

12.1 Set up the mobile ‘phone and Pronto

First of all a partner profile must be set up. All the required settings will
be saved in the profile.
The mobile ‘phone usually is connected to Pronto via Bluetooth.

With a Bluetooth connection the Bluetooth function must be activated

on the mobile ‘phone, the ‘phone must be registered on Pronto and
partnership information must have been saved. Go to Pronto menu >
Settings > Interfaces > Bluetooth to register (see Chapter 13.5.1).
For a serial connection a serial adapter cable will be required to
connect Pronto to the ‘phone's cable; this is available as an optional
extra.
Regardless of the connection type selected (Bluetooth or serial) a
partner profile must be defined in Pronto menu > Settings > Mobile
phone > mobile phone profiles. (see Chapter 13.8.1).

12.2 Open the mobile ‘phone application

Open Prontomenu with S3 or Windows key and select “Mobile phone”
or use the shortcut “o+B7B8B9” or “Windows key+o” to open the
mobile phone application.
The mobile ‘phone application opens in the main dialog where all
functions can be accessed. It is build up like a dialog and contains two
important display fields (information and status), in addition to many
other buttons.

The first dialog element is the info field, which provides information on
the functions being performed. The most recent information will be
displayed until overwritten by new information.

The status field displays messages on the status of the connection.

When connected the strength of the connection and the ‘phone’s
battery status will be displayed.

12.2.1 The main dialog

The main view of mobile phone application contains the following
elements:
- The information field: Displays current information. (Connection type
serial or Bluetooth, number or name of incoming caller, messages
when making a call or sending an SMS, error messages, etc). Moving
right or left will lead you to the single list entries.
- “Status”: connection information, quality of reception and mobile
‘phone battery status.
- “Connect/disconnect”: the connection can be interrupted manually or
re-established manually.
- “Settings”: opens the Settings dialog to select thedesired profile.
- “Call”: opens the call dialog (to make a telephone call).
- “Send SMS”: opens the dialog to input and send text messages.
- “Read SMS”: opens the dialog to display received SMS on Pronto.
- “Answer call”: receive incomming telephone call.
- “Hang up”: ends the telephone call.

In the main dialog press S3 once or the Alt key to open a command
menu where these and further elements can be selected.

12.3 Establish a connection

First you have to switch on bluetooth, then to register (pairing) the
bluetooth device, to set up a profile and last to start the connection in
the main view of the mobile phone application.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the main view of the mobile ‘phone application by pressing S3
or Windows key and selecting “mobile phone” from the Pronto menu.
2. Select “Settings” in main view.
3. The settings dialog will open at a list of partner profiles.
4. Move to the right or left to the partner profile.
5. Confirm “OK”.
6. A connection to your mobile ‘phone will now be built. A Bluetooth
connection will register on your mobile ‘phone and you must confirm
the question asked and enter the PIN recorded during the Bluetooth
registration procedure. When connected the main dialog’s status field
will display the signal strength and battery status.

All future connections should now be built automatically as soon as

both devices are connected. With Bluetooth connections it is often
necessary to re-enter and confirm the PIN on your mobile ‘phone.

12.3.1 The settings dialog

The settings dialog contains the following elements to select the
desired partner profile and appropriate functions.
- The “Partner profile” list: move to the right or left to select the
desired profile. The names of the individual mobile ‘phone profiles will
be displayed.
- “Set to foreground if call”: when receiving a call the main mobile
‘phone dialog will appear and its information field will display the name
of the caller.
- “Identify caller from address book”: the caller’s number will not be
displayed but the name of the caller will if his number has been
included in the contact’s entry
- “Quickly/medium/intensive”: this refers to the speed with which the
name of the caller will be retrieved from the contact information.

In the settings dialog, press S3 once briefly or press the Alt key to open
a command menu where these elements can also be selected.

12.3.2 Connection problems

When connected, if Pronto switches to standby mode (S4) the
connection will be lost and will remain lost when Pronto is woken up.
An appropriate message will appear in the status field. Using the “Set
Connection” button should normally re-establish the connection.

With a Bluetooth connection, if both devices are moved too far apart
the connection will be lost and an appropriate message will be
displayed in the Status field. When both devices are brought back
together and there is no automatic reconnection, the connection must
be re-established. This can usually be done with the
“Connect/disconnect” button.
 If this does not work the connection must be re-established with the
Settings dialog.

12.4 Making a call (telephoning)

When receiving a call the Information field in the main dialog will
display either the number or the message “Call”. Depending on how
the buttons have been set up in the Settings dialog, the name of the
caller can also be displayed.
To accept a call, press B8 or “Control+Return”.
To end a call or hang up, press B7 or Delete.

To make a call, proceed as follows:

1. Open the mobile phone application.
2. In the main view select “Call”.
3. Type the number in the edit box, or select the number from the
number list by moving to the right or left.
4. Confirm “Call”.
5. You will be taken back to the main view and the Information field will
display the number called.

12.4.1 The call dialog

The dialog contains the following elements:
- “Telephone number”: input the number here. The last number called
will be displayed and can be overwritten. The dialling code must be
separated from the rest with a minus sign (-).
- “Phone number selection”: a list will open containing the last
numbers dialled. Move to the right or left to the desired number and
confirm “OK”.
- “Call”: this will dial the number – Pronto will read out the number and
display it in the Information field.

In the Call dialog, press S3 once briefly or the Alt key to open a
command menu where these options can also be selected.

12.5 Write and send an SMS

1. Open the mobile phone application.
2. in the main view select “Send SMS”.
3. Write your text in the edit box.
4. In the field below, the number of characters typed will be given, so
that you can keep track of the length of the text.
5. To send, press “Send”.
6. A new dialog will open. As with making a call, type the number in
the edit box, or select it from the list below. The last number dialled
will be displayed.
7. Confirm “OK”.
8. The SMS will be sent.

12.5.1 The Send SMS dialog

The dialog contains the following eleements:
- “SMS text”: type your message here. The item “Delete SMS text in
field” in the corresponding command menu will delete the message.
- “Quantity characters”: this will open a dialog where the number of
characters in the message will be displayed so that you can keep track
of its length (spaces are included).
- “Send”: this opens a dialog where the desired telephone number can
be input or selected from the “Telephone number list”.

In the “Send SMS” dialog, press S3 once briefly or the Alt key to open a
command menu where these and further options can be selected.

12.6 Receive and read an SMS

Pronto can read SMS on the mobile ‘phone’s SIM Card. Once read, most
mobile ‘phones will display these SMS as “read”. Unfortunately, mobile
‘phones with the Symbian operating system do not support this facility.
1. Open the mobile phone application.
2. Select “Read SMS”. If you are already in the “Read SMS” dialog,
open the command menu by pressing S3 once briefly or the Alt key,
and select “New SMS read in”.
3. A dialog will open at a “Telephone number” list. Move to the right or
left to access the numbers of existing SMS. For the selected SMS, the
following field will display the text, and the field after, its date and
time.
4. In the “Display options” list select whether or not all SMS on the
mobile ‘phone are to be displayed or read.
5. To delete the displayed SMS from the mobile ‘phone’s memory,
select “Delete SMS”.
6. Confirm “Cancel to return to the main view.

If you need to reply to the SMS quickly, edit your message text, select
“Send” and then “OK”.

12.6.1 The Read SMS dialog

The dialog contains the following elements:
- “Telephone number”: this list displays the telephone number of the
SMS already read. If several have been read, an individual SMS can be
selected by moving to the left or right. The SMS are sorted by date. If
there are any transmission errors, an error message will be displayed.
- “SMS text”: the text of the selected SMS will be displayed here.
- “Date”: the date and time of the selected SMS will be displayed.
- “Display options” list: determine here which and how many
previously read SMS are to be displayed.
“All incoming SMS” allows all messages on the mobile ‘phone to be
accessed.
“Only Read SMS” accesses previously read and stored SMS.
“Only Unread SMS” accesses new messages only.
- “All memory cells”: use this option to select storage cells on the
mobile ‘phone which have been filled with SMS text and SMS file
information, so that they can be deleted.
- “Delete”: deletes the selected SMS from the mobile ‘phone.
- “Send”: this opens the “Send SMS” dialog to answer an SMS.

In the Read SMS dialog press S3 once briefly or the Alt key to open a
command menu where these and further options can also be accessed.
The following options are also available:
- “New SMS Read in”: to read a new SMS without having to go back to
the main dialog
(“cancel reading”: during normal reading of SMS this has no effect. If a
specific change has been made to one of the internal program files and
a command for the individual reading of SMS has been introduced, this
command will interrupt the reading).
13. Settings
In the Pronto menu the “Settings” entry and its submenus allow
individual settings to be made for audio, Braille, ports, mobile ‘phones,
and energy management, and allow the compass, barometer and
altimeter to be calibrated. Outlook files can be saved and loaded, the
date and time adjusted, the presentation of menus adjusted and
orientation commands (Where am I?, latest messages) accessed.

The Settings menu can be opened directly from any application with
the shortcut “s+B7B8B9” or “Windows key+s”.

13.1 Audio and speech output

The “Audio and speech” entry and its submenus allow a system and/or
reading voice to be selected and their parameters to be adjusted
individually (volume, speed, pitch), the device tone to be adjusted, and
the speech output parameters for Automatic help to be set.

Here you will also find the commands for reading out recent messages,
for opening the message list containing the last 10 messages, and for
the “Where am I?” function. The key combinations for these three
functions can be used from any Pronto application and the messages
will be read out.

13.1.1 System voice

The system voice reads out all system messages, menu entries and
dialog headings.
In the Pronto menu select “Audio and speech output/System voice” to
open a dialog. This dialog allows a voice to be selected and its
parameters to be adjusted individually (volume, speed, pitch).

NB:
The volume selected (from 0 to 100%) is linked to the device volume.
This means that the perceptible volume of the system voice is made
up from the settings for the device volume and the settings in the
system voice dialog. i.e. the system voice volume is linked to the
device volume.

Example: the device volume has been set to a medium value and the
system voice volume has been set at 100%. The device volume will
now be increased to the maximum value (100%). The system voice will
now also be louder; to reduce it to its previous value, change the value
in the system voice dialog from 100% to 50%, for example.
13.1.2 Reading voice
The reading voice reads out all texts in documents.
In the Pronto menu select “Audio and speech output/Reading voice” to
open a dialog.
This dialog allows a voice to be selected (German/English) and its
parameters to be adjusted individually (volume, speed, pitch).
When a voice is selected the appropriate (internal) pronunciation
dictionary will be loaded. If a Braille display is connected, different
Braille tables for different languages can be selected as “Alternative
Braille table” (Pronto menu/Settings/Braille).

NB: the speed selected for continuous reading is independent of the

value selected here (see Chapter 5.2).

NB:
The volume selected (from 0 to 100%) is linked to the device volume.
This means that the perceptible volume of the reading voice is made
up from the settings for the device volume and the settings in the
reading voice dialog. i.e. the reading voice volume is linked to the
device volume (cf. the system voice).

13.1.3 Device volume

The device volume governs the general volume for all acoustic output:
signals, mp3 player, Daisy Reader, Dictaphone, and speech output.
The volume for the speech output of the system and reading voices
can be set individually at any time.

On Pronto 40 and Pronto QS:

The device volume can be adjusted with the slider on the left-hand side
of the device. Move it forwards (towards the user) to reduce the
volume, and backwards (away from the user) to increase it.

On Pronto 18:
In the Pronto menu, select Audio and Speech>master volume to open
a dialog containing an edit box with the current value. A value between
0 and 100 can be input directly here; alternatively, move to the right or
left to change the value by 10 at a time.
The shortcut S4+BX can also be used to set the device master volume,
where BX = B1 to B8. S4+B3B7 will execute quieter values, and
S4+B6B8 louder values.

Note:
Working with a maximum value can damage the internal loadspeaker.
It is recommended to attach and use headphones or external active
loadspeakers when working permanently with a value more than 75 %.

13.1.4 Equalizer
In the Pronto menu select “Audio and Speech/Equalizer” to open a
dialog where the individual tone settings can be adjusted. Values
between 0 and 3 can be input into the “Bass” and “Treble” edit boxes,
or the Navistick (not the arrow keys) moved to the right or left to select
the desired values.
The tone values amended here affect all the device’s audio signals.
Note: values greater 0 may damage the internal loadspeaker, so it is
recommended to use this settings only when headphones or an
external loadspeaker ist attached.

13.1.5 Automatic help

Automatic help is the quick help read out automatically when you go to
an entry within a menu. The quick help is read out by the system voice
according to the element’s description. To distinguish clearly between
both messages (element description and quick help) the pitch of the
quick help should be set separately. There is usually a 10-point
difference between the pitch of the Automatic help and the pitch set.
If, for example, the pitch of the system voice is set at 45, the
Automatic help will be spoken at 55. The delay in milliseconds after
which the Automatic help is spoken can also be set.
If Automatic help is not required it can be switched off.

In the Pronto menu select “Audio and speech/Automatic help” to open

its dialog. The “Automatic help” dialog allows the automatic spoken
help to be switched on or off, and managed.
In the “Pitch” edit box input a value for the difference in pitch from the
normal system voice: a value of “0” means that both pitches have the
same value; a value greater than zero (e.g. 10) means that the pitch
for the Automatic help is higher, and a value less than zero (e.g. -10)
means that is lower.
In the “Delay” edit box input a value in milliseconds to determine the
time delay before the Automatic help should be spoken.

13.1.6 Last message

The “Last message” function recalls the latest message read out by
the speech output. The shortcut “#+B7B8B9” or “Windows key+#”
can be used in any application, menu or dialog to have the message
repeated.
In the Pronto menu go to “Audio and speech/Last message”.

13.1.7 Message list

The “Message list” function opens a dialog containing the last ten
spoken messages. The latest message is on the left at the beginning of
the list. Move to the right or left to access the previous messages, or to
go back to the beginning of the list for the latest message. Close the
dialog with “OK”.
The shortcut “++B7B8B9” or “Windows key+Plus” can be used in any
application, menu and dialog to open the list with the last ten spoken
messages.
In the Pronto menu go to “Audio and speech/Message list”.

NB: on a connected Braille display the spoken messages will appear

exactly as they are spoken.

13.1.8 Where am I?
The “Where am I?” function repeats the message about your current
position, or tells you which application you are currently using.
The shortcut “-+B7B8B9” or “Windows key+Minus” can be used in any
application, menu or dialog to read out the respective message as an
orientation guide.
To access this function, in the Pronto menu go to “Audio and
speech/Where am I”.

13.2 Braille
NB: the functions of this entry will work on Pronto 18, Pronto QS or if a
Braille display is connected to Pronto QS.

The “Braille” entry and its submenus allow you to change the way
Braille is displayed (left/right margins, dragged/jumped Braille display),
the shape of the cursor separately in Write and Read mode, and the
standard and alternative Braille input and output tables which can also
be loaded here.

13.2.1 Presentation
The “Presentation” option allows a left and/or right margin to be
defined and set, and allows you to determine whether the Braille
display should be dragged or should jump when the left and right
margins are reached.
These settings are valid both when editing texts in the word processor
and in edit boxes. When reading (scrolling) with D2 or D5 these
settings do not work.

NB:
The settings made in this dialog do not work in the word processor if
continuous reading has been activated, or when the “Show whole
word” function in “Tools/Braille” in the word processor has been
activated.

Left/right margin:
Margin settings can be useful when inputting and proofreading texts.
Example: set the left and right margins to 3 characters. When you
reach a word at the end or the beginning of a line by moving the
cursor, the appearance of the Braille display changes and you will also
see the two characters in front or after the character under the cursor.
Be aware that when editing a text the Braille display behaves
differently when the set margins are reached according to the “Line
jump” function. If the “Line jump” function is activated, when the
Braille line reaches the left or right margin it will jump one Braille line
to the right or left with the cursor being positioned on the Braille
display according to the margin setting. If “Line jump” is deactivated
the Braille line will be dragged character-by-character to the right or
left when the left or right margin is reached with the cursor remaining
at the position defined by the margin setting.
Input your desired value for the margin setting in the appropriate field
in the dialog.

Line jump/drag:
The “jump” function means that when the Braille display reaches the
left or right margin it jumps one Braille line to the left or right, with the
cursor being positioned on the Braille display according to the settings
for the left and right margin (with a margin setting of “0” it is
positioned on the first or last character).
When line jumping is deactivated, the “drag” function comes into play.
When the Braille display reaches the left or right margins it is dragged
character-by-character to the left or right with the cursor remaining on
the left- or right-defined margin (the script wanders over the line).
Activate or deactivate the appropriate control field in the dialog
according to preference.

13.2.2 Cursor
The “Cursor” entry allows the appearance of the cursor to be set
separately for Write mode and Read mode, and allows the inverted
presentation to be selected.
The cursor can be displayed as a flashing cursor with an adjustable
blink rate.
In the Pronto menu select “Settings/Braille/Cursor/Reading mode” to
select cursor settings for Read mode. This cursor form will only be
displayed when reading write-protected documents. With standard
settings the cursor will display as a flashing Dot B8.

In the Pronto menu select Settings/Braille/Cursor/Edit mode if the

settings for the cursor are to be valid for Edit mode; this cursor form
will be displayed when both writing and editing documents, and in edit
boxes. With standard settings it will display as dots B7B8.

To set the cursor shape, enter the digits of the Braille dots in the edit
box which are to constitute the cursor, e.g. 123456 for the full 6-dot
form.
With an incorrect or invalid entry the cursor shape will default to the
standard form (B8 in Reading mode, B7B8 in Edit mode).

An inverted cursor form reverses the usual display, i.e. when the cursor
is placed on a character the pins in the Braille module which usually
stick out will be retracted and the unused ones will be accessible.

Of note is the interaction between this inverted display and the way
the cursor flashes, in that it changes between the normal view and the
inverted view of the character underneath the cursor.
Example: the cursor is the full 8-dot form (B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8) with
active inversion. When the cursor is now placed on a letter I (dots
B2B4), these dots are not set but the others are (dots B1B3B5B6B7B8).

To have the cursor flash, select the appropriate check box. When this
box is checked, an edit box appears in the dialog where the flash rate
in milliseconds can be input. Enter a value between 200 and 2000 to
establish the flash speed (the interval between flashes).

13.2.3 Standard Braille tables

To input Braille on the Braille keyboard and for Braille output on the
Braille display, Braille tables are set up. These tables define which
Braille dots are to be used to display a character in Braille or encoding
a Braille character into unicode (Normal letters). The available 8 dots
provide only 256 combinations, i.e. of more than 65000 characters that
could be printed defined on your PC in UNICODE, only 256 can be
assigned. This means that in different languages Braille forms are
assigned to other characters or letters.

The Europa.b2u input table interprets the Braille forms input on the
Braille keyboard (for German-European Braille) and writes the assigned
UNICODE symbol. The Europa.u2b table interprets the UNICODE for the
character encoding and displays the assigned Braille form on the
Braille display (German-European Braille).
English/American Computer Braille has other assignments which can
be found in the US.b2u and US.u2b Braille tables.

In the Pronto menu select Settings/Braille/Standard Braille tables to

open the dialog. The list contains the current input tables (US.b2u resp.
Europa.b2u) and output tables (US.u2b resp. Europa.u2b) for everyday
working with German-European resp. english-american computer
Braille.

13.2.4 Alternative Braille tables

In addition to the standard tables, other tables can be set up and
assigned in Pronto as alternative Braille tables, thus allowing you to
switch quickly between different input and output tables. When editing
documents of a different language it can be useful not only to switch
languages (Pronto menu/Audio and speech/Reading voice) but to
switch to the corresponding input and output tables (b2u and u2b) too.

In the Pronto menu select Settings/Braille/Alternative Braille tables to

open a dialog. The list contains the current input and output tables
which can be used in Pronto as quickly changeable Braille tables (i.e.
US.b2u and US.u2b for English-American computer Braille).

NB: the input and output tables can be set up independently, thus
making it possible to learn the symbols from other Braille tables (learn
mode), e.g. input table Europa.b2u (German computer Braille), output
table US.u2b (English-American computer Braille).

13.2.5 Loading the alternative/standard Braille tables

If you have assigned different tables as standard and alternative tables
you can quickly switch between them.
In the Pronto menu select either Settings/Braille/Use alternative Braille
table, or Settings/Braille/Use standard table – the title of the entry
changes depending on the Braille table you are currently using.
The shortcut “=+B7B8B9” or “Windows key+Return” will also load the
other Braille table.

13.2.6 Hide / Display Braille dots 7 and 8

Use this entry to switch between the various Braille displays. The entry
caption will switch between both selected settings (Toggle).
If “Hide” is selected, Braille dots 7 and 8 will not be displayed in all text
displays on the Braille display. Computer Braille characters which
contain dots 7 and 8 will thus not be reproduced correctly.
If “Display” is selected, Braille dots 7 and 8 will be displayed in all text
displays on the Braille display so that Computer Braille will be
reproduced correctly.

13.3 Keyboard
In the Pronto menu the entry Settings/Keyboard opens a dialog where
the QWERTY keyboard can be switched to Braille mode, the standard
assignment of keys B7 and B8 for inputting text can be determined,
and the double stroke function set. Independently of the keyboard
mode you can determine how the keyboard echo should react when
writing and deleting. You can decide whether or not a tone should be
output when the Caps Lock key is pressed or if the repeat key function
should be activated.

fThe “B7 is backspace” option means that when B7 is pressed in the

word processor or in an edit box, the character to the left of the cursor
will be deleted. To input Braille dot B7 on its own as a character, this
check box must be deactivated. It is activated as the default setting.

The “B8 is carriage return” option means that when B8 is pressed on

the cursor in the word processor, a line break will be inserted (new
line). To input Braille dot B8 on its own as a character, this check box
must be deactivated. It is activated as the default setting.

The “Double stroke” check box activates or deactivates the double

stroke function. When typing, a space will automatically be inserted at
the end of a word by pressing the space bar (B0) together with the last
character input.

The “Caps Lock beep” check box determines whether or not a tone is
to be emitted when the Caps Lock key is pressed on the QWERTY
keyboard.

The “Keyboard echo” list determines how the keyboard echo should
react when typing in the word processor or in edit boxes. The selected
setting determines if and what the speech output should announce
when a character or word is input.

The “Delete echo” list determines which message should be output

when a character is deleted in the word processor or in edit boxes (e.g.
by pressing B7).
The “Autorepeat function for Navistick and QWERT keyboard” check
box provides an automatic repeat function when the Navistick or a key
on the QWERTY keyboard is held down. When this is checked further
edit boxes appear in the dialog for the initial delay and repeat rate.
(number of strokes per second).

The “Use QWERT keyboard in Braille mode” check box can be used to
determine whether or not the Pronto QS or Pronto 40 QWERT keyboard
should be switched to 8-dot Braille. When activated the key
assignment is as follows: a=B7, s=B3, d=B2, f=B1, j=B4, k=B5, l=B6,
semicolon=B8, left space bar=B9, right space bar=B0. The shortcut
FN+b can also be used to switch between both input modes.

13.4 Date and time

The Pronto menu/Settings/Date and time entry opens a dialog where
the date, local time and time zone can be set in Pronto.

The values input can be called up by pressing S4 (once briefly for the
time, and twice briefly for the date).

Type the date (MM.DD.YYYY) or time (HH:MM or HH.MM.SS) in the edit

boxes. Letters cannot be entered and will be ignored.

The difference from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) can be determined

by selecting the appropriate entry in the list. The various entries can
be accessed by moving to the right or left.

NB: if a different time zone is selected this will have a knock-on effect
on the start and end times of your appointments.

13.5 Interfaces
The “interfaces” entry and its submenus allow Bluetooth to be
switched on and off, Bluetooth devices in range to be located,
Bluetooth registration (partnerships) to be set up and selected, and
connection properties for external Braille displays to be set.

13.5.1 Bluetooth
The Pronto menu/Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth entry opens a dialog to
activate/deactivate Pronto’s integrated Bluetooth transmitter and to
search for active Bluetooth devices that are in range. Any devices
found can also be registered (a partnership or pairing established).
Bluetooth devices already registered will be listed and can be selected
so that they can be used with other applications (mobile ‘phone,
external Braille display).

Registration is important for connecting other devices with Bluetooth.

Only after registering, during which process the connection data for
this partnership will be saved, can Pronto work together with other
Bluetooth devices (pairing).

The dialog contains the following elements:

- “Bluetooth” check box. Select to switch Bluetooth on (the main
Bluetooth switch is then activated)
- “Registered Bluetooth devices” list. This displays the user name if a
previously registered Bluetooth device has been found in range (10m).
- “Add” button. This button launches a search for non-registered,
active Bluetooth devices. A further dialog will open which lists the
devices found and facilitates their registration.
- “Remove” button. This button allows the registration of a previously
registered Bluetooth device to be deleted. In the “Registered Bluetooth
devices” list select the relevant user name, select the “Remove”
button and answer the security question. This Bluetooth device will
now be regarded as a non-registered device.
- “Properties” button. This opens a dialog to examine the registration
data and to edit them where necessary. A description of the Bluetooth
device will be given as well as the user name and PIN.

13.5.1.1 Activate/deactivate Bluetooth

To switch Bluetooth on or off, select Pronto
menu/Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth and activate or deactivate the
“Bluetooth” check box.

Switching Bluetooth on or off in this dialog has a knock-on effect on all

the Pronto applications that use Bluetooth (mobile ‘phone, Pronto as a
Braille display, an external Braille display).

Take care when activating or deactivating Bluetooth, that the relevant

Bluetooth connection has been started or ended in the appropriate
application.

Bluetooth is not activated after a system reset – the check box must
first be selected so that Bluetooth is available for use with Pronto’s
applications.

NB: The Bluetooth chip can sometimes react slowly if conditions

change. If the check box activate/deactivate is pressed too quickly in
succession and Pronto is then immediately shut down (S4), when the
interfaces dialog is accessed again the actual status may not be given.

13.5.1.2 Registration of Bluetooth devices

To search for and register Bluetooth devices that are in range of
Pronto, proceed as follows:

1. Activate Bluetooth in Pronto – go to Pronto

menu/Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth and select “Bluetooth”.
2. Select the “Add” button. Pronto will now search for active Bluetooth
devices in range; this takes 5-10 seconds. The names of any devices
found will be displayed in a list in the dialog. Move to the right or left to
the desired device to start the registration procedure. If the Bluetooth
device was not switched on or was out of range and you want to
restart the search, select the “Refresh” button.
3. Click on “Select” in the dialog. The registration dialog will now open
and will display the names of the Bluetooth devices. Type a user name
in the edit box. The Bluetooth device will be internally assigned under
this name, e.g. in the connection settings. In the next edit box type
your PIN. This four-figure number will be exchanged between both
Bluetooth devices during connection (pairing) e.g. 1234 for connection
as Braille Display.
4. Select “OK” to end the registration process.

You will now be taken back to the first dialog where the user name for
the new device will appear in a list headed “Registered Bluetooth
devices”. To consult or edit the registration data, select “Properties”.
To delete the registration select “Remove”.

13.5.2 External Braille display

The entry Pronto menu/Settings/Interfaces/External Braille display
opens a dialog where an external Braille display can be connected to
Pronto. The dialog contains elements to start/stop the connection and
to set up the connection type (serial or Bluetooth).

The dialog contains the following elements:

- “External Braille display on”: select this check box to transfer
information from Pronto to the selected Braille display.
- “Profile External Braille display”: this list contains the profile name if
a connection to an external Braille display has already been
established.
- “Add”: this button can be used to set up a new profile for a further
external Braille display. Another dialog will open where the new profile
name, Braille display type, and connection type can be set. If Bluetooth
is the selected connection type the user names for all registered
Bluetooth devices will be displayed in a list so that the desired Braille
display can be selected.
- “Remove”: this button is used to delete the connection profile for the
selected Braille display. In the “Registered Bluetooth devices” list
select the relevant profile name, select the “Remove” button and
answer the security question.
- “Properties”: this button will open a dialog where profile data can be
consulted and edited as required. It will display the profile name, the
type of Braille display, the type of connection, and, where Bluetooth
has been selected as the connection type, the user name for the
selected Bluetooth device.

13.5.2.1 Connecting via Bluetooth

To set up a profile for the connection of an external Braille display via
Bluetooth, or to start/stop the transfer of Pronto data to the Braille
display, proceed as follows:

1. Activate the exchange of data to the external Braille display: select

the relevant check box in Pronto menu/Settings/Interfaces/External
Braille display, and close the dialog with “OK”. If a profile for an
external Braille display already exists, its profile name will be displayed
in the list. Pronto data will then be transferred to the selected Braille
display.
2. If no profile exists for the external Braille display or you wish to
establish a profile for the connection of another external Braille
display, select “Add”.
3. Another dialog will open. In the edit box type the profile name for
the desired Braille display connection.
4. The Braille display type “Vario” has already been defined and can be
used to connect all Baum Vario Braille displays.
5. From the “Connection type” list select “Bluetooth”.
6. From the “Registered Bluetooth devices” list select the desired
Braille display.
This list displays all devices for which a partnership has been
established in Pronto, along with the user name assigned at
registration. If you cannot find the desired Braille display in the list you
must first register it – Pronto menu/Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth.
7. Confirm by selecting “OK”.
8. You will be taken back to the first dialog, and the “Profile names of
external Braille displays” list will now contain the profile name of your
Braille display. To consult or amend profile data, select “Properties”. To
delete the profile created, select “Remove”.
13.5.2.2 Connecting with a serial cable
To set up a profile for the serial connection of an external Braille
display, or to start/stop the transfer of Pronto data to the Braille
display, proceed as follows:

1. Connect Pronto and the desired Braille display with the serial cable.
To connect SuperVario or Vario40 Braille displays, an appropriate
optional adapter cable will be required.
2. Activate the exchange of data to the external Braille display: select
the relevant check box in Pronto menu/Settings/Interfaces/External
Braille display, and close the dialog with “OK”. If a profile for an
external Braille display already exists, its profile name will be displayed
in the list. Pronto data will then be transferred to the selected Braille
display.
3. If no profile exists for the external Braille display or you wish to
establish a profile for connecting another external Braille display,
select “Add”.
4. Another dialog will open. In the edit box type the profile name for
the desired Braille display connection.
5. The Braille display type “Vario” has already been defined and can be
used to connect all Baum Vario Braille displays.
6. From the “Connection type” list select “Serial”.
7. Confirm by selecting “OK”.
8. You will be taken back to the first dialog, and the “Profile names of
external Braille displays” list will now contain the profile name of your
Braille display. To consult or amend profile data, select “Properties”. To
delete the profile created, select “Remove”.

13.6 Power Supply

The “Power” entry allows the automatic shutdown time of the device to
be set, and information on the battery status to be consulted.

13.6.1 Automatic shutdown

With “Autosuspend” Pronto shuts down automatically (suspends) after
a predetermined length of inactivity, i.e. if no keys have been pressed.
A 10-minute delay has been set and activated as default.
In the Pronto menu select “Settings/Power/Autosuspend” to open a
dialog. This dialog allows the automatic shutdown to be switched on or
off, and the time delay to be set; it also allows a warning signal to be
emitted just before shutdown.

Select “Autosuspend after” to activate the automatic shutdown and

input the time delay. Values of less than five minutes will not be
accepted and will be automatically set to five minutes, i.e. Pronto will
remain switched on for at least five minutes after the last action is
performed. A warning signal consisting of several short notes will be
given just before shutdown, as long as the corresponding check box
has been activated in the dialog.

Exceptions:
Autosuspend will be ignored if the following functions are active:
- playing a file in the mp3 player
- playing a Daisy book in the Daisy reader
- playing a recording from the Voice Recorder (Dictaphone)
- when continuous reading is activated in the word processor
- when the stopwatch is recording in the foreground
- with a live ActiveSync connection with the PC
- with an active GPRS Bluetooth connection
- with an active Internet connection.
- during a connection in the Braille display application (NB:
Autosuspend will only come into effect if the “stop” option has been
selected)

13.6.2 The battery

To access information on the battery status, select
“Settings/Power/Battery” from the Pronto menu.
In Read-only fields the dialog gives the charge remaining of the
battery, the battery capacity and voltage, and for service reasons
provides protocols for the charging and discharging cycles.

The charge remaining is given in mAh; the value drops when in use
and rises when being charged. The difference between charge
remaining and capacity is used to calculate the current battery status
in percentage terms (press S3 twice to consult this value..

The capacity is given in mAh, and provides information on the battery

capacity. It is not a constant value as the capacity changes according
to temperature and the age of the battery.

The charge is given in volts.

The “Write protocol file” checkbox allows the behaviour of the battery
to be followed during the charging and discharging cycles, and allows
the file to be written to the storage card as an “acculog.txt” file. It
should only be activated when consulting BAUM technicians on
servicing issues.
13.7 Outlook databases
In the Pronto menu the entry “Settings/Outlook databases” opens a
dialog where important settings can be made both to save
appointment and contact files in Pronto and to ensure problem-free
synchronisation with the Outlook files on the PC.

Which settings and buttons are right for you depends on whether:
1. you always maintain your contacts and appointments on the PC and
use Pronto when travelling to access the current versions (PDA mode).
In this case the database file, databases.pdb vor contacts and
DatabaseAppointmen.xml for planner data, should not (automatically)
be saved to Pronto (Flashdisk/User) or to the Storage Card, or loaded
from either place. Pronto always then accesses contacts and
appointments by synchronising with Outlook on your computer. For
smooth synchronisation, addresses and appointments may have to be
deleted beforehand from Pronto’s RAM.

2. you input, amend and manage your appointments and contacts only
on Pronto and carry out no kind of synchronisation (Pronto mode). In
this case the database files, databases.pdb and
DatabaseAppointments.xml, must be saved to Pronto’s memory
(Flashdisk/User) or storage card;

Pronto mode is set by default and when switched off with S4, contact,
planner and appointment files are saved to the storage card.

The following elements are available in the dialog:

- “Backup databases to storage card”:
this option will save contact and appointment data from the RAM as
database files on the storage card. This is a safety measure and helps
prevent data loss. Following a faulty synchronisation or any loss of
data it is thus possible to access the previously saved version of the
files.

- “Load backup from storage card”

If the database files, databases.pdb and DatabaseAppointments.xml,
have previously been saved to the storage card, this option will load
the file to the RAM. This means that an old file can be accessed and
the last saved file can be reloaded in the event of any loss of data.
NB: when loading, Pronto must not be connected to the PC

- “Backup databases to the Flashdisk”:

This option will save contact and appointment data from the RAM as
database files to the internal Pronto memory (Flashdisk/USER). This is
a means of saving data for all users who store their data only on Pronto
and do not synchronise Outlook files with their PC.

- “Load backup from the Flashdisk”:

This option will load and display the database files databases.pdb and
DatabaseAppointments.xml from the internal Pronto memory
“Flashdisk/User” to the RAM. To use this option effectively the option
“Automatically save when switched off” must be selected, or the data
must be saved regularly with the “Save databases to Flashdisk” option.
NB: when loading, Pronto must not be connected to the PC.

- “Clear current database”

This option deletes all appointment calendar and contacts data from
the RAM, i.e. no entries remain after deletion. This can be useful when
synchronising Outlook files with your PC afresh. An (automatically)
saved databases.pdb and DatabaseAppointmets.xml database files in
Flashdisk/USER or on the storage card will not be deleted; They can
only be deleted in File manager.

Please note:
- when deleting, Pronto must not be connected to the PC with
ActiveSync
- any full partnership will be disrupted, i.e. a new partnership must be
set up afterwards with the individual synchronizing settings
- depending on the amount of data, deletion can take several minutes,
during which Pronto seems to be doing nothing. Do not switch Pronto
off during this time.

- “Automatically save when switched off”:

This check box is activated by default. Data from the appointments
calendar and contacts will automatically be saved from the RAM either
to the root directory on the storage card or to Pronto’s internal
memory (Flashdisk/USER) when amendments are made in Contacts or
the Calendar, and Pronto is sent into Stand-by mode. Any previous
database files will thus be overwritten.
If this option is selected and Pronto is sent into Stand-by mode with S4,
you will receive a message regarding the saving of data before Pronto
switches off.
This is important for all users who keep their data only on Pronto, and
who do not synchronise Outlook files with the PC (Pronto mode).
Those who use Pronto in PDA mode and thus keep contacts and
appointments exclusively in Outlook on the PC, must deactivate this
option.

Only when “Automatically save when switched off” has been selected
will the following options become available in the dialog.
- “Save to storage card”
This is selected by default so that appointments calendar and contacts
data are saved from the RAM to the root directory on the Storage card
when Pronto is witched off (into Stand-by mode with S4).
If it is not selected, contact and appointment data will be saved to
Pronto’s internal memory (Flashdisk/USER) when Pronto isswitched off.
Any previous database files will thus be overwritten.
To save space in the internal memory (Flashdisk) it is advisable to save
contact and appointment data to the external storage card. Please
make sure that you always use the same card – if you work with
different cards you may soon lose track of which card has the most up-
to-date data.
NB: the “Save to storage card” option is only available when
“Automatically save when switched off” has been selected.

- “Automatically reload on reboot”

This is selected by default. Following a system reset the last saved
database files will be loaded from the storage card’s root directory or
from Pronto’s internal memory (Flashdisk/USER).

Make sure that if you activate the “Automatically reload on reboot”

check box, the calendar and contact data are loaded from the
database files in the RAM, whose save location is linked to the “Backup
to storage card” option, i.e. if you have determined that it should be
saved to the storage card, the appropriate database files will be loaded
from the storage card. If, however, you have stipulated that it should
be saved to the Flashdisk, the database files will be loaded from the
“User” folder on the Flashdisk. If no database files can be found in
these places, perhaps because either no or a different card has been
inserted, you will receive a warning message when you open Contacts.
If “Automatically reload on reboot” has been deactivated you can load
the database files manually from the appropriate save location with
“Load databases from storage card” or “Load databases from
Flashdisk”.

Please note:
“Automatically reload on reboot” is only available if “Automatically
save when switched off” has been activated. If you manage your files
on the PC with Outlook, both these check boxes should be deactivated,
otherwise the old data on Pronto may change the new Outlook entries
on your PC during synchronisation.

13.8 Mobile ‘phone settings

This entry and its submenus allows various mobile ‘phone profiles to
be set up for the connection of a mobile ‘phone to the mobile ‘phone
application, and to establish settings for a GPRS connection.

13.8.1 Mobile ‘phone profiles

The “Pronto menu/Settings/Mobile ‘phone settings/Mobile ‘phone
profiles” option opens a dialog where one or more individual profiles
for connecting one or more mobile ‘phones can be set up.
The dialog contains several lists and edit boxes.
Within the dialog pressing S3 briefly or the Alt key will open a
command menu from which some of the functions can be executed.
By setting up partner profiles, certain settings will be saved. In the
mobile ‘phone application you just select the appropriate profile in
“Settings”.

Please note that before setting up a partner profile, the relevant

mobile telephone must be registered. To register it, go to “Pronto
menu/Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth” (see Chapter 13.5).

13.8.1.1 General elements of the partner profile dialog

- “Partner profile” list
Select a profile to amend its value and settings.
- “Name” edit box
Enter an individual name to the profile which can then be used to
select the profile in the mobile ‘phone application.
- “Phone model list”
Some models are predefined. If your ‘phone is not here select
“Standard”.
- “SMS mode” list
The coding of the SMS to be sent will be set here. The standard coding
is “PDU 7 BIT”; “PDU 8 BIT” is rarely used.
With “PDU UNICODE” for Arabic, only half the usual number of
characters can be input into the text.
- “Port” list
Here either “Bluetooth” or “Serial” can be selected; the appropriate
options required for each type of connection will then be made
available.

13.8.1.2 Dialog elements for a Bluetooth connection

- “Registered devices”
This list shows the user names for all registered active Bluetooth
devices within range. Select the desired mobile ‘phone by selecting the
appropriate relevant user name.
- “Channel choice” list
Select “automatic” or “manual” to determine which communication
channel is used for data transfer. Selecting “manual” will open an edit
box to enter the desired channel .

Then open the mobile ‘phone application (Pronto menu/Mobile ‘phone),

select the relevant partner profile in “Settings” and launch the
connection. The PIN (e.g. 1111) you will have defined in the “PIN” field
during registration must be input on the mobile ‘phone.

13.8.1.3 Dialog elements for a serial connection

Options for data transmission:
- “Baud rate”: standard 9600 (recommended setting 19200)
- “Data bits”: standard 8
- “Parity”: standard no parity
- “Stop bits”: standard 1

Connect both devices with the optional adapter cable. Open the mobile
‘phone application (Pronto menu/Mobile ‘phone), select the relevant
partner profile in “Settings” and launch the connection.

13.8.2 The GPRS application

The GPRS option opens a dialog where a connection profile for RAS
connections for a registered Bluetooth mobile ‘phone can be set and
launched.
GPRS stands for General Packet Radio Service and allows data from the
Internet to be accessed (via a remote mobile connection through the
GSM network). As this requires use of the mobile ‘phone, your mobile
‘phone contract (provider’s tariff) must allow for such an exchange of
data.

RAS stands for Remote Access Service and governs the mobile dial-up
to connect Pronto to the RAS server as an RAS client.

Select “Settings/Mobile ‘phone settings/GPRS” to open the dialog.

When accessing this option for the first time following a reboot, the
standard RAS connection profile and any individually established
connection profiles in Pronto will be loaded. For that reason it will take
a few seconds for the dialog to open.

13.8.2.1 The options in the GPRS dialog

The GPRS dialog contains the following elements:
- a Info field “Status” which gives information on the connection status;
- a list headed “Registered Bluetooth phones” which gives the user
names of the Bluetooth devices registered in the Bluetooth dialog
(Pronto menu/Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth);
- a list headed “RAS connection” which gives the profile names of the
standard profiles (or provider names and individually established RAS
connection profiles. The access files for the standard profiles are
permanently saved in Pronto;
- a button headed “RAS connection manager” which opens a dialog
with further options to establish an individual connection, to consult
the access files of existing connection profiles, or to delete a
connection profile;
- a “Start” button which launches the RAS connection with the
selection number, user name and password which were set up in the
selected connection profile;
- a “Stop” button which ends a running RAS connection.

The RAS connection manager dialog contains the following elements:

- a list headed “RAS connection names” which offers the available
standard connection profiles and the names of individually defined
connection profiles;
- an “Add” button which opens a dialog to establish the connection
type for the desired mobile telephone and to assign a name to this new
profile;
- a “Remove” button which deletes the selected connection profile and
its saved access files for the relevant mobile telephone (the standard
connection profiles can also be removed, but they are still available
after a program reset or system reset with their standard access files);
- a “Properties” button which opens a dialog to consult the connection
data of the desired connection profile.

13.8.2.2 Establish and save a RAS connection

For TD1BT and D2 the standard connection profiles with the
corresponding required access files are pre-defined. This means that
you do not need to input or select “Telephone number”, “User name”,
“Password” or “Device” if the individual RAS connection profile is
based on the standard connection profile compatible with your
provider.

To establish an RAS connection profile for your mobile telephone,

proceed as follows:
1. First register your mobile ‘phone at “Pronto
menu/Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth”.
2. Select “Pronto menu/Settings/Mobile ‘phone settings/GPRS”.
3. The GPRS dialog will open. Go to the appropriate elements in the
dialog and proceed as follows:
4. From the “Registered Bluetooth phones” list select the mobile
telephone for which a connection is to be established (the list contains
the names assigned during registration).
5. From the “RAS connection” list select the provider with which you
have a contract for the telephone. If your provider is not in the list
select “T-D1-BT”.
6. Select “RAS connection manager”. A further dialog will open to
establish and save the individual settings for this connection profile.
7. From the “RAS connection names” list select the desired standard
connection profile (Provider) or the name of the desired individually
established connection profile.
8. Select “Add” to establish an individual connection profile in addition
to the predefined profiles, or to amend the settings of an existing
individually established profile and save it as a new profile.
9. Another dialog will open. Enter the name of the new or amended
connection profile. This name will then appear in the “RAS connection
profile” list.
10. The dial-up number *99# is valid for most RAS connections and is
already stored. The user name and password depend on the provider,
and can thus be blank.
11. From the “Device” list select “Bluetooth DUN, Modem” and close
the dialog with “OK” to save the new individual connection profile.
12. A few seconds later you will be taken back to the previous dialog
(Connection manager). The list now contains the name of the new
connection profile.
13. Close the dialog with “OK” to return to the first dialog (GPRS
application).
14. Deactivaate the key lock of your mobile phone, if necessary .
15. Select “Start” to build a connection with the new selected
connection profile (take note of questions relating to the connection
with the mobile telephone and the status information in the GPRS
dialog).
16. The mobile phone will ask for the PIN to get connected. (PIN which
is set in bluetooth device registration)
17. In the GPRS dialog the “status” field displays the messages during
the authentification prcess. When “conected” you have connection to
the server and have access to the internet.s
18. To end the connection select “stop” in teh GPRS dialog. (Pronto
menu/settings/mobile phone settings/GPRS)

13.8.2.3 Launch RAS connection

Before launching an RAS connection, make sure that:
- the mobile telephone to be used has been registered in Pronto
menu/Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth;
- an RAS connection profile has been established for the mobile
telephone (Pronto menu/Settings/Mobile telephone
settings/GPRS/Connection manager);
- Bluetooth has been activated in Pronto and the mobile telephone.

To launch an RAS connection, proceed as follows:

1. Select Pronto menu/Settings/Mobile telephone settings/GPRS.
2. The GPRS dialog will open (NB: when opening this dialog for the first
time after a reboot it may take a few seconds before all the connection
profiles are loaded).
3. In the “Registered Bluetooth telephones” list select the telephone
for which the RAS connection is to be built.
4. In the “RAS connection” list select the individually built connection
profile over which the RAS connection is to be built.
5. Now select “Start”, and when prompted input the PIN you used
when registering this telephone in Pronto.
6. Take note of the information given in the “Status” field in the GPRS
connection dialog.
7. If the connection is built successfully, the Status field will display the
word “Connected” before any other messages appear.
8. To end the connection select “Stop”.

NB:
If a connection cannot be built, it is possible that your telephone tariff
does not support this function, or that your provider does accept the
dial-up number “*99#”, but needs special access data (user name,
password) to use the service. If so, please ask your provider i.e. visit
http://www.teltarif.de/i/gprs-config.html and use the access data given
for your provider.

13.8.2.4 Consult or delete saved RAS connection profiles

All RAS connection profiles can be saved and their access data
consulted..

Proceed as follows:
1. Select “Pronto menu/Settings/Mobile telephone settings/GPRS”.
2. The GPRS dialog will open (NB: when opening this dialog for the first
time after a reboot it may take a few seconds before all the connection
profiles are loaded).
3. From the “RAS connection” list select the individually built
connection profile that you would like to delete, or whose access data
you would like to consult.
4. Select “RAS connection manager”. Another dialog will open.
5. From the “RAS connection names” list select the desired connection
profile.
6. To consult the dialog with the profile’s access data, select
“Properties” (with standard connection profiles, user names and
passwords are permanently saved internally, and cannot therefore be
input). Select “Cancel” to close the dialog and return to the previous
dialog.
7. If the profile is to be deleted, select “Remove” and confirm the
security question.

NB: a standard connection profile can be deleted, but it will still be

available and visible in the list after rebooting (program reset or
system reset).

13.9 Calibration
The “Calibration” entry and its submenus allow the compass,
barometer and altimeter to be calibrated, i.e. the compass can be re-
adjusted, the barometer can be calibrated with the optimum settings,
and the changes in altitude which affect air pressure can be viewed in
the altimeter.

13.9.1 Compass
Pronto’s inbuilt compass measures the Earth’s weak magnetic field
lines to calculate the four points of the compass. To consult the points
of the compass Pronto must lie horizontally in front of the user – then
press S3 three times briefly. Pronto’s rear side points towards the
given direction: if Pronto is aligned directly North, its rear side will face
North, its front side South, its left side West and right side East.

To determine its exact position, Pronto must be positioned perfectly

horizontally on a flat surface away from disruptive magnetic fields. If
Pronto is placed near strong magnetic fields or magnetised metal
parts, the compass reading will not be true.

As the Earth’s magnetic field varies from place to place, the compass
must be aligned before being used; it will take some internal
measurements and re-justify itself.

To align the compass, proceed as follows:

1. Go to an area free from running electrical devices (at least 1.5
metres from magnetic devices such as screens, motors, loudspeakers,
magnetised metal parts, etc).
2. Hold Pronto out horizontally in front of you or place it on a
horizontal, magnetically neutral surface which can easily be turned
around without wobbling or tilting.
3. In the Pronto menu select “Settings/Calibration/Compass”.
4. Select “Start calibration”.
5. Slowly turn Pronto horizontally and evenly in front of you for at least
ten seconds, turning it through at least 360° on its own axis, or turn
the flat surface on which it is placed.
6. Whilst Pronto is making the necessary internal measurements, a
tone will be emitted at regular intervals.
7. Select “Stop calibration” to finish the alignment.
8. The compass is now re-justified – press S3 three times briefly to
consult the corrected compass points.

NB: the compass can be re-aligned as often as you think necessary; it

is useful to know where the points of the compass are from your
current position so that you can control the outcome of the calibration.

13.9.2 Barometer
Pronto’s inbuilt barometer measures the actual air pressure and gives
the value in mbar (millibars) which is exactly the same as hPas
(hectopascals). For the changes in air pressure to have any real
meaning, the barometer should always take measurements at the
same altitude. This optimum altitude can be set in the barometer
calibration dialog. Press S1 twice briefly to consult the current air
pressure.

To calibrate the barometer and set its optimum height, proceed as

follows:
1. Find out the altitude of your current position (in relation to sea level
and, where appropriate, the floor of your building). If you do not know
this altitude the air pressure reading will only be a relative value.
2. In the Pronto menu select “Settings/Calibration/Barometer”.
3. Type the altitude of your current position in the edit box in metres
and select “OK”.

The air pressure reading is now adjusted to the altitude you have
input. All further readings are based on meteorologically-related
changes in air pressure (depressions/anticyclones) and indicate
changes in the weather.

13.9.3 Altimeter
Pronto’s altimeter calculates the altitude from air pressure readings.
This is based on the fact that air pressure drops the higher one climbs
from the Earth’s surface (in relation to sea level).
To take meaningful altitude readings or to have accurate readings read
out, when climbing mountains for example, the altitude of your current
position must be input – when taking this reading there must be no
pronounced meteorologically-related changes in air pressure (constant
pressure required).
The altitude of your current position can be input in the altimeter
calibration dialog. To consult the current altitude press S1 three times.

To calibrate the altimeter, proceed as follows:

1. Find out the altitude of your current position (in relation to sea level
and, where appropriate, the floor of your building). If you do not know
this altitude the air pressure reading will only be a relative value rather
than an absolute value.
2. In the Pronto menu select “Settings/Calibration/Altimeter”.
3. Type the altitude of your current position in the edit box in metres
and select “OK”.

NB:
Weather-related changes in air pressure can affect the altitude reading
so you should always check your current altitude before taking a
reading, and correct it where necessary (according to Faust’s formula
on the relation between air pressure and altitude, 1 mbar is roughly
equal to 8.5 metres).

13.9.4 Battery (special chapter)

The “Battery” entry relates to the corresponding component in Battery
management and is not usually available on new devices.

During servicing or following the installation of a new component, the

battery may need to be re-calibrated. If so, the “Battery” entry will
appear in “Pronto menu/Settings/Calibration”. The battery can only be
calibrated once. A battery which has already been calibrated will send
a corresponding message to the software, so that the
“Settings/Calibration/Battery” entry no longer appears in the Pronto
menu.

To calibrate the battery, proceed as follows:

1. Charge the battery fully until “Trickle charge” is announced when S3
is pressed twice briefly.
2. Connect Pronto to the power supply and leave it connected even
when the battery is fully charged.
3. Open the Pronto menu with S3 or the Windows key, and select
“Settings/Calibration/Battery”.
If the charger is not plugged in or the power supply is incorrectly
connected, you will receive the following message: “Connect power
supply”. If so, close the dialog with “OK”, check the connections and
start again.
4. A dialog will open at an info field: Ready for calibration. Select “Start
calibration”.
5. During calibration the following message will appear in the info field:
Calibrating. The dialog can be closed by selecting “OK” and you can
work with Pronto. During calibration make sure that the power supply
is not disconnected or Pronto shut down (S4).
6. When the calibration is finished, the message in the info field will
change from “Calibrating” to “Calibration complete”. If necessary, call
up the dialog in “Pronto menu/Settings/Calibration/Battery” to read this
message.
7. If the calibration is successfully completed the
“Settings/Calibration/Battery” option will disappear from the Pronto
menu as soon as a program reset or system reset is carried out after
calibration.

13.10 Presentation

13.10.1 Menu presentation

In menus the shortcuts for opening or executing the various options
are given by default. These shortcuts are also given in the context
sensitive long Help.
Depending on which Pronto device is used, the key commands are
input with the braille keys or with the standard keyboard (Qwert
keyboard).

These basic settings can be changed. If, for example, you connect an
external standard keyboard to Pronto 18, it can be useful to switch to
using the shortcuts or to use both types of shortcuts. Pronto QS,
however, can be switched to Braille mode so that Braille shortcuts can
be used and it is useful to have them announced.

In the Pronto menu select “Settings/Presentation/Menu presentation”

to open a dialog. By activating or deactivating the appropriate check
boxes, the desired shortcut regime can be set. The abbreviation
QWERT refers to a normal alphanumeric keyboard, as the Q, W, E, R,
and T keys are next to each other in the second row of keys.
14. Pronunciation Dictionary
The pronunciation dictionary is a text file. Each word and its
pronunciation appears on a separate line. The file can be edited in
Word-processor so that words can be deleted and new ones added.
The file for English voices is called “English03.dic”; it is one of the
PRONTO system files and produced in Text-only format (path:
Flashdisk, PRONTO, localize, 1033 English03.dic)

14.1 Add new words

1. In file manager make settings to show all system files. (Command
menu > View > Details)
2. In file manager open the file English03.dic and deactivate ist write
protection. (Path: Flashdisk / Pronto / Localize / 1033)
3. Add new entries at the end of the file as follows:
word=pronunciation, vertical line and Return.
Place each word on a new line, e.g.
Leeds=Leedz|
4. When saving the file make sure that it is not saved as .rtf (check
“Text Only”), and check if it still has the extention .dic.

NB: Make sure that no files are deleted from the Flashdisk, Pronto,
Localize and 1033 folders, or PRONTO will either not work properly or
not at all.
15. How to Synchronize and exchange Data
To exchange data between Pronto and the PC you have to use a
additional program, which also will rule the synchronisation between
Pronto’s planner or addressbook and Outlook.

On Windows XP / Windows 2000 the program Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5

and on Windows Vista the program Microsoft Mobile Device Center 6.1
supports synchronisation and data exchange between PC and Pronto.
If the program is not installed on your PC you must install it.

The following description concentrates on the main functions of this

program. For further details, please consult the ActiveSync resp.
Mobile Device Center help-file.

15.1 Installation of Microsoft ActiveSync resp. Mobile

Device Center
Download the current version of ActiveSync resp. Mobile Device Center
from the Microsoft homepage. You will find a download path in Part II of
this manual or use the relevant installation file from the Installation
CD.

1. To install the program on your PC, run the corresponding installation

file.
2. Confirm the following dialogs with "Continue".
3. When you are asked to connect the device, first switch on Pronto.
Now connect Pronto to the PC with the USB cable.
4. After the connection has been successfully established, a dialog
opens. Set either a full partnership or guest. Select guest end confirm
the setting.

After installation of the program, the item Microsoft ActiveSync resp.

Microsoft Mobile Device Center will appear in "Start menu/Programs".

NB: Active virus checkers and/or firewall applications can affect the
installation and result in error messages. Even the settings on
networked computers may cause problems when installing ActiveSync
resp. Mobile Device Center. If so, change the options or configurations.

15.2 Get connected

It is recomended to connect Pronto via USB.

USB is the default setting, so the connection will start automatically by

plugging in the USB cable.

15.2.1 As a Guest
This partnership is recommended when Pronto is used as an
independent organizer and is never or rarely to be connected to a
computer.

This partnership is usually problem-free and is sufficient to exchange

text files or audio files with the PC.

The guest partnership, however, does not allow addresses or

appointments to be synchronized between Pronto and the Outlook
database of the PC.

To register Pronto as a guest, proceed as follows every time Pronto is

connected to the PC:

1. Switch on Pronto, or retrieve from standby mode with S1, S2 or S3.

2. Connect one end of the USB cable to Pronto. If it was still connected
and the program does not start automatically, pull the cable aut of the
port and reconnect again. (the other end can remain connected to the
PC).
3. If ActiveSync resp. Mobile Device Center was correctly installed, you
will hear a signal after plugging in the cable.
4. On the PC the program window opens and shows the dialog to
establish a partnership, perhaps in the background. Activate it by
going to the respective button in the taskbar at the bottom of the
screen.
5. The dialog has various elements and buttons, to establish a full or
guest partnership. We recommend to establish no full partnership until
you know the basic functions of ActiveSync resp. Mobile Device Center.
6. The program opens at a window which displays status and
synchronizing information. Here you can open a menu to access
available functions and settings. Now you can exchange Data between
PC and Pronto i.e. via Windows explorer.
7. As long as the partnership is active in the background, Pronto
(Flashdisk and Storage card) can be accessed via Windows Explorer;
Pronto will appear as a “mobile device” in Explorer. You can copy,
paste or delete files and folders.

15.2.2 Full Partnership

This partnership and automatic synchronisation are recommended if
you set Pronto up as a PDA, i.e. as a portable add-on to your computer.
If a full partnership is activated, every time the PC is connected the
Pronto address and planner data will be synchronized with the
respective Outlook database, so that both “sides” have the same
current status.

Various settings for this synchronization can be selected in the

Microsoft ActiveSync Microsoft Mobile Device Center options.

Text files and mp3 files can be exchanged with the PC (as with a guest
partnership), but it is not necessarily automatic.

To establish a full partnership, proceed as follows:

1. Switch on Pronto, or retrieve from standby mode with S1, S2 or S3.

2. Connect one end of the USB cable to Pronto. If it was still connected,
but the program does not start automatically, pull the cable aut of the
port and reconnect again. (the other end can remain connected to the
PC).
3. If ActiveSync resp Mobile Device Center was correctly installed, you
will hear a signal after plugging in the cable.
4. On the PC the program window opens and shows the dialog to
establish a partnership, perhaps in the background. Activate it by
going to the respective button in the taskbar at the bottom of the
screen.
5. The dialog has various elements and buttons, to establish a full or
guest partnership. Confirm full partnership.
6. Another dialog will open, where settings for the synchronization can
be made. These settings can also be made later. When connecting for
the first time we recommend that all options be set "unchecked" and
confirmed with "Continue" and "Finish".
7. When certain synchronization settings are activated, the address
and planner data will be synchronized in the background with the
corresponding data in Outlook.
8. The program opens at a window which displays status and
synchronizing information. Here you can open a menu to access
available functions and settings. Now you can exchange Data between
PC and Pronto i.e. via Windows explorer.
9. As long as the partnership is active in the background, Pronto
(Flashdisk and Storage card) can be accessed via Windows Explorer;
Pronto will then appear as a “mobile device” in Explorer. You can copy,
paste or delete files and folders.

With a new connection steps 1 to 6 need not be repeated. The

Synchronizing window will open.
The full partnership between Pronto and the PC can be deleted. Call up
"Start menu/Programs/ActiveSync” resp. “Mobile Device Center” on the
PC, open the menu and select the option for deleting the established
partnership.
Make sure that Pronto is not connected when deleting.
After deleting the partnership Pronto can be reconnected as a guest or
full partner again.

In “Prontomenu > Settings > Outlook databases”, as soon as the “Load

databases” or “Clear current databases” button is activated the
partnership data will be deleted. This is necessary to prevent Outlook
databases on your PC from being inadvertently damaged. A live
ActiveSync resp. “Mobile Device Center” connection must be
terminated by the user – you will receive a message asking you to do
so.

NB: After installing a Pronto system update or reinstalling ActiveSync

resp. Mobile Device Center, a previous full partnership will no longer be
available. All synchronization settings must be reset. A system reset
will also cause the loss of the full partnership.

15.2.3 Terminate conection

There are various ways of terminating the connection:
1. Switch Pronto to standby mode with S4.
2. Pull out the USB plug from Pronto.

NB: as long as Pronto is connected to the PC, there is no automatic

shutdown (Pronto menu>Settings>Power>Autosuspend).

15.2.4 Connection Problems

If a connection fails:
- pull out the USB plug from Pronto and switch Pronto to standby mode
with S4. After a few seconds turn Pronto back on and plug the USB
cable in again.
- Keep Pronto connected and on the PC open "Start
menu/Programs/ActiveSync" resp. Mobile Device Center: Open the
menu and select the connection option.
- Sometimes Pronto may not be recognized by the USB port selected
on the PC. Do not change any settings, but simply plug the USB cable
into another free USB port on the PC.

If the PC is connected to a network and/or firewall software has been

installed, this software must be set so that MS ActiveSync resp. Mobile
Device Center is recognized as an authorized application, otherwise
problems may arise with the connection or the data transfer, or a
connection may not be possible.

15.3 Connection Settings

You can configurate the connection settings with the relevant options
in the menu of MS ActiveSync resp. Mobile Device Center. i.e.
"File/Connection Settings" in the ActiveSync window of the PC.
You can select the interface, i.e. USB and configure, that the program
starts automatically.

If you are also using the interface for other devices, the respective
interface must be deactivated in the settings options, otherwise the
program will block it.

15.4 Accessing Pronto Files

Connect Pronto to the PC as described in Chapter 15.2.
Guest or full partnership.
Open Windows explorer.
Pronto will be recognized by the PC as an additional drive or folder and
will appear in the list under the name "Mobile device". This folder
contains other folders with system and text files.
The Pronto internal memory is called "Flashdisk" and contains the
folder "Edit" with text files. These folders may have subfolders.
The files of an inserted memory card can be found in the "Storage
card" folder. Text files in the “Edit” folder must also be stored here.
These folders may also contain subfolders. The "Voice" folder contains
recorded memos.

The files can be moved around and copied as in Windows Explorer.

Text files should always be stored in the "Edit" folder. otherwise Pronto
will not be able to find and open them. Within these folders other
folders can be created for ease of use.

NB: with a live ActiveSync resp. Mobile Device Center connection, data
can be exchanged also with the options of this program.

15.5 Terminating a Connection

The menu item "Close" or Alt+F4 closes ActiveSync resp. Mobile
Device Center. The connection between Pronto and the computer can
also be broken by pressing S4 or disconnecting the cable.
15.6 File Conversion
The default format for reading, editing and saving documents in Pronto
is richt text Format (RTF). Documents ind TXT Format can also be
opened, read, edited or saved, but support not all options of Prontos
Word Processor.
Prontos word processor is not able to open, read or save dokuments in
DOC Format (WORD documents).
So all DOC documents must be converted to RTF Format or TXT Format
before copying to Pronto.

How can a conversion from DOC to RTF be done”

On the PC start Microsoft WORD or Wordpad.
Open there the desired DOC document.
Use the function “save as” and the options of the “save as” dialog to
save the document in RTF or TXT Format.

15.7 Data Transfer Using a Card Reader

By using a so-called card reader or a universal card reader, data can
be exchanged simply between the PC and Pronto, without having to
connect the devices.

Card readers are not expensive and can usually be connected to the
PC through a USB interface. The advantage of these devices is that
they do not need a driver and can therefore be connected quickly and
simply to any PC available for exchanging data.

Simply pull out the memory card from Pronto and put it into the PC
card-reader. The card will appear on the PC as a removable data
medium, like a normal drive.

15.7.1 Identification of the Storage Card

When inserting a memory card into Pronto it will automatically be
recognized.

If you are using several storage cards or if you want to know whether
Pronto correctly recognized the card, you can copy a .wav file into the
root folder (main directory) of the storage card. This file will be played
every time the card is inserted into Pronto and correctly recognized.

The wav file can be copied from the PC to the memory card as
described above. It must be copied to the root folder of the memory
card and have the name "CardID.wav" (pay attention to the capital
letters).
Or you use the options of the voice recorder (Menu “Tools”) to record
and save a CardID.wav file directly to the inserted memory card.
16. Pronto as a Braille display
Pronto 18 and Pronto 40 can be connected to a PC in three different
ways (Comport, USB, Bluetooth) and set up as a Braille display in
conjunction with its screenreader. Connection to a mobile telephone
with Talks-software and the Talks Braille Interface application is also
possible. Mobile Speak for Symbian phones and Mobile Speak Pocket
are also supported.

For a USB connection “ActiveSync to serial” must also be installed – it

can be found on the installation CD.

16.1 System requirements:

Pronto! 18:
- Pronto software version 2.1.0.0 or later versions
- Operating System 2.0.0.13 or later versions

Pronto! 40:
- Pronto software version 2.4x or later versions
- Operating System 2.0.0.23 or later versions

PC:
General:
- Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP
- Screenreader (Virgo 4.5 or later, BLINDOWS 4.0 or later, JAWS 4.x,
5.x, 6.x)

For USB connection:

- Microsoft ActiveSync
- ActiveSync to serial (as2com)

For Bluetooth connection:

- Bluetooth functionality on the PC, e.g. Bluetooth-Dongle “DLINK DBT
120 USB Bluetooth Adapter”

16.1.1 Virgo Settings

1. Open the Virgo menu by pressing the left shift key twice. Select
“Braille/Braille display” or press ALT+B
2. Select “Baum-PRONTO” (Braille Display) when using Pronto 18.
Select “VarioConnect 40” when using Pronto 40.
3. Select the interface being used (Port); for a comport connection e.g.
“com1”; for a USB connection with ActiveSync always select “com99”;
for a Bluetooth connection select the virtual comport generated by the
system during the Bluetooth configuration, e.g. “com 5”
4. Select “OK” to close the dialog and close the Virgo menu.

16.1.2 BLINDOWS Settings

1. Open the settings screen with *0 and select the “Braille” tab control
2. Select “Run Braille Manager” at the very bottom of the screen or
press ALT-M
3. In the Braille-Manager select “Add” or Alt+A.
4. From the list of Braille displays select “Baum-PRONTO” resp.
“VarioConnect”. Under “Interface” select the interface in use: for a
comport connection e.g. “com1”; for a USB connection with ActiveSync
always select “com99”; for a Bluetooth connection select the virtual
comport generated by the system during the Bluetooth configuration,
e.g. “com 5”
5. To save press “Add” or Alt+A
6. Quit Braille-Manager with ALT+F4

16.1.3 Use with JAWS

PRONTO can be set up as a Braille display in Windows 2000/XP with
JAWS 4.x, and later versions. Comport, USB or Bluetooth connections
are available (see Chapter 16.2) provided that the appropriate driver
has been installed from the PRONTO installation CD; start
“Pronto/tools/JFWDRV/svarioprontojfwdrv.exe” and follow the
instructions.
The JAWS driver always drives Braille displays via a comport port,
which is either physical or, in the case of Bluetooth or USB, virtual.
With a USB connection the as2com.exe driver must also be installed
(see Chapter 16.2.2). PRONTO can then be operated as a Braille
display via the interface appropriate for the type of connection: e.g.
“com1” for a comport connection; or “com 99” for a USB connection
with ActiveSync; or the virtual comport generated by the system
during the Bluetooth configuration, e.g. “com 5”, for a Bluetooth
connection.

16.2 Connect PRONTO

16.2.1 Comport Connection

1. Connect PRONTO to a free comport on the PC with the serial
communication cable provided.
2. Start the PC and Screenreader and switch PRONTO on.
3. On PRONTO - open the Pronto menu with S3 and select “Braille
display”. Open the Command Menu by pressing S3 once briefly. Select
“connection” then “comport”.
Pronto is now ready for connection.
4. On the PC – set Screenreader to the new Braille display (see Chapter
16.1)
5. PRONTO should still be in the application “Braille display” and be
displaying the message “BAUM Pronto”; if not, open the PRONTO menu
again with S3, select “Braille display”, then call up the Command Menu
by pressing S3 once briefly and select “Start comport”
6. As soon as an action is carried out or the cursor is moved on the PC,
PRONTO will behave like a Braille display. The display and cursor
routing keys offer the same functions as Vario 40, SuperVario or
VarioConnect. In conjunction with the Virgo screenreader or JAWS,
Pronto 18 can be set up as an input keyboard (see Chapter 16.5).

16.2.2 USB Connection

Make sure that Microsoft ActiveSync has been installed on your PC.
Then install the “ActiveSync to serial” program by calling up the
“as2com.exe” file and following the instructions on the screen (this can
be found on the PRONTO installation CD in “pronto/tools.as2com.exe”).

To continue with the PRONTO connection, proceed as follows:

1. Connect PRONTO to a free USB port on your PC with the USB cable
provided
2. Start your PC and Screenreader, and switch PRONTO on. MS
ActiveSync will start to build the connection with PRONTO (full or guest
partnership)
3. Open the PRONTO menu with S3 and select “Braille display”. Open
the Command Menu by pressing S3 once briefly, select “Connection”
and then “ActiveSync”.
PRONTO is now ready for connection.
4. On your PC - set Screenreader to the new Braille display (see
Chapter 16.1)
5. PRONTO should still be in the application “Braille display” and be
displaying the message “BAUM Pronto”; if not, open the PRONTO menu
again with S3, select “Braille display”, then call up the Command Menu
with S3 once briefly, and select “Start ActiveSync”.
6. As soon as an action is carried out or the cursor is moved on the PC,
PRONTO will behave like a Braille display. The display and cursor
routing keys offer the same functions as Vario 40, SuperVario or
VarioConnect.

In conjunction with the Virgo screenreader or JAWS, Pronto 18can be

set up as an input keyboard (see Chapter 16.5).
16.2.3 Bluetooth Connection
Your PC must have Bluetooth functionality which can be achieved by
the installation of a Bluetooth dongle, for example “DLINK DBT 120
USB Bluetooth adapter” (see Appendix 4 for instructions on how to
install DLINK).
If you use Windows XP Service Pack 2 and only connect PRONTO as a
Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth dongle can be installed with the
Microsoft drivers. See either Chapter 16.2.3.1 or Appendix x4.

Pronto can also be connected as a Braille display to a mobile telephone

via Bluetooth. The mobile telephone must have installed a appropiate
screenreader. (see Chapter 16.6).

16.2.3.1 Installation and Pairing

When the Bluetooth dongle has been installed on your PC, the PC and
PRONTO must be paired. Proceed as follows:
1. start your PC and connect the “DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth
adapter” to a USB port. The automatic device recognition procedure
will be activated and the Microsoft Bluetooth device drivers will be fully
installed independently. If the installation is closed down, a symbol
headed “Bluetooth devices” will appear in the Systemtray at the
bottom of the screen, or an extra heading called “Bluetooth devices”
will appear in the Control Panel
2. switch PRONTO on. Open the PRONTO menu with S3, select
“Settings” then “Interfaces” then “Bluetooth” and activate “Bluetooth”.
3. start PRONTO’s Braille display application by opening the PRONTO
menu, selecting “Braille display” and opening the Command Menu by
pressing S3 once briefly. Select “Connection” then “Bluetooth”, open
the command menu again and select “Start Bluetooth”.
4. on your PC go to the start button with “Control + Escape” and then
“Escape” once again. Then press “Shift + Tab” twice. You are now in
the Systemtray. Go to the “Bluetooth devices” symbol by using either
the left or right arrow keys.
5. now press the Context Menu key or “Shift + F10”. Use the up or
down arrow keys to select “Add Bluetooth device” and press Return.
6. a dialog will open. Press the space bar to activate the “Device is
installed and recognised” field. Then press “Continue”.
7. a Bluetooth device will now be sought. This can take some time. If
PRONTO is found, the list of found devices in the dialog will contain the
entry PRONTO.
8. use the up or down arrow keys in the list to access the PRONTO
entry. Now use the tab key to reach the “Continue” button and select
it.
9. in the next menu select “use master key”. Then go with the tab key
to the PIN edit box and type “1234” without the inverted commas.
Then select “Continue”.
10. after a while the key will be applied. Then select “Finish”.
11. in Pronto a dialog headed “Bluetooth connection device NAME” will
open. The PIN 1234 is already input below. Then select “OK”
12. on your PC go to the Systemtray as described in step 4 and select
the “Bluetooth devices” symbol. Open the Context Menu, select “Open
Bluetooth settings” and press Return
13. a dialog will open. Go to the “Devices” tab control, select
“PRONTO” and then “Properties”
14. switch to the “Services” tab control with “Control + Tab” to find out
which virtual comport has been assigned to the Braille display by your
system. Make a note of it as it will be required later to set the correct
port in Screenreader
15. Finally close all dialogs by selecting “OK”.

This procedure is usually just carried out once. The pairing is important
so that in future PRONTO is accepted as a known device and can
communicate correctly with your PC so that it can work together
anytime with your PC as a Braille display.

NB: If the first pairing is not successful, it is advisable to to delete the

old configuration data and try once again. Therefore delete on the PC
the entry Startmenu/control panel/bluetooth device/ Pronto and in
Pronto delete the file flashdisk/USER/bluetooth.xml and reboot the
operating system of Pronto with D1,D4,B1,B2,B4,B5 resp.
FN+Shift_left+0“.

16.2.3.2 Connection as a Braille Display

1. make sure that Bluetooth is activated on PRONTO (in the PRONTO
menu select Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth check box “Bluetooth”).
2. open the PRONTO menu and select “Braille display”.
3. open the Command Menu by pressing S3 once briefly. Select
“Connection” and then “Bluetooth”.
4. open the Command Menu again with S3 once briefly and select
“Start Bluetooth”.
5. make sure that the Bluetooth dongle is plugged in at the PC, and
activate it now (in the Systemtray at the “Bluetooth device” symbol,
open the Context Menu and select “quick connection/serial Bluetooth
port/ PRONTO” [cf. chapter 16.2.3.1 step 4])
6. on your PC set Screenreader to the new Braille display (see chapter
16.1)
7. as soon as an action is carried out or the cursor moved on the PC,
PRONTO will behave like a Braille display. The display and position
keys offer the same functions as Vario 40, SuperVario or
VarioConnect,.

In conjunction with the Virgo screenreader or JAWS, Pronto 18 can be

set up as an input keyboard (see Chapter 16.5).

NB: to get a valid connection the right order is important. First set in
Pronto the function “Braille display” with the connection Bluetooth and
stat the application., then start on the PC the bluetooth connection to
Pronto device.

16.3 Pause or End Connection

When PRONTO has been connected to the PC or mobile telephone as a
Braille display, its functions still can be accessed temporarily, so from
time to time you can write a memo on PRONTO or consult Planner.
Pressing S3 will pause the “PRONTO as Braille display” function.
PRONTO’s keys are now available for use with PRONTO applications.
Proceed as follows:
1. open the PRONTO menu with S3 and select the desired application.
PRONTO will now operate independently and all keys relate to PRONTO
functions
2. to return to the Braille display function open the PRONTO menu with
S3 and select “Braille display”.Eventually Open the Command Menu
with S3 once briefly or B9B3B5 and select “Start”
3. as soon as an action is carried out on the PC or mobile telephone, or
the cursor is moved, it will be registered on PRONTO and PRONTO’s
keys will reassume their Screenreader-defined functions.

To close the connection open the PRONTO menu with S3 and select
“Braille display”. Open the Command Menu by pressing S3 once briefly
and select “Stop”.

As it is important to follow the steps in the correct order when

connecting or disconnecting, particularly where mobile telephones are
concerned, a short summary follows:

Connection:
1. First, in Pronto Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth , activate “Bluetooth”,
and in “Pronto as Braille display” select Connection/Bluetooth
2. in the Pronto application “Pronto as Braille display”, select “start
Bluetooth”
3. now activate the Braille output functions with TALKS or Mobile Speak
on the mobile telephone (or, start the connection to the Braille display
“BAUM Pronto” resp. “VarioConnect 40” on the virtual com-interface in
Screenreader).
Disconnection:
1. first, deactivate the Braille output functions with TALKS or Mobile
Speak on the mobile telephone (or, end the connection to the Braille
display “BAUM Pronto” resp. “VarioConnect 40” on the virtual com-
interface in Screenreader).
2. in the Pronto application “Pronto as Braille display”, select “stop
Bluetooth”
3. in “Pronto as Braille display” the “Connection/Bluetooth” option can
remain selected, as long as the “Bluetooth” option remains selected in
“Settings/Interfaces”.

16.3.1 Stand-by Mode in PRONTO

When PRONTO is connected to a PC as a Braille display it can still be
switched to Stand-by mode with S4. To reconnect when coming out of
Stand-by mode proceed as follows:
1. pause the Braille display function by pressing S3 and open the
PRONTO menu
2. select “Braille display”, open the Command menu and select “Stop”.
3. switch PRONTO to stand-by mode by pressing S4 (with comport and
USB connections you can skip step 2 by pressing S3 and shortly
afterwards S4)
4. wake PRONTO up by pressing S3, select “Braille display” in the
PRONTO menu, open the command menu and select “Start”.

Re. Autosuspend:
When Pronto is connected to the PC or mobile telephone as a Braille
display (any type of connection), any automatic shutdown (Pronto
menu/Settings/Power/Auto suspend) will not work, i.e. Pronto will not
shut itself down if the PC or mobile telephone is switched on.
Automatic suspend will only work if the connection in the Braille
Display application is ended by selecting “stop”.

16.4 Connection Problems – Tips

With USB and ActiveSync:
- quit the connection settings in Pronto and Screenreader, close Pronto
with S4, switch it back on and in the Pronto menu select “Pronto as
Braille display”
- pull out the USB cable from PRONTO and re-insert it shortly
afterwards to force a new connection with ActiveSync.
- change the interface parameter from “com99” to another number,
save the new number, input “com99” again, save, and restart
Screenreader
With Bluetooth:
- loss of radio connection because your PC and PRONTO are too far
apart: leave PRONTO switched on with the Pronto as Braille display
application activated and move it towards the PC. Automatic
reconnection should follow after a short while (see Appendix x4 for
more tips).
- Avoid deactivating the Bluetooth chip (Pronto menu > Settings >
Interfaces > Bluetooth) when Pronto is still in the Braille display
application
- if the PC or mobile telephone is switched off or out of range, but the
Braille display application is still active in Pronto, Pronto will try
desperately to maintain the connection and will thus react very slowly
and may appear to have crashed. Open the Braille display application
and select “Stop Bluetooth”.

- With BLINDOWS:
As far as Pronto is concerned the connection to the PC must already be
active before BLINDOWS can start. If necessary, restart BLINDOWS
after connecting Pronto and the PC.

16.5 Pronto as a Braille input-keyboard

Not every screenreader is able to interpret Pronto key strokes and
relay them as commands or character input.
Virgo Version 4.6 or later and JAWS provide good support.
In addition to the display key functions (similar to Vario Braille
displays) and the Navistick (Cursor up/down, left/right, Return), the
following commands are available in VIRGO. The key assignment is
based on Pronto. For technical reasons it was necessary to use B0
instead of B9 to input commands in Braille displays. A large proportion
of the usual functions, including menus and context menus, should
thus be covered.
Highlighting is not possible.

NB: This option only is available for Pronto 18.

16.5.1 List of PC commands

Cursor left = B0B1
Cursor right = B0B4
Cursor up = B0B1B2
Cursor down = B0B4B5
Control+Cursor left = B0B2
Control+Cursor right = B0B5
HOME = B0B3
End = B0B6
Shift+HOME = B0B3B8
Shift+End = B0B6B8
Control+HOME = B0B1B2B3
Control+End = B0B4B5B6
Shift+Control+HOME = B0B1B2B3B7
Shift+Control+End = B0B4B5B6B8

Page up = B0B2B3
Page down = B0B5B6
Shift+Page up = B0B2B3B7
Shift+Page down = B0B5B6B8

Insert = B0B2B5
Delete = B0B1B4B7

Tabulator = B0B4B6
Shift+Tabulator = B0B1B3

Return = B8
Control+Return = B0B8
Shift+Control+Return = B0B4B8

Escape = B0B7B8
Space = B0
Backspace = B7
Windows key = B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

Alt = B0B3B6B7B8
Alt+A = B0B1B7B8
Alt+B = B0B1B2B7B8
Alt+C = B0B1B4B7B8
Alt+D = B0B1B4B5B7B8
Alt+E = B0B1B5B7B8
Alt+F = B0B1B2B4B7B8
Alt+G = B0B1B2B4B5B7B8
Alt+H = B0B1B2B5B7B8
Alt+I = B0B2B5B7B8
Alt+J = B0B2B4B5B7B8
Alt+K = B0B1B3B7B8
Alt+L = B0B1B2B3B7B8
Alt+M = B0B1B3B4B7B8
Alt+N = B0B1B3B4B5B7B8
Alt+O = B0B1B3B5B7B8
Alt+P = B0B1B2B3B4B7B8
Alt+Q = B0B1B2B3B4B5B7B8
Alt+R = B0B1B2B3B5B7B8
Alt+S = B0B2B3B4B7B8
Alt+T = B0B2B3B4B5B7B8
Alt+U = B0B1B3B6B7B8
Alt+V = B0B1B2B3B6B7B8
Alt+W = B0B2B4B5B6B7B8
Alt+X = B0B1B3B4B6B7B8
Alt+Y = B0B1B3B4B5B6B7B8
Alt+Z = B0B1B3B5B6B7B8
Alt+? = B0B2B6B7B8

Control = B0B2B3B5B6B7B8
Control+A = B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B8
Control+B = B0B1B2B8
Control+C = B0B1B4B8
Control+D = B0B1B4B5B8
Control+E = B0B1B5B8
Control+F = B0B1B2B4B8
Control+G = B0B1B2B4B5B8
Control+H = B0B1B2B5B8
Control+I = B0B2B5B8
Control+J = B0B2B4B5B8
Control+K = B0B1B3B8
Control+L = B0B1B2B3B8
Control+M = B0B1B3B4B8
Control+N = B0B1B3B4B5B8
Control+O = B0B1B3B5B8
Control+P = B0B1B2B3B4B8
Control+Q = B0B1B2B3B4B5B8
Control+R = B0B1B2B3B5B8
Control+S = B0B2B3B4B8
Control+T = B0B2B3B4B5B8
Control+U = B0B1B3B6B8
Control+V = B0B1B2B3B6B8
Control+W = B0B2B4B5B6B8
Control+X = B0B1B3B4B6B8
Control+Y = B0B1B3B4B5B6B8
Control+Z = B0B1B3B5B6B8
Control+Capslock = B0B1B2B3B5B6B7B8

F1 = B0B1B6B8
F2 = B0B1B2B6B8
F3 = B0B1B4B6B8
F4 = B0B1B4B5B6B8
F5 = B0B1B5B6B8
F6 = B0B1B2B4B6B8
F7 = B0B1B2B4B5B6B8
F8 = B0B1B2B5B6B8
F9 = B0B2B4B6B8
F10 = B0B3B4B6B8
F11 = B0B2B8
F12 = B0B2B3B8
Shift+F10 = B0B3B5

16.6 Pronto and BAUM’s Talks Braille Interface (TBI)

Talks Braille Interface (TBI) is an add-in program which allows Pronto to
work as a Braille display in conjunction with a mobile telephone that
has Talks&Braille or Talks Premium Version 2 loaded.

The most recent version of “BAUM Talks Braille Interface”, a detailed

introduction and a file of frequently asked questions (FAQ) can be
downloaded at www.baum.de area support / downloads.

The following subchapter gives key assignments for Pronto and TBI.

16.6.1 Pronto keys

A) Navistick
Joystick left = N-left
Joystick right = N-right
Joystick up = N-up
Joystick down = N-down
Press Joystick = N-middle

B) B-keys
Inputting letters, numbers, punctuation and special characters = B1 to
B8
Space bar = B0
Delete one backwards = B7
New line in a multi-line field = B8
Confirm a selection (Press Joystick) = B9

C) Display Keys
Joystick upwards = D1
Joystick downwards = D3
Joystick left = D1D3
Joystick right = D4D6
Press Joystick = D1D3D4D6
Key 2 (Close, Cancel) = D4
Key 1 (Options, OK) = D6
Menu keys = D1D4
Talks keys = D2D5
Begin/accept call = D4D5
End call/hang up = D5D6
Delete one character backwards = D1D2D3
Number 1 = D1D6
Number 2 = D1D2D6
Number 3 = D1D4D6
Number 4 = D1D4D5D6
Number 5 = D1D5D6
Number 6 = D1D2D4D6
Number 7 = D1D2D4D5D6
Number 8 = D1D2D5D6
Number 9 = D2D4D6
Number 0 = D3D4D6
Star = D3D5
Rhombus = D3D4D5D6
Space = D3D6
New line in a multi-line field = D2D3D5D6
Scroll left = D2
Scroll right = D5

D) Cursor routing Keys

- menu entries are opened by clicking the position key after the entry
(this corresponds to pressing the joystick on the mobile telephone)
- within an edit box the cursor is positioned on the character selected
with the position key so that the relevant character is read out via
Talks’ speech output

E) S Keys
- S keys have no Talks- or mobile telephone-specific functions
whatsoever and when TBI is being used they can be used at any time
to execute the relevant Pronto functions.

16.7 Pronto and Mobile Speak or Mobile Speak Pocket

Mobile Speak for Symbian Phones and Mobile Speak Pocket for PDAs
both support Pronto as a Braille display. Please follow the instructions
of Mobile Speak or Mobile Speak Pocket to setup those screenreaders
and to obtain a command list.
17. System commands
17.1 Updates

17.1.1 Software Updates

1. Copy the folder “Update” which has the right update files, to the
storage card (Path: storage card/UPDATE). Each update contains the
respective installation instructions.
2. Check the software version of your PRONTO with the shortcut
“Shift+Control+v” (QWERT Mode) or „v+B9B0B7B8“ (Braille Mode).
3. Press the following keys „D1D4B7B8“ (Braille Mode) or “FN + shift-
left + Control-left + 1” (QWERT Mode) in this order, hold and then
release simultaneously, to start the update .
4. Short signals will be emitted. The update routine runs automatically
and takes approximately 2 minutes.
5. Check whether the software version has changed with the shortcut
„v+B9B0B7B8“(Braille Mode) or “Shift+Control+v” (QWERT Mode).

NB: If the Storage card has 20MB of free memory a back-up directory
will be created containing your old files from the flashdisk.

17.1.2 Installing or Reinstalling Pronto software

1. Copy the INSTALL folder (which contains the “Pronto” and “USER”
directories for the current version of Pronto) to the memory card
(Storage Card > INSTALL)

NB: New devices have this folder already on the Storage card and as a
compressed Zip-file on the installation CD in the “Prontosoft” directory.

2. Check which software version Pronto already has installed (if Pronto
is still reacting) by pressing „v+B9B0B7B8“(Braille Mode) or
“Shift+Control+v” (QWERT Mode).
3. Press the following keys „D1D4B1B4B7B8“ (Braille Mode) or “FN +
shift-left + 1” (QWERT Mode) in this order, hold and then release
simultaneously, to start the installation.
4. short signals will be emitted. All existing files on the flashdisk will be
deleted, and the files from the INSTALL directory will copied
automatically to the flashdisk. If the INSTALL directory contains no
files, or is not present on the Storage card, or no Storage card was
inserted, you will hear an unpleasant noise and Pronto will be
inoperable. In this case check that the correct Storage card with the
INSTALL directory and files for a complete version of Pronto are
present, and press „D1D4B1B4B7B8“ or “FN + shift-left +1 once again.
The installation process is automatic and takes approximately 10
minutes, during which time short signals will be emitted. No keys
should be pressed on Pronto during this period.
5. Check that the software version has changed by pressing
„v+B9B0B7B8“(Braille Mode) or “Shift+Control+v” (QWERT Mode).

NB: If the Storage card has 20MB of free memory a back-up directory
will be created containing your old files from the flashdisk.

17.1.3 Operating System Update

The operating system can only be updated if PRONTO is connected to
the loading device (AC Adapter).

1. Copy the update directory “OS5” to the storage card.

2. Check the version of the operating system with the shortcut
„v+B9B0B7B8“(Braille Mode) or “Shift+Control+v” (QWERT Mode).
3. Press the following keys „D1D4B2B3B5B7B8“ (Braille Mode) or “FN
+ shift-left + 3” (QWERT Mode) in this order, hold and then release
simultaneously, to start the installation.
4. short signals will be emitted. The update routine runs automatically
and takes approximately 2 minutes.
5. Check whether the version of the operating system has changed
with „v+B9B0B7B8“(Braille Mode) or “Shift+Control+V” (QWERT
Mode)..

NB: new devices have the “OS5” folder already on the Storage card
and as a compressed Zip-file on the installation CD in the “Prontosoft”
directory.

17.1.4 BIOS Update

The BIOS firmware can only be updated if PRONTO is connected to the
loading device (AC Adapter).
Proceed as described for updating the operating systembut use the
command “FN + shift-left + control-left +3” (QWERT Mode) or
„D1D4B1B2B3B4“ (Braille Mode). And the storage card must have the
BIOS directory with the current BIOS version on it.

Updating the BIOS firmware is only possible on Pronto QS and Pronto

40 devices.
17.2 Further System Commands
- Program Reset (Reboot PRONTO)

On Pronto 18 / Pronto 40:

Press D1D4B3B6 for about 5 seconds.

On Pronto QS / Pronto 40:

Press “FN + Shift-left + Control-left + 7” in this order and release all
keys together.

This is useful for a quick reboot following a system crash. This key
combination may have to be pressed several times in succession
and/or for more than 3 seconds, depending on the type of crash.

- Warm Reset (Reboot of operatin system and software)

On Pronto 18 / Pronto 40:

Press D1D4B1B2B4B5 for about 5 seconds.

On Pronto QS / Pronto 40:

Press “FN + Shift-left + Control-left +0” in this order and release all
keys together.

This command is useful to reboot pronto after a crash and when the
program reset is has no success.

- System Reset (complete shutdown and restart)

On Pronto 18:
Pressing S1+S4 for 10 secondw will shut down the device completely,
then pressing S1+S4 briefly to restart..

On Pronto QS / Pronto 40:

Pressing Power on/off button will shut down the device completely or
restart it, if already shut down.

The RAM is deleted and any unsaved data and settings will be lost.
Partnership is lost and after restart Bluetooth will be deactivated.

- Direct exchange of system files between PC (via ActiveSync) and

attached Pronto:
Stopp software and applications:
On Pronto 18 / Pronto 40: Press D1B4B2B5 for about 5 seconds.
On Pronto QS / Pronto 40: Press “FN + shift-left + Control-left + 6“in
this order and release all keys together.

Pronto will no longer react when any of its keys are pressed. Open
Windows Explorer and select the new file; go to the corresponding
Pronto folder and transfer or replace it.
Press D1D4B1B4 or “FN + shift-left + 6” to reactivate Pronto and its
keys.
These functions should only be used by experienced users.
18. Connecting an external Braille display
An external Braille display can be connected via Bluetooth or the serial
port.
A special adapter cable to connect Pronto to the serial cable of Vario
40 or SuperVario is available as an optional extra. The normal Pronto
serial cable can also be used in conjunction with a standard cable
adapter.
e.g.
D-SUB9 F -> IDC10(Vario)
2 (TxD) -> 5(RxD)
3 (RxD) <- 3(TxD)
5 (Gnd) -- 9 (Gnd)

When connecting via Bluetooth, both devices must establish a

partnership – use the functions in Pronto menu > Settings > interfaces
> Bluetooth (see Chapter 13.5.1).
With a serial connection both devices must be connected with the
serial cable before the connection settings can be adjusted.

18.1 Build a profile and launch the connection

To establish a connection and build a profile for an external Braille
display, proceed as follows:
1. In the Pronto menu select Settings/Interfaces/External Braille
display.
2. A dialog will open. If the Braille display is to be run by a previously
built profile, simply check “External Braille display on” and close the
dialog.
3. To build a profile or switch to the correct profile for the external
Braille display, consult the other elements in the dialog.
4. The “Profiles of external Braille displays” list contains the names of
existing Braille display profiles. These can be manipulated with the
check box “External Braille display on”.
5. To select an external Braille display from this list and build a profile
for it or amend its settings, select “Add”.
6. Another dialog will open. Type the profile name, which will now be
added to the list.
7. By selecting the “Vario” type of Braille display, Baum’s Vario 40,
SuperVario and VarioConnect can be used.
8. If Bluetooth has been selected as the connection type, a list of all
the registered Bluetooth devices will appear. Move to the right or left
to select a display (if the desired display does not appear check that it
was registered successfully. [Settings/Interfaces/Bluetooth]).
9. If a serial connection has been selected, check that both devices are
connected with the serial cable.
10. Close the dialog with “OK”, and you will be taken back to the
previous dialog. Activate the Check box “External Braille display on”
and close the dialog with “OK”.

The external Braille display can now be used for Braille output with
Pronto.

18.2 End the connection

To end the connection go to Pronto menu/Settings/Interfaces/External
Braille display and deactivate the check box “External Braille display
on”, and then remove the serial cable or deactivate Bluetooth.
19. Pronto Daisy Reader
This application allows Daisy Books stored in folder DAISY on the
Storage Card to be read.
Daisy Books on CD must first be copied to the storage card.

To launch Daisy Reader go the main menu and select “Daisy Reader”.
Tthe shortcut “d+B7B8B9” or “Windowskey+D” will also launch the
Daisy Reader, and toggle to it from another application.

19.1 Prepare Daisy Books

19.1.1 Copy Daisy Books to the storage card

As Daisy Books often use the full 700MB capacity of a CD they must be
copied to a memory card that is large enough (e.g. 1GB).

To copy the Daisy Book to a memory card, a so-called CardReader

should be used. These small card-reading devices are connected to a
USB port on the PC and generally ensure smooth transfer of large
quantities of data. Copying the Daisy Book files from a PC to the
storage card with ActiveSync resp Mobile Device Center is, in theory,
possible, although not recommended as this connection is not
designed to transfer such large quantities of data smoothly and
quickly.

To copy, proceed as follows:

1. Use Windows Explorer on your PC to copy the files from the CD (in
the CD drive) to the memory card (CardReader). The memory card
inserted in the CardReader will show as ‘removable disk’.
2. Create a folder called ‘Daisy’ on the memory card. Daisy means
"Digital Accessible Information System" and is spelled D A I S Y.
3. Highlight all files on the Daisy CD with CTRL+A and copy them to the
Windows clipboard with CTRL+C.
4. Switch over to the memory card (removable disk) and open the
‘Daisy’ folder.
5. Now paste the files from the clipboard to the empty folder with
CTRL+V.

If copying more than one Daisy Book to the memory card, each book or
set of files must be copied to its own sub-folder in the ‘Daisy’ folder.
The name of each sub-folder should reflect the title of the book. For
example, say you have a CD of detective stories and one of fairy tales:
in the ‘Daisy’ folder create a sub-folder called ‘Detective’ and a second
called ‘Fairy-tales’, and copy the files to the relevant sub-folder.
Before copying check how much memory is required by looking at the
size of the Daisy Book CD on the PC.

NB:
Depending on the speed at which your CD-drive and memory card read
and copy data, it may be easier to copy the Daisy Book files to your
computer first and then transfer them to the memory card.

19.1.2 Changing storage cards

When a memory card is removed from its slot, the Daisy Reader will
make an announcement.
When a storage card is inserted the Daisy Reader checks to see if it
contains a ‘Daisy’ folder with any Daisy Book files. If no such folder or
files are found, the following message will be given: No book found on
storage card.

When a storage card is inserted, the command to update the bookshelf

will automatically be executed.

19.2 Reading (playing) Daisy Books

1. Open the Pronto menu with S3 or Windows key and select ‘Daisy
reader’.
2. When opening Daisy Reader for the first time you get a welcome
message on the braille display and information how to use this
applicatiohn. When toggling from an other application the “Where am
i” command “minus+B7B8B9” or “Windowskey+Minus” will announce
the applications name.
3. If no storage card has been inserted or the card has no ‘Daisy’ folder
containing Daisy Books, you will receive a message.
4. If a storage card with a ‘Daisy’ folder and Daisy Books has been
inserted, the bookshelf will be updated and the title of the first book
read out.
The books can be updated at any time with the shortcut “n+B8B9” or
“Control+n”.
5. Move to the left or right to your desired title and press B9 or Return.
6. The book will now load; this can take several minutes depending on
its size. When loading is complete you will receive a message
informing you how to start and stop the reading.
7. Pressing B9 or Return or pressing the Navistick (N-center) will start,
pause, and continue the reading.
8. To stop playback open the Command Menu with S3 or Alt key and
select File > Close book.
The last position and all other set bookmarks will be saved.

Once the playback has begun, you can switch to other Pronto
applications and listen to the book in the background. To navigate
within the book or stop the reading, you must switch back to the Daisy
Reader (shortcut “d+B7B8B9” orWindowskey+D) and execute the
appropriate commands.
As long as a daisy book is read in foreground or background the
autosuspend function (Pronto menu > settings / power / Autosouspen)
will have no effect. But if reading is stopped or paused the
autosuspend function will switch off Pronto after the determined time.

NB:
The time a book takes to load depends on the number and size of its
files, and the depth of its structure (number of headings and levels).
Large or heavily structured books can take several minutes to load.

19.2.1 Close a Daisy Book and open a new one

The Daisy Reader can only support one open book at a time. If another
is to be loaded the first one must be closed. There are several ways of
closing and opening books:

1. The entry “File” > “update new bookshelf” in Command menu |will
close a book and then automatically update the bookshelf. You will be
informed how many books are available and the title of the first will be
read out.
Access the other books by moving to the left or right, and load the
selected book by pressing B9 or Return. Press B9 or Return once again
to start playback.

2. The entry “File” > “Booklist” in command menu will close a book
and open the list of titles available.
The file name of a book will appear on the Braille display and its title
will be read out. Move to the left or to the right to access your desired
book and then press B9 or Return or OK. Press B9 or Return once again
to start reading.

3. The entry “File” > “Close book” in command menu will close a book
if, for example, you want to remove the storage card.

Whenever a book is closed a message will be output, and the last

position and bookmarks will be saved. Closing large books will take
some time, so please do not remove the storage card directly after the
closing command.
19.3 Navigation in levels and spool functions
Daisy Books have different levels which can be browsed. This means
that specific places, chapters, sub-chapters and pages can be accessed
directly. The number of levels varies from book to book. It is also
possible to navigate by phrase and time (minutes).
In most Daisy Books, ‘phrase’ means a short spoken sequence, e.g. a
few words or a clause.

19.3.1 Navigating in a book

The Navistick or the arrow keys are perfect for navigating within the
different levels or for switching from level to level. Up and down
movements allow you to move from level to level. The number and
type of levels varies from book to book, but all have Level 1, Phrase,
and Time Jump.

The following shortcuts are available:

Previous level: N-up,Arrow up
Next level: N-down, Arrow down
Backwards in book on selected level: N-left, Arrow left
Forwards in book on selected level: N-right, Arrow right
Beginning of book: B9B1B2B3, Home (FN+Arrow left)
End of book: B9B4B5B6, End (FN+Arrow right)

You access these and further commands also in command menu >
Navigation.

19.3.2 Jumping from page to page

As long as a Page level in the Daisy Book’s structure is available, you
can jump from page to page. Open command menu, and select the
entry “Navigation” > “Go to page”. A dialog will open: type in the page
number and select OK. If no page structure is available a message will
be given, otherwise you will be taken to the top of the page whose
number you input.

19.3.3 Fast forward/rewind (spooling)

You can move forwards and backwards through the book at a higher
speed. When spooling, the text will become fragmentary and
incomprehensible.
Spooling is carried out at a constant speed. To spool, open the
Command Menu with S3 or Alt key, select ‘Navigation’ and then either
‘Fast Rewind’ or ‘Fast forward’.
Use the following shortcuts to start and stop the spooling:
Fast foreward: Greater-than+B8B9 or Shift+Control+Arrow right.
Fast rewind: Less-than+B8B9 or Shift+Control+Arrow left

19.4 Speed and volume

19.4.1 Speed
The playback speed can be increased to +10 or decreased to -3 from
the standard value of 0.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command Menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key.
2. Select ‘Tools’ and then ‘Speed’.
3. A dialog will open in a list at the current speed.
4. Move to the left or right to select your desired speed.
5. If the “Save current speed” checkbox has been checked, every
amendment will be saved and retained even after Pronto has been
rebooted.
6. Confirm with OK.

The following shortcuts can be used to alter the speed whilst reading.
The values input in the dialog will also be changed.
Faster: Plus+B8B9 or Control+Plus
slower: Minus+B8B9 or Control+Minus.

19.4.2 Volume
Volume can be set with Pronto’s general volume control

19.5 Bookmarks
Bookmarks can be used to mark specific places in a Daisy Book so that
these places can be located quickly later on. A maximum of 99998
bookmarks can be set.
A number is automatically assigned to a bookmark when it is set. They
are numbered in order of being set. The number itself does not give
the position of the bookmark within the text.
You can move forwards or backwards from bookmark to bookmark or
go to a specific bookmark.
Bookmarks which are no longer required can be deleted individually
without changing the position or numbering of remaining bookmarks.
It is also possible to delete all bookmarks of one book at once.
When a book is closed all bookmark information is saved in Pronto
(flashdisk/USER/bookmark.dat).
Saving bookmarks takes some time, so it is not advisable to switch off
Pronto (S4) directly after closing a Daisy Book.

19.5.1 Setting a bookmark

To set a bookmark, stop reading at your desired point during
playback. Open the command menu by pressing S3 brievly or ALT key
and select “Bookmarks “ > “Set”.
You will receive a message saying that a bookmark has been set and
giving you its number.
Numbers are assigned to bookmarks sequentially.

When the book is closed the bookmarks will be saved as additional

information. To see the total number set, open the command menu
and select “Information” > “book info”.

Option:
The shortcut B9B8 or Insert key (FN+Delete) sets a bookmark directly
at the desired point, even during playback.

19.5.2 Jump to a bookmark

There are two ways of jumping to a bookmark: either by browsing
through them or by going directly to a specific bookmark number.

19.5.2.1 Browsing Bookmarks

1. From your current position the next or previous bookmark will be
reached by opening the Command Menu and selecting either
“Bookmark/next” or “Bookmark/previous”
2. A message will tell you which bookmark has been reached and
playback will resume. If there is no previous or next bookmark you will
be taken to the beginning or end of the book respectively.
3. It is the position of the bookmark rather than its number that
determines the order when browsing bookmarks.

To browse quickly, the following shortcuts can be used:

Forwards: B2, D2D3D6 or Page down (FN+Arrow down)
Backwards: B5, D3D5D6 or Page up (FN+Arrow up)

NB:
If the shortcurt is used twice in less than five seconds, you will not
jump to the beginning ov the current bookmark but to the beginning of
the bookmark one before. This is like you know from a CD player.
Pressing “previous title” once will bring you to the beginning of the
current title, pressing it twice within a short time will bring you to the
previous title.

19.5.2.2 Jumping to a specific bookmark

1. Open the Command Menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key, select
“Bookmark” and then “Go to”
2. A dialog will open. Type the bookmark number and then select OK.
3. You will now jump to this particular bookmark. Now press B9 or
Return to resume playback.
If no bookmark has been set with the number you type, you will
receive a message and you will remain where you are in the text.

19.5.3 Deleting bookmarks

There are two ways of deleting a bookmark. They can be deleted
individually or all at once in one book.

To delete all the bookmarks in the loaded book, open the Command
Menu and select Bookmarks > Delete all.

To delete individual bookmarks, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Command Menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key, select
“Bookmarks” and then “Delete”.
2. A dialog will open. Type the bookmark number and then select OK.
3. The bookmark will be deleted and the total number in the book
reduced.
4. The number of the deleted bookmark is now available and will be re-
assigned to the next one to be set. The other bookmarks retain their
number and position.
5. The changes will be saved when the book is closed.

Example:
You set three bookmarks in a book at different positions. You delete
Bookmark Number 1 and are then left with two designated Numbers 2
and 3. You set a new bookmark at another position – this will be
assigned Number 1, to give you three bookmarks again. The positions
of Bookmark Numbers 2 and 3 remain unchanged – only the position of
Number 1 will have changed because of its deletion and subsequent
re-assignment.

19.6 Calling up information

19.6.1 Information on the book (total reading time)

Open the command menu and select Information > Book information
to access the following information:
- the title of the book
- number of headings
- total play time
- time elapsed
- time remaining
- number of bookmarks set
- version number of the Daisy Reader in use

Once the dialog with the message has started, you can move up and
down to reach the different pieces of information and have them read
out. This allows you to pick out the exact piece of information you
require quickly without having to scroll or listen to the entire list.

19.6.2 Information on your position in the book (Where

am I?)
Open the Command menu and Select Information > Current Position to
access the following information:

- number of the current heading

- title of the current heading (chapter or subchapter)

19.7 The Find function and its features

it is not possible to search for words or phrases if these are only
available as speech (audio file).
The search function will only work if the producer of the Daisy Book
has provided the title, chapter headings or other text as .html files
alongside the audio files.
Many books have only the title and chapter headings in .html. In such
cases it is not possible to search for words elsewhere in the text.

19.7.1 Find (search)

If your Daisy Book has the text as .html files in addition to audio files,
words, terms and other parts of a sentence can be searched and read
out.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Command Menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key, select
‘Edit’ and then ‘Find’.
2. The Find dialog opens at an edit box. Type your search term and
press OK.
3. The text will now be searched from your current position either to
the end of the book (search forwards) or to the beginning (search
backwards), depending on the option selected.
4. The check box “Title only” limits the search to the title of the
chapter rather than the entire text. As many Daisy Books only allow
titles to be searched (if that), this option is largely meaningless for the
overall speed of the search.

When the search term is found it will be indicated. If the term cannot
be found you will be given a message and you will be returned to the
start position.

19.8 Generalities and messages on a Braille display

All functions can be accessed from the Command Menu, which can be
opened by pressing the system key S3 briefly or pressing th Alt key.

Menu entries and system messages are output in speech and Braille.
The message will disappear when the playback is started or stopped.
Braille messages are always flush left and are concatenated if they
contain several sentences. To read them out scroll with the display
keys D5 or D2. When the message has been read out it can be deleted
by pressing a cursor routing key.
The display is not blank, but gives the general information “Daisy
Reader” and the current time.

This message can be announced with the “Where am I” command

“Minus+B7B8b9” or “Windowskey+Minus.”
20. Clocks
For time measurement and alarms, Pronto offers various timers: a
count down timer, a stopwatch and four alarm clocks.
To select one of them open the Pronto menu and select “Timers”, or
use the shortcut “t+B7B8B9” or “Windowskey+t”.

20.1 Timer
The timer allows a specific time to be counted down, and is accurate to
the second. A tone is emitted when the end time is reached.
The main view of the timer contains various edit boxes and buttons to
set the time, watch the time pass when the timer is running, and to
stop and start the timer.

To start the timer, proceed as follows:

1. in the Pronto menu select “Timers>Timer (count down)” or press S2
three times briefly
2. the main view of the timer will open at an “elapsed” field giving the
running time in minutes and seconds. When opened for the first time
or when the timer is stopped, this will read 00:00:00.
3. the timer duration is preset to 10 minutes (00:10:00). This can be
changed in the “Set duration” edit box to a maximum of 23:59:59.
4. select “Start” to switch the timer on and begin the countdown. The
“Start” option is no longer available and “Stop” appears instead, which
allows the running timer to be stopped.
5. during countdown the “elapsed” field shows how much time has
elapsed starting from 0 and ascending, and the “remaining” field
shows the time remaining by counting down.
6. when the end time is reached a tone will be emitted once. The
elapsed time field will have been reset to 00:00 and the “Start” button
is once again available.
7. “OK” or “Cancel” will close only the timer’s dialog; if the timer is
running it will continue and emit a tone when the end time is reached.

The following shortcuts are available in the open timer (main view):
- start timer = “s+B9” or “Alt+s”
- stop timer = “o+B9” or Alt+o”
- when timer is running, announce remaining time = “r+B9” or “Alt+r”
(the Braille display continues counting)
- when timer is running, announce time elapsed = “e+B9” or “Alt+e”
(the Braille display continues counting).

A running timer will continue to run if Pronto is switched off with S4 or,
depending on the settings, it switches to standby mode because of the
automatic shutdown. When the end time is reached the timer alarm
will sound.

A running timer can only be stopped by selecting “Stop”.

Hints for inputting the time in the “Set duration” edit box:
- input the time in HH:MM:SS
- if no hours are to be input, input MM:SS
- if a figure greater than 60 is input for minutes, the corresponding
time in hours and minutes will appear
- the timer can run for a maximum of 23:59:59 hours; longer periods
are not possible
- if an invalid time is input, the time will be reset to 00:10 (i.e. 10
seconds).

20.2 Stopwatch
The stopwatch allows time to be recorded and is accurate to the
second. It counts from 0 upwards and can be consulted, paused and
restarted at any time. The count can also be accompanied with
acoustic signals.

The main view of the stopwatch contains like a dialog various edit
boxes and buttons to follow the passage of time, consult the end or
interim time, and to start, pause and stop the stopwatch. All
commands can also be executed by selecting its entries from the
command menu.

To start the stopwatch, proceed as follows:

1. in the Pronto menu select “Timers / Stop watch” or press S2 twice
quickly
2. the main view of the stopwatch will open at a “Time” field giving the
elapsed time in hours, minutes and seconds. When opened for the first
time or when a new measurements is begun, this will read 00:00:00.
When a measurement is stopped or paused, the end or interim time
will be displayed.
3. press the “Start” button to start the stop watch and begin the
measurement; the “Start” button will no longer be available, and the
main view will now display “Pause” and “Stop” buttons which can be
used to pause or stop the measurement. When paused, a “resume”
button will appear in the place of the “Pause” button, which will
resume the measurement.
4. the time measurement can be accompanied with acoustic signals.
Open the command menu by pressing S3 brievly or ALT key, then
select
“tone signals” and then the corresponding entry.
5. The “Announce End time/Interim” button opens a message which,
during a measurement, gives the interim time at the moment the
command is executed, when the measurement is paused gives the
interim final time, and when the stopwatch is stopped, gives the final
time. Close the dialog with “OK” to return to the main view.
7. “OK” or “Cancel” will close the stopwatch dialog. If the stopwatch
has been started it will continue to measure time, and any set tones
will continue to be emitted; to stop it, the stopwatch’s main view must
be opened again (Pronto menu/Timers/Stop watch)
8. if Pronto is switched off with S4 when the stop watch is running, the
stop watch will continue silently
9. to stop the measurement, press “Stop” in the main view

Within the open stop watch (main view) the following shortcuts are
available:
- start stopwatch = B4 or Control+Space or “Alt+s”
- stop stopwatch = B6 or Control+Space or “Alt+o”
- pause measurement / resume = B5 or Space or “Alt+p” / “Alt+r”
- consult end or interim time = B8 or Shift+Control+z
- when stopwatch is running, follow time on the Braille display (“Time”
field) = “t+B9” or “Alt+t”.

- Seconds beep on = B1, control+1

- 10 seconds beep on = B2, control+2
- Minute anouncement on = B3, control+3
- No beeps = B7, control+0
These shortcuts can pressed during measurement.

Once started the stop watch will continue if Pronto is switched off with
S4, if another application is selected, or, depending on the automatic
shutdown settings, if Pronto switches to standby mode.
If the stop watch’s main view is still present in the foreground and time
is being measured, the automatic shutdown will not work.

20.3 Alarm Clock

Four independent alarm clocks can be set up here. Each can be set
individually with its own wake-up time and with the day of the week it
should ring. The names of the four alarm clocks, which are also
announced at wake-up time, can be determined by the user. The
alarms are switched off by default.

To set an alarm, proceed as follows:

1. In the Pronto menu select “Timers > Alarm clocks”. A dialog will
open displaying the names and status of the four alarms.
2. To amend the settings of, for example, Alarm 1, select its button .
3. Another dialog will open. Use the Check box “Active” to switch the
alarm on or off
4. In the “Name” edit box the alarm (Alarm 1) can have another name
assigned, e.g. “normal alarm”.
5. Input the wake time in the next edit box; 08:00 is the default time
and can be overwritten
6. Finally, use the appropriate check box to determine the day the
alarm should go off
7. The “Sound on” check box is activated by default, so that a signal is
emitted whenever information is given via speech output and on the
Braille display
8. the sound for the alarm can be selected from a list of short wav-files.
The path will be given in the “Sound file” field.
9. select “Choose signal” if a different sound is to be set as the alarm
signal. A file list will open – move up and down the list to select the
desired file (cf. File manager). The TIMALARM.WAV, BELL.WAV or
COCK.WAV files are recommended. Press B9 or Return to close the file
list; the new alarm is now selected and its path given in the “Sound
file” field
10. Confirm with “OK” to finish the settings and exit the alarm dialog
with “OK”.

When wake-up time arrives Pronto will sound the selected alarm,
opens a dialog and play its corresponding message.
If the alarm is ignored Pronto will sound the alarm every 10 seconds for
up to 3 minutes.
Press any key accept B9 or Return to stop the message and close the
dialog – Pronto will ‘go back to sleep’ but will sound the alarm again 10
seconds later.

To quit the alarm and turn it off, press B9 or Return. Or confirm the OK
button in the dialog.

NB: If you select a different file as the alarm or create your own (Voice
Recorder > Tools), make sure that the playing time of the wav-file is
not longer then 3 seconds, otherwise errors may arise in the alarm
and/or when working with Pronto.
21. Internet Radio
Pronto’s Internet radio offers the following options:
- radio station search on Server www.shoutcast.com, (scanning),
whereby the search can be filtered individually for the current Top 30
stations, genre and/or bitrate
- automatic saving of the first 10 stations found (preset), or manual
saving of specific stations
- jumping between 10 individual stations
- simple switching between the preset stations and the found stationes.
- start, stop and pause functions with a time buffer.
- display of detailed information about the current station (name of
station, genre, bitrate, position number).

21.1 Requirements and general remarks

21.1.1 Requirements for using the Internet radio

application
To use the Internet radio Pronto must be connected to the Internet.
Pronto thus acquires an IP-address and uses it to build a connection to
the server from which the required radio station information will be
taken.

There are various ways of connecting Pronto to the Internet:

a) USB, ActiveSync, PC: use the USB cable and ActiveSync to connect
Pronto to a PC which has a live Internet connection, e.g. a PC with
Windows XP Home, DSL 2000, Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5 with a guest or
full partnership;

b) Ethernet adapter (Ethernet card), network cable, and an Internet

connection within range;

c) Bluetooth, GPRS, mobile telephone: GPRS connection via a

compatible mobile telephone with the appropriate tariff which has
Internet connection functionality.
(Given the low transfer rate, this connection type should only be used
with radio stations with a maximum bitrate of 64kB/s, otherwise
permanent errors can occur when playing the station).

21.1.2 General remarks on the Internet connection of

Pronto’s Internet radio
Pronto’s Internet radio accesses the www.shoutcast.com server. As
soon as the search for radio stations is launched Pronto accesses and
plays the stations available on this server. Radio stations broadcast in
mp3 format can be accessed and played.

The selection can be filtered and limited according to various criteria

(Top 30, genre, bitrate).

Information on the radio stations found, the individual filter settings for
genre, Top 30 or bitrate, and information on the saved radio stations
and their save location is stored in Pronto’s RAM (File:
Flashdisk/USER/IROptions.xml).
These values are saved until the system is reset (System reset).

Pronto outputs messages about these stations in the “Internet radio”

application using the information contained in these xml files. These
messages, given in Braille or speech, however, say nothing about the
accessibility or availability of the station itself.

When one of the stations is selected Pronto sends a request to the

server to access it, and the server then controls the transmission if the
station is available.

Whether or not the station is available and can be transmitted depends

on various factors:
- the relevant server must be available (online connection to the
Internet).
- the server must have sufficient capacity to deal with the request and
allow transmission.
- the number of users accessing the same server simultaneously can
lead to transmission failure.
- the speed of the Internet connection between the server and Pronto’s
Internet radio can affect the transmission and availability of a radio
station.

21.2 Opening the Internet radio application and

listening to a radio station
Below you will find a brief description on how to launch the Internet
radio. Available radio stations are searched for automatically and
played.
The saving of specific stations, and the settings and filters for bitrate,
Top 30 and genre will be explained later.

1. connect Pronto to the Internet, e.g. use a USB cable and ActiveSync
to connect to a PC logged on to the Internet.
2. open the Pronto menu by pressing S3 or Windows key and select
“Internet radio”;
3. you will be taken to the main window of the Internet radio. When
accessing it for the first time you will hear a welcome message
containing useful information. If it has already been accessed and a
station played, you will hear information regarding the last station to
be played.
4. open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key and select
“Manage radio stations”, and then the submenu “Scan for radio
stations”,
5. a dialog will open – select “Scan for radio stations”.
6. a further dialog will open. Check that “Only top 30 radio stations”
check box has been selected – check it if not.
7. select “Start scanning”. Pronto will automatically connect to the
Internet radio’s server and will transmit the search request to the
server.
8. short signals will be emitted during the search, until you receive a
message informing you how many stations have been found. Close this
message with “OK”.
9. you will be taken back to the dialog where the bitrate, genre and
Top 30 can be set. Close the dialog.
10. you will be taken back to the first dialog. The list will display the
radio stations found which can be selected by moving to the right or
left. The selected station will be played.
11. close the dialog to return to the main window of the Internet radio
application. The previously selected station will be played.

21.2.1 Select and play radio stations from the main

window
The found radio stations are listed one after the other, and can be
accessed by moving to the right or left. When the next station is
reached, the previous one will stop playing and the new one will start.

NB: when a station is temporarily unavailable you will hear a

corresponding message.

The name of the station selected and its position in the list of found
stations can be consulted with the “Where am I?” command
“Minus+B7B8B9” or “Windows key+minus” This information will also
be given in Braille.
21.2.2 Play, start, stop, pause and resume in the main
window
Moving to the right/left will access the radio stations found and play
them.

B9 or the Return key will play the last station to be selected. If this
station is already being played, there will be a short pause before play
resumes. This command is valid for the radio stations selected by
moving to the right/left in the main window, i.e. the selected station
will be played.

B0 or the Space key will pause or resume the current station. This
pause function requires a certain time buffer. This means that play will
recommence from the same place following a short break, even though
the station will have continued playing on the Internet during the
break.

The shortcut B9B7B8 or “Control+Return” will stop the current station

– a corresponding message will be output. If the message is not output,
use the “Where am I?” function (“Minus+B7B8B9” or Windows
key+minus) to hear it.

Moving up/down allows the ten saved radio stations to be accessed

and played, as long as the stations have been saved or preset to this
location.

Inputting a number between 0 and 9 will directly start a station preset

at this particular position.

The Start, Pause and Stop functions can also be accessed from the
command menu:
1. open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key.
2. to select the next/previous found or saved station, select
“Navigation” and then the relevant entry.
3. to start playing the found station or to pause/resume or stop it,
select “Playback” and then the relevant entry.

21.2.3 Save and play radio stations

Up to 10 found radio stations can be saved - a list of your favourite
stations can thus be created. These stored stations are also available
when (following changes to the settings for genre or bitrate) other
stations are found and selected in the main window by moving to the
right/left.
There are two ways to preset stations to the 10 positions:

a) Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key and

selecting “Preset radio station options > Automatic preset”. This saves
the first 10 stations to positions 0 to 9.

b) in the mainwindo, select the station you wish to save by moving to

the right/left, and assign a save position to it, i.e. press the desired
number together with B8B9 or the Control key.
A short tone will be emitted when the station has been saved.

Both these methods will overwrite previously saved stations at these

positions without warning.

To play a saved or preset station, either move up/down in the list of

saved stations on the main page, or type in the number of the save
position.

NB: If the 10 positions are not all occupied, it is not possible to

navigate all the way up or down the list. When a position is reached
that has no station assigned, an appropriate message will be
announced.

The position number and name of the saved station can be consulted
with the “Where am I?” function (“Minus-B7B8B9” or Windows
key+minus).

21.2.4 Detailed information on the station being played

The name of the station being played, its genre and bitrate can be
consulted. Proceed as follows:

1. open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key and select
“Info/Current station”,
2. a dialog will open with a list showing the name of the station, its
genre and bitrate.
3. move to the right or left in the list to access these three entries.
4. close the dialog to return to the main window..

21.3 Set genre and bitrate as search criteria and

launch a new search
Two dialogs can be used to select “Genre”, “Bitrate” and “Top 30” as
search criteria, and to launch a new search with these settings. How to
open these dialogs and an explanation of their respective entries will
be described in the following chapters.

21.3.1 The “Radio station” dialog

To open this dialog, proceed as follows:
1. from the main window of the Internet radio, open the command
menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key.
2. select “Manage radio stations/Scan for radio stations”, Make your
settings.
3. select “Close” to return to the main window of the Internet radio.

The dialog contains the following elements:

- the “Radio station” list:
this list shows the name of the found radio stations. Move to the
right/left to access the individual entries. The current selection will be
played.
This list contains the same stations that can be accessed in the main
window by moving to the right/left. When navigating through the list
the selected station will always be played. If the station is temporarily
unavailable you will hear a corresponding message.
If no radio stations are found to fit the selected criteria (genre, bitrate,
Top 30) the list will contain no entries and you should relaunch your
search with different criteria.

- the “Info” field:

Four pieces of information are given about the selected station: its
place in relation to the total number of stations found, the name of the
station, its bitrate and genre.

- the “Scan for radio stations” button:

this option will open a further dialog to set the genre, bitrate and Top
30 criteria and to launch a new search for radio stations. The elements
in this dialog will be described in more detail below.

- the “Close” button:

this option will close the dialog and take you back to the main window
of the Internet radio. The selected station will be played.

21.3.2 The “Scan for radio stations” dialog

To open this dialog, proceed as follows:
1. from the main window of the Internet radio open the command
menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key.
2. select “Manage radio stations/Scan for radio stations”.
3. in the dialog select “Scan for radio stations”.
4. a further dialog will open where the genre, bitrate and Top 30
search criteria can be selected, and a new search launched.
5. select “Close” to return to the previous dialog.

The dialog contains the following elements:

- the “Only Top 30 radio stations” check box:
Here you can select a maximum limit of 30 radio stations. It is
recommended that you check this check box if no genre and specific
bitrate are to be selected as search criteria. The server decides which
stations belong to the Top 30.

- the “Filter by Genre” check box:

Here you can decide if the search is to be limited to only those radio
stations which correspond to a certain genre. If checked, a list of
available genres will appear in the dialog.

- the “Genre” list:

Move to the right/left to access and select the available genres. The
entries are arranged from left to right in alphabetical order – a specific
entry can be selected quickly by pressing the first character(s) of the
name of the entry.
If the list is empty you can start a search for “Top 30 radio stations
only”. Then deactivate the “Only Top 30” check box. The list will then
contain some entries – use this setting to select the desired genre and
relaunch the search with this setting.

- the “Filter by bitrate” check box:

Use this check box to determine that only those stations with a specific
bitrate (kilobytes per second) should be located.
If this check box is schecked, the dialog will contain a list with the
available bitrates.

- the “bitrate” list:

Move to the right/left to access and select the available bitrates. Input
a character or the first digits of an entry to access a specific entry
quickly.
If the list is empty you can start a search for “Top 30 radio stations
only”. The list will then contain some entries – select the desired
bitrate and relaunch the search with this setting.

- the “Start scanning” button:

Use this button to start a search according to Genre, bitrate or “Top 30
only”. You will receive a message regarding the number of stations
found. Confirm this message with “OK” to return to the dialog.
If no stations are found, check the genre, bitrate or Top 30 settings,
make any changes and relaunch the search.
If the search is successful, close the dialog to return to the previous
dialog. Here you can consult the name of, and information about, the
stations found or close the dialog to return to the main window of the
Internet radio (see Chapter 21.3.1).

- the “Close” button:

Confirm this button to close the dialog and return to the previous
dialog.

21.4 Settings for output and background playing

When radio stations are playing it can be distracting to have speech
output and the radio running together when menus or dialogs are
opened.

The default setting is to pause the radio automatically as soon as a

command menu is opened, another command is executed with
shortcuts, or another Pronto application accessed.

This setting can be changed.

Proceed as follows:
1. from the main window of the Internet radio open the command
menu by pressing S3 briefly or Alt key.
2. select “Tools/Preferences”.
3. a dialog will open.
4. Check “Play in background” if the Internet radio should continue
playing when a menu, dialog or other application is opened. The
speech output and radio will then run simultaneously.
If the output is to be stopped when a menu, dialog or other application
is opened, change the status of this check box to “not checked”. The
output will then automatically continue after a menu or dialog is
closed.
5. confirm with “OK”. You will then be taken back to the main window
of the Internet radio.
22. Email Client
22.1 Introduction and requirements
You should have experience of PC-based email packages such as
Outlook, and be familiar with their functions and terminology.

22.1.1 General remarks

Pronto’s email application allows you to call up, read and reply to
emails, and to write and send new emails.
Connecting Pronto to the Internet means that you can email from a
fixed position, and connecting to a mobile ‘phone with GPRS means
that you can email on the move.

The email application offers the following functions:

- setting up email accounts for one or more POP mailboxes. A valid POP
mailbox must be set up/registered with an email provider.
- viewing and sending emails via ActiveSync or with GPRS via a mobile
‘phone.
- managing various folders
- moving or deleting files in folders
- incoming emails can be read in “Text only”, “RTF” or “HTML” formats
- after being picked up, emails can be kept in the POP mailbox on the
server or automatically deleted from it.

Important:
- Synchronising with other email packages such as Microsoft Outlook,
Outlook Express, Lotus Notes, etc is not possible.
- Emails can only be received/sent via POP mailboxes.
- Pronto currently does not support communication over secure
connections (SSL).
- Email accounts called up over Webmail applications, IMAP mailboxes
or email accounts over Microsoft Exchange Server are not supported.
- Attachments can currently not be sent or received. Attachments on
incoming emails will not be displayed by Pronto and can neither be
saved nor opened.

22.1.2 Requirements for using the email application

To use the email application you must have a POP mailbox and a valid
email address, and Pronto must be connected to the Internet. Pronto
thus acquires an IP address and uses this to build a connection to the
email server from which incoming emails can be called up (POP server)
and to which outgoing emails are sent (SMTP server).
There are several ways of connecting Pronto to the Internet:
a) USB, ActiveSync, PC: use the USB cable and ActiveSync.to connect
Pronto to a PC with a live Internet connection.
e.g. a PC with Windows XP Home, DSL 2000, Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5,
guest or full partnership.

b) CF Ethernet Adapter (CF Ethernet Card), network cable, Internet

connection in range.

c) Bluetooth, GPRS, mobile ‘phone: a GPRS connection to a compatible

mobile ‘phone with an appropriate tariff, which allows for connection to
the Internet.
NB: you may incur supplementary charges, depending on your mobile
‘phone.

22.1.3 Requirements for the email account (Mail server)

As Pronto can only work with email accounts which run over POP
mailboxes, it is necessary to set one up if you do not already have one.
Each valid email address which is compatible to the POP3 standard has
an assigned email account on the provider’s mail server. When setting
up an email account the email address and access data (password,
POP server, SMTP server) will be assigned. These details will also be
required to register the email account in Pronto. These are the same
access data that are required to build an email account in Outlook on
your PC.

POP mailboxes can usually be set up on the email provider's website,

e.g. www.gmx.de, where the corresponding links for setting up an
email account can be selected.

NB:
Microsoft Exchange Server, IMAP or Webmail mailboxes, and
synchronisation with other email packages (Outlook, Outlook Express,
Lotus Notes, etc) are not supported.

22.1.4 Summary of the access data for some email

providers
This chapter contains information on the most common email providers
and the relevant access data for POP servers, SMTP servers and user
names.
(The list does not claim to be exhaustive and no responsibility can be
taken for accuracy. Date: 03/2008).
Specific personal data such as your password are given in the
introductory email from the relevant provider when a mailbox is set up.

- 1&1
User name: sample.user@your-webhosting.domain.de
POP Server: pop.1und1.de
SMTP Server: smtp.1und1.de

- Alice
User name: sample.user@alice-dsl.de
POP-Server: mail.alice-dsl.de
SMTP-Server: mail.alice-dsl.dede

- Arcor
User name: sample.user@arcor.de
POP Server: pop3.arcor.de
SMTP-Server: mail.arcor.de

- Compuserve
User name:
POP-Server: sample.user pop.compuserve.de
SMTP-Server: smtp.compuserve.de

- Connectweb
User name: Customer number (web …)
POP Server:pop-as-6.de
SMTP-Server: mail.as-6.de

- DirectBox
User name: sample.user
POP Server: pop3.directbox.com
SMTP-Server: smtp.directbox.com

- GMX
User name: Customer number
POP-Server: pop.gmx.net mail.
SMTP-Server: mail.gmx.net

- Google GMail
User name: Sample.user@gmail.com
POP-Server: pop.gmail.com
SMTP-Server: smtp.gmail.com
NB. These accounts cannot be used because they use a secure
connection (SSL), which curretly is not supported by Pronto.
- Epost
User name: Sample.user
POP-Server: mail.epost.de
SMTP-Server: mail.epost.de

- Firemail
User name: Sample.user
POP-Server: pop.firemail.de
SMTP-Server: smtp.firemail.de

- Freenet
User name: Sample.user
POP-Server: pop3.freenet.de
SMTP-Server: mx.freenet.de

- Lycos Mail
User name: Sample.user@lycos.de
POP-Server: pop.lycos.de
SMTP-Server: smtp.lycos.de

- O2 Online
User name: Sample.user@o2online.de
POP-Server: pop.o2online.de
SMTP-Server: mail.o2online.de

- Tele2
User name: Sample.user
POP-Server: pop.tele2.de
SMTP-Server: smtp.tele2.de

- Tiscali
User name: Sample.user
POP-Server: pop.tiscali.de
SMTP-Server: smtp.tiscali.de

- T-Online
The following data are only valid if you are also logged on to the
Internet with the same T-Online access data:
User name: User name and password are the same
POP-Server: popmail.t-online.de
SMTP-Server: smtpmail.t-online.de

- T-Online
The data of a T-Online mailbox can only be called up when you are also
logged on to the Internet through this T-Online account. This then
allows you to call up emails from T-Online via GPRS when you are on
the move.
Sending emails from other email accounts is possible once you have
logged on, but there is a cost implication with T-Online. The SMTP
server must then be called smtprelay.t-online.de.
Take your log-on data from the separate log-on to T-Online.

- Versatel
User name: Dial-up name
POP-Server: pop3.versatel.de
SMTP-Server: smtp.versatel.de

- Web.de
User name: Sample.user
POP-Server: pop3.web.de
SMTP-Server: smtp.web.de

- Yahoo Mail
User name: Sample.user
POP-Server: pop.mail.yahoo.de
SMTP-Server: smtp.mail.yahoo.de

- Hotmail
Unfortunately Hotmail does not offer POP and SMTP servers, so
sending and receiving emails on Pronto is not possible.

An article on this topic with a great deal of further information and a

comprehensive list of German email providers and all the appropriate
data can be accessed at http://www.tanmar.info/content/view/21/49.

22.1.5 Connection problems and solutions

When sending or receiving emails errors can occur for various reasons
– Pronto sends a general message. Check the following possibilities:

a) Pronto sends an error message when receiving and/or sending

emails.
You have lost your Internet connection (GPRS via a mobile ‘phone or
ActiveSync on the PC). Reconnect to the Internet.

b) emails cannot be sent although it used to be possible under the

same conditions.
For security reasons some email providers require emails to be picked
up (access to the POP mailbox) before allowing emails to be sent
(access to the SMTP server).

c) when connected to the Internet via ActiveSync, emails can be

received from the POP server, but cannot be sent over the SMTP
server.
The data processor is integrated into the network which is preventing
access to the POP/SMTP server, or a live anti-virus package such as
McAfee is blocking the SMTP server port. If possible, make an
exception and access the network configuration or the settings for the
anti-virus package and/or Firewall POP Port 110 and SMTP Port 25, or
use other available ports and register them in your email account.

d) emails can be sent but not received.

To enable multiple attempts to log on to a mail server within x
minutes, some email providers require an email account to have been
paid for or require the free version to be used. This is the case for
Freenet, Web.de, Yahoo and some other providers.
If a repeated log in within x minutes (usually within 15 minutes)
happens with one of these providers, access to the POP server will not
be allowed, which means that the Pronto email application will send
the message “Errors with incoming messages”.

e) no access to the POP server (receiving emails) with a mobile

‘phone/GPRS connection.
An Internet connection does not work with the same provider with
which the email account has been set up. Some providers block access
to “foreign” POP and SMT servers.

22.2 Pronto’s mail application

22.2.1 Open the email application

In the Pronto menu select “Email client” or use the shortcut
“E+B7B8B9“ or “Windows key+E” to open the email application.

Pronto checks to see if there is a “Mail” folder on the inserted storage

card and opens it when confirmed. The email application can only be
opened and used if this folder is present on the storage card.
If the storage card has no “Mail” folder you will asked if one should be
created. It is recommended that emails are always saved to the same
storage card, and that if you use several cards keep the mail folder on
just one of them.

When opening the email application for the first time the data saved in
the “Mail” folder will be loaded. Depending on the size and number of
saved emails, this can take a while.
22.2.2 The main view for email and the email folder
The main view of the email application has two levels:
a) a list of the various mail folders (folderlist)
b) a list of the emails in a selected mail folder (message list).

Move from one level to the other with: B9B4B6 and B4B1B3, or D4D6
and D1D3 or Tab and Shift+Tab.
This will open the selected mail folder and you can access the
messages contained within it.

Pronto remembers which level was the last to be selected and offers it
as soon as the email application is next opened.

The folder list contains the following default folders: Deleted items,
Inbox (Incoming mail), Outbox (Outgoing mail) and Sent items.
Additional folders can also be created.
Within the list move to the right/left to access the individual folders.
For each folder selected you can see the total number of emails it
contains and how many are new (unread).

In the selected folder the individual emails are listed one above the
other and can be accessed by moving up/down. The emails are
arranged by date and the first (uppermost) entry is the most recent
email.
Press B9, D6 or Return to open the selected email.

The following default indicators give the status of an email:

N new = indicates a new, unread email
R read = indicates that an email has been opened and thus read.
M marked = indicates that an email has been marked (highlighted) for
copying, moving or deletion
P replied = indicates that the mail has been answered and a reply has
been sent to the sender of the email.
W forwarded = indicates that an email has been forwarded to another
address.

22.2.3 Receiving and sending messages

Open command menu and select “Actions” > “Sending receiving” and
then select “send and receive all accounts” or use the relevant
shortcut.“
M+B8B9 or CTRL+M will send all emails in the mail outbox, and
retrieve all email from the POP mailbox for which an email account has
been set up in Pronto.
(Pronto must be connected to the Internet).

Sending and receiving can take a while - signals and appropriate

messages will be given. You will also be told how many emails have
been received, which you must confirm with OK.

Received emails can be found in the "Inbox" mail folder (incoming

mail).

NB: Pronto retrieves all emails from the POP mailbox without checking
to see if they have already been retrieved, so that the Inbox can
include duplicates.

Sent emails are automatically moved to the "Sent items" folder.

It is also possible to separate emails for send only or receive only. To

do this, in the command menu go to “Actions/Sending Receiving/Send"
or "Actions/Sending Receiving/ Receive".

22.2.4 Open and read emails

1. In the folder list move to the right/left to access the folder containing
the desired emails e.g. Inbox
2. Move to the emails in the folder by pressing B9B1B3 or Tab.
3. Go up or down to the desired email and press B9 or Return
4. The email will open in the word processor. All the word processor’s
reading commands are available; write-protection is switched on.

NB:
Emails can be opened and displayed in HTML, RTF or Text-only
formats, although it is possible that in the text body of HTML or TXT
formats, diacritics may not be displayed correctly.

22.2.5 An email’s header and its data

Each email has a header. It contains details of the subject, sender,
recipient, and copies forwarded (CC and BCC).
Other information may be available depending on whether the email
has been opened or is new, or whether the email has been opened
with the forward or reply function.

The header is built like a dialog.

From the text body of the email you can access the header by pressing
B9B1B3, D1D3 or Shift+Tab.

The “Close” button in the header closes the email and will take you
back to the main view of the email application.

The “Save” button closes a new, answered or forwarded email and

moves it to the Outbox of the email application. You will then be in the
email application’s Outbox.

22.2.6 Email functions in the word processor

As soon as an email is opened it will be presented as a document in
the word processor. Additional commands and functions are now
available. These can be accessed from the command menu
Tools/Email, or by using the appropriate shortcuts.

- Header 8+B9B8 / F8
This command jumps from the email text to the header and displays
the subject. The header is similar to a dialog containing various
elements. You can access the subject, sender address, receiver
address, copies sent on and hidden copies fields, as well as the “Close”
and “Save” options.
You can also jump to the header of an email from the body of the text
with B9B1B3, D1D3 or Shift+Tab.

- Save 7+B8B9 / F7
This command saves an email to the Outbox. This command is
particularly useful if you want to resend the email as a reply or to
forward it.
It can also be used to send any open document or a word-processed
text as a new email. In this case the header opens so that you can type
in the recipient address and other data.
In the email’s header, if you select “Save” the email will be saved to
the Outbox.

- Close 4+B8B9 / F4
This command closes an open email. If the email was intended to be a
reply or new email, this action will be cancelled and abandoned.

- Reply
This command allows an open email to be turned into a reply whereby
the sender address automatically becomes the recipient address.

- Reply to all
This command allows an open email to become a reply email, whereby
the sender address and other addresses which happen to be in the
“CC” and “BCC” fields automatically become the recipient addresses in
the header.

- Reply to sender only

This command allows an open email to be become a reply email
whereby the sender address automatically becomes the recipient
address in the header. If the email was sent to a mailing list, the reply
will not go to the whole list but only to the original sender.

- Forward
This command allows an open email to be sent to a new recipient.

22.3 Opening an email account

You can set up several email accounts for different email addresses
and POP mailboxes. If more than one email address has been set up as
an email account, the first to be set up will be used as the default
account. Emails will be sent via this account in preference to other
accounts. Another account can, however, be set up as the default
account. The first entry in the account list is always the default
account.

In the header of an email that is about to be sent, there is a list headed

"Via" which displays all the accounts set up. Here you can select or
check the account with which the message is to be sent.

To set up an email account, proceed as follows:

1. In the email application open the command menu and select
“Tools/Accounts”
2. The “Accounts” dialog will open. Existing accounts will be displayed
in a list.
3. Go to “Add” to set up a new account.
4. Another dialog will open where you must input the access details for
the email account (account name, name, email address, POP server,
SMTP server, user name, password).
5. Decide whether or not a retrieved email should be deleted from the
POP server or kept as a copy.
6. Close the dialog with “OK”. You will be taken back to the first dialog
and the list will display the new email account with the name you
assigned to it.
7. Use the “Edit” option to view and edit the details of an account
selected from the list. Use the “Remove” option to delete the account
selected and use "Set as default" to determine whether or not the
selected account is to be used as the default account for sending
emails.
The details of the accounts set up are saved in Pronto (Flashdisk /
USER / EmailAccountsDataAndSettings.xml).

22.3.1 Elements of the “Account” dialog.

Below you will find the individual dialog elements and an explanation
of how to set up and edit an email account.

- “Accounts”
This list displays all the accounts that have already been set up. Move
to the right/left to access the individual accounts. The default account
is at the beginning of the list and is annotated accordingly.

- “Set as default”
This sets the selected account as the default account.

- “Add”
This opens the dialog for setting up a new email account. You will need
to know the access data for the relevant POP mailbox of the mail
provider.

- “Edit”
This opens the dialog for editing and setting up data for the account
selected.

- “Remove”
This deletes the account selected in the list.

22.3.2 The “Add” and “Edit” dialog options

- “Account name”
Type the name by which the email account is to be displayed when
consulting and sending emails.

- “Your name”
Type the name to be used as the sender name. The recipients will see
this name instead of, or in addition to, your email address.

-“Address”
Type your email address. e.g. joebloggs@providername.co.uk
This will be used for outgoing emails. The recipients will only be able to
reply if this email address is correct.

- “POP3”
Type the address of the POP server for your POP mailbox. The POP3
mailbox is the electronic letter box which contains your incoming
emails. It is almost like the letter-box on your front door – your mail
comes through it and must be picked up. Ask your email provider for
the address. See also Chapter 22.1.4

-“POP port”
Type the port number of the POP server. The default value 110 is pre-
defined and can generally be overwritten. Depending on the
connection type (network) and/or your firewall/anti-virus software you
may need to use another port number.
.
- “SMTP”
Type the address of the SMTP server for your mailbox (outgoing mail).
It is similar to a post office where you take letters to send. Ask your
email provider for the address. See also Chapter 22.1.4

- “SMTP port”
Type the port number of the SMTP server. The default value 25 is pre-
defined and can generally be overwritten. Depending on the
connection type (network) and/or your firewall/anti-virus software you
may need to use another port number.

-“User name”
Type in the user name or log-on name given to you by your provider
when the POP mailbox was set up. User names and email addresses
are often the same.
It will be used for logging on to the POP server.
NB: If the “Different user data for the outgoing mail server” has not
been selected, this user name will also be used for logging on to the
SMTP server.

-“Password”
Type in the password you selected when setting up the POP mailbox,
or which you took from the documentation given to you by your
provider. This is input in a secure mode, i.e. the text will display as
hidden.
NB: If the “Different user data for the outgoing mail server” has not
been selected, this password will also be used for logging on to the
SMTP server.

- “Repeat password”
For security reasons the same password must be typed in again. This is
input in a secure mode, i.e. the text will display as hidden.

- “Different user data for the outgoing mail server”

Checking this option will open further dialog elements where a
separate user name and SMTP password can be input. The data is
input in the same manner as access data for the POP server. Generally
the incoming and outgoing mail servers have the same access data, so
that this option does not need to be selected. Ask your mail provider if
different access data are required.

-“Keep all messages on the server”

If this check box is selected, once emails have been retrieved
(received) they will be kept in the incoming POP mailbox and can be
retrieved from a different email application.
NB: Pronto always retrieves all the emails from the mailbox, so that
when retrieving emails once again all of them will be retrieved again.
If this check box is not selected, all emails will be deleted from the POP
mailbox on the server once they have been retrieved.

22.4 Writing an email

There are two ways of writing, answering and forwarding an email:

a) open the word processor and use the functions in Command

menu/Tools/Email
b) open the email application and use the functions in Command
menu/Actions and command menu/File

NB: The word processor option is only available when the inserted –
storage card has the “Mail” folder on it and the email application is
open.

22.4.1 Writing a new email

a) In the word processor:

1. Write the text

2. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key and
select Tools/Email
3. Select “Save”
4. A header is added to the text and you will be taken to the field
where you input the email address of the recipient
5. Fill in the “Subject“field and other appropriate fields in the header
6. In the header select “Save” or use the shortcut 7+B8B9 or F7 to
save the email in the Outbox.

b) From the email application

1. Open the email application, you will be taken to the main view
(folder list or email list)
2. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly and select
File/New/Email
3. A blank email will open in the word processor. You will be taken to
the field in the header where you type in the email address of the
recipient
4. Fill in the “Subject“field and other appropriate fields in the header
6. In the header select “Save” or use the shortcut 7+B8B9 or F7 to
save the email in the Outbox.

22.4.2 Replying to an email

Just like writing a new email, you can use the functions in the word
processor (Tools/Email) or the email application (Actions/Replies).

There are 3 reply functions.

By default, all reply functions are opened so that you write your
message/reply at the beginning of the text, with the original message
appearing a few lines further down. In the header the email address of
the sender will now become the address of the recipient.

1) “Reply” is the simplest of the functions.

In main view go to the desired email and in the command menu select
“Actions/Replies/Reply", or open the desired email and in the
command menu of the word processor select “Tools/Email/Reply”.

2) With “Reply to all” all the email addresses which appeared in the
original email as sender, recipient of a copy (CC) or hidden copy (BCC)
will become the new recipients. In the main view go to the desired
email and in the command menu select (Actions/Replies/Reply to all”,
or open the desired email and in the command menu of the word
processor select “Tools/Email/Reply to all”.

3) With “Reply to sender only” the reply will be sent to the sender of
the email only. If the email came from a mailing list, the reply will not
be sent to the list but just to the sender of the original email.
In main view go to the desired email and in the command menu select
“Actions/Replies/Reply to sender only", or open the desired email and
in the command menu of the word processor select “Tools/Email/Reply
to sender only”.

22.4.3 Forwarding an email

With forwarding, an email can be forwarded to the email address of
another recipient. The text body contains the original message which
you can expand with your own text and then save the email in the
Outbox.
Just like writing a new email, you can use the functions in the word
processor (Tools/Email) or the email application (Actions/Replies).

In main view go to the desired email and in the command menu select
“Actions/Forward", or open the desired email and in the command
menu of the word processor select “Tools/Email/Forward”.
The email’s header will open and you can type in the email address of
the recipient.

22.5 Deleting an email

To delete an email proceed as follows:
1. In main view call up the list of mail folders.
2. Move to the right/left to access the folder containing the desired
email.
3. Move to the message list by pressing B9B1B3 or Tab.
NB: With the entries in the command menu under “Actions/Switch to”
or with the assigned shortcuts, you can jump directly to the emails in
the Inbox or Outbox.
4. Move up/down to the desired email.
5. In the command menu select “Edit/Delete” or use the general delete
key (B9B7 or the delete key).
5. After answering the security question the email will now be in the
“Deleted items” folder.
6. To delete an email permanently, it must be deleted from the
“Deleted items” folder in the same manner.

With the marking functions in “Edit”, several emails can be marked so

that they can be copied, moved or deleted together.

22.6 Managing emails and email folders

In addition to the four default folders in main view, other mail folders
can be set up. These can then be used to sort and keep emails. The
functions are similar to those in File manager.

22.6.1 Setting up a mail folder

To set up a new folder, open the command menu with S3 or AlT key,
select “File/New/folder” and type in your desired folder name.
The new folder will now be added to the folder list right next to the
default folders in main view.
To set up a new folder you can also use the shortcut d+B8B9 or
shift+Ctrl+e.
NB: Setting up subfolders is not possible.

22.6.2 Renaming mail folders

To rename a folder, open the command menu with S3 or ALT key,
select “File/Rename folder” and type in your desired new folder name.
To rename folders you can also use the shortcut 2+B8B9, or F2.
NB: The names of the default folders cannot be changed.

22.6.3 Deleting a mail folder

To delete a folder go to the desired folder in the folder list, open the
command menu with S3 and select “Edit/Delete”.
Answer the security question. If the mail folder contains emails and
you confirm the second security question, the folder and the emails in
it will be deleted permanently (they will not be moved to the "Deleted
items" folder).
To delete mail folders the shortcuts B9B7 or l+B8B9 or the delete key
can also be used.
NB: The default folders cannot be deleted.

22.6.4 Marking emails

There are various ways of marking emails. Individual emails or all
emails within a folder can be marked, or the highlighting reversed so
that previously marked emails can be unmarked.
Marking is necessary when several emails are to be deleted together,
or when they are to be copied or moved to another mail folder These
commands are similar to those higlighting functions in File manager.

To mark (highlight) an individual email (or remove the marking) go to

the desired email, open the command menu and select “Edit/Mark”, or
use the shortcut B0 or the space bar.

To mark (highlight) all emails go to the relevant email folder, open the
command menu and select “Edit/Mark all”, or use the shortcut
%+B8B9 or Ctrl+a.

To reverse the highlighting open the command menu and select

”Edit/Reverse highlighting”, or use the shortcut h+B8B9 or Shift+space
bar.

Marked emails have the word "marked” (M) added to them in the email
list.
22.6.5 Copying emails
An individual email or several highlighted emails from the email list
can be copied to another mail folder.
Open the command menu, select “Edit/Copy”. Move to the right/left to
the desired folder to which the email is to be copied and select “OK”,
or use the shortcut c+B8B9 or Ctrl+c.

NB: Emails cannot be copied to the “Outbox”. To do this use the save
command from the header of a new email or one to be replied or
forwarded.

22.6.6 Moving emails

An individual email or several highlighted emails from the email list
can be moved to another mail folder.
Open the command menu, select “Edit/move”. Move to the right/left to
the desired folder to which the email is to be moved and select “OK”,
or use the shortcut v+B8B9 or Shift+Ctrl+v.

NB: Emails cannot be moved to the “Outbox”. To do this use the save
command from the header of a new email or one to be replied or
forwarded.

22.6.7 Saving an email as a document

The text body of an email can be saved as a document. Open the
desired email and use the “Save as” command.
The subject will be taken as the file name and it will be saved in TXT
format after selecting “OK”.

22.6.8 The save location of mail folders and emails

The mail folders and their emails can be found on the inserted storage
card. Path: Storage card/Mail.
This folder, its subfolders and other files contained in it are necessary
for the email application to work properly and to use this Storage Card
vor saving mails.

NB:
Only when the email application is opened and the files are loaded
from the mail folder of storage card, the menu item “Email” will appear
in the “Tools” menu in word processor.
The “Mail” folder will be set up automatically if a new Storage Card is
inserted, the email application opened and the security answered with
Yes.

NB:
If you use several storage cards for managing your emails you must
reboot the email application after inserting a different card (Pronto
menu/Email client), so that the emails saved on it can be loaded to the
scratchpad and displayed.

22.7 Information on the total number of emails in the

mail folders
When a mail folder is selected in main view, the total number of emails
and the number of unread emails contained in it will be displayed.

If the command menu is opened from within the message list and the
entry “Tools/Folder information” selected, a message will appear giving
information on the position of the current message within the list as
well as the total number of emails and number of new and marked
messages within the list.
23. MSN Messenger
23.1 Introduction and requirements
You should have experience of chat or messaging packages and be
familiar with their functions and terminology.
You will also need the access files for MSN Messenger. If not, use the
Windows Messenger application which is already installed on most PCs
to acquire them, by registering a valid email address on the MSN
Messenger network to open an account. Alternatively, open an MSN
Messenger account at www.hotmail.com.

23.1.1 General remarks

Pronto's MSN Messenger application allows you to chat to other users
of the MSN network with Pronto. You can save contact details as user
profiles, set up and manage contact lists and have conversations with
one (individual chat) or more users (conference).
Connecting Pronto to the Internet means that you can chat from a
fixed position, and connecting to a mobile ‘phone with GPRS means
that you can chat on the move.

Messenger offers the following functions:

- start or continue a chat
- invite contacts for a chat
- have several chats at the same time
- Sound settings, e.g. different tones for reception, change in status,
contact request. etc.
- individual chat and conference chat
- build profiles for several accounts
- change your personal online status and recognise the change in
status of other messenger members
- set up contact list view (all, online only)
- group and manage contacts in different lists
- save chats as text files

Important:
- It is only possible to chat with other members over the MSN network
who are signed in to the MSN Messenger.
- Chatting with other applications, such as Skype, is not possible.

23.1.2 Requirements for using the Messenger application

To use the Messenger application you must have a valid email address
(account) for the MSN network, and Pronto must be connected to the
Internet. Pronto thus acquires an IP- address and uses it to establish a
connection to the Messenger server from which chats are distributed to
the members.

There are several ways of connecting Pronto to the Internet:

a) USB, ActiveSync, PC: use the USB cable and ActiveSync to connect
Pronto to a PC with a live Internet connection.
e.g. a PC with Windows XP Home, DSL 2000, Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5,
guest or full partnership

b) CF Ethernet Adapter (CF Ethernet Card), network cable, Internet

connection in range.

c) Bluetooth, GPRS, mobile ‘phone: a GPRS connection to a compatible

mobile ‘phone with an appropriate tariff, which allows for connection to
the Internet.
NB: you may incur supplementary charges depending on your mobile
‘phone.

23.1.3 Requirements for a Messenger account

Each valid email address set up on the MSN Messenger network as a
contact has its own email account on the Messenger server. When
setting up such an account, the email address and access data will be
assigned (user name, password). These details will also be required to
register the Messenger account in Pronto.

23.1.4 Connection problems and solutions

When accessing Messenger, errors can occur for various reasons –
Pronto will transmit an error message with information on the type of
error. MSN network error messages are usually given in English. Follow
the instructions or check the following:

a) Pronto transmits an error message when registering

Check that the access information (user name, password) have been
input correctly, or input the correct information again for the desired
account.

b) Pronto transmits an error message when registering, even though

the account information is correct.
You have lost your Internet connection (GPRS via a mobile ‘phone or
ActiveSync on the PC). Re-establish your Internet connection and try
again.
23.2 Pronto’s MSN Messenger application
The application has a main view and a chat window (chat view or
message window). Both view resemble dialogs and contain various
elements (lists, buttons, edit boxes) which, depending on the context,
can be hidden or displayed.
In both views, pressing S3 briefly or ALT key will open a command
menu with further functions.

23.2.1 Open the Messenger application

To open Messenger select “MSN Messenger” from the Pronto menu, or
use the shortcut “N+B9B7B8” or “Windows key+N”.

23.2.2 Main view

The main view displays status information and allows you to sign in or
sign off from Messenger or start a conversation by inputting the
account information or selecting a set up profile.

The main view contains the following elements, which will vary
depending on the context:

- “Status”
This field shows information on the connection and/or sign in status. If
you have saved different Messenger accounts as profiles, the profile
through which you are currently signed in to Messenger (online) will be
given here.

- “Profiles”
Here you may select the profile through which you want to sign in to
Messenger. The relevant access data for a Messenger account are
saved in a profile, so that they do not have to be input every time your
sign in data. To build a profile, go to the command menu and select
"Tools /profile manager”.
If no profiles have been built the list will display just the first entry
“None” and the main view will expand so that the access data for a
Messenger account can be input directly.

- “User name”
The user name is identical to the email address of the Messenger
account through which you sign in to Messenger.

- “Password” and “Repeat password”

Type the password for the email address of the Messenger account
through which you want to sign in.
The password is hidden as you type. The password must be input
exactly the same in both edit boxes.

- “Sign in” or “Sign off”

Use this option to sign in or off Messenger with the account details
input manually or through a selected profile.
Depending on the status of the selected Messenger account (profile),
only one of these options will be displayed.

-“Contacts list”
This list will only appear when you are signed in to Messenger. It gives
the email addresses or names of the contacts (and their status e.g. not
reversed, offline, online, busy etc) you have entered into the list of
member you call.
The “View/Contacts list” option in the command menu can be used to
determine whether or not all contacts from your list are to be displayed
or just those who are currently signed in (online) to Messenger.
To add a contact as member of your contacts list, open the command
menu and select “Contacts/Contact manager”, or confirm, wehn you
receive a request from this Messenger member.

- “Start chat”
This option will only appear if you are signed in to Messenger and start
a conversation with a contact selected from your contacts list which
has the state “Online”. If so, you will be taken to the chat window.

- “Continue/consult chat”
This option will only appear if you are signed in to Messenger and have
started a chat. You will be taken to the chat window and can consult or
continue a chat with a member which is shown in the “conversationes”
list. As long as the chat has been ended but not deleted, you may
consult and read it.

- “My status”
This field will only appear when you are signed in to Messenger, and it
shows your current online status. The status will also appear in the
contacts list of the messenger members you call.

23.2.3 The command menu in main view

The following functions are available.
- Set the display of your own online status:
(File/My status) or use the shortcut “u+B8B9” or “Ctrl+u”

- Build and edit profiles:

(Tools / Profiles Manager) or use the shortcut “p+B9B8” or “Ctrl+p”

- Add, remove and block contacts, change membership:

(Contacts/ Contact Manager) or use the shortcut “k+B8B9” or
“Ctrl+k”.

- Set the display of the contacts list:

(View/Contacts list)

- Set the tone signals for various events:

(Tools /Sound settings)

- Set the behaviour of Messenger when it is not in the foreground:

(Tools /Options)

23.3 Sign in to Messenger

There are two ways. Either type in your account details directly into
the relevant edit boxes of the main view, or build a profile which saves
the access data for your Messenger account, and then use this profile
to sign in.

Proceed as follows:
1. In the Pronto menu select “MSN Messenger”.
2. You will be taken to the main view.
3. From the “Profiles” list select the desired user profile and select
“Sign in”.
4. If you have not built a user profile or you wish to input the access
data of your Messenger account directly, select “None” from the
“Profiles” list.
5. In the “User name” edit box type the email address of your
Messenger account.
6. In the “Password” and “Repeat password” edit boxes type the
password valid for this Messenger account. The password is hidden as
you type.
7. Select “Sign in”.

The account details will be submitted to the MSN Messenger network

and verified. If you sign in successfully an appropriate message will
appear in the “Status” field, and the “sign in” option will change to
“Sign off”.
The “Profiles” list will now display only the signed-in account.
23.3.1 Set the online status (My status)
As soon as you sign in to Messenger, the status will change from
“Offline” to “Online”. Other contacts who are signed in to Messenger
will then see this change in status in the contacts list (Main view).
The “Online” status will tell other Messenger users that this contact is
now ready to chat.
As long as you are signed in to Messenger you can further differentiate
the online state as “My status”. This setting can be found in the main
view under “My status”.

To set the status, open the command menu by briefly pressing S3 or

ALT key and select the entry “File/My status”. The available state
settings will be displayed as menu entries, with the selected entry
indicated accordingly. Confirm the desired entry and this will now
display as “My status” and be transmitted to other Messenger users
(people you call).

The following settings are available: Online, Busy, Back Soon, Away, On
the Phone, At Lunch.

23.4 Build, edit or delete a profile

23.4.1 Build or edit a profile

To save the access data of a Messenger account as a profile, or to edit
a profile, proceed as follows:

1. Open the command menu in main view by pressing S3 briefly or ALT

key.
2. Select “Tools / Profiles manager”.
3. Select “Add” to build a new profile.
Or, select the profile you would like to edit from the list and then select
“Properties”.
4. A dialog will open where you can input or edit the profile name, as
well as input or edit the user name (email address) and password.
5. The “Advanced settings” will open a dialog. Here you can assign an
alias to a name and determine the online status which is shown by
default when signing in through this account.
6. Select OK to save the profile or any amentments made.

23.4.2 Delete a profile

To delete a profile and the saved access data for a Messenger account,
proceed as follows:
1. Open the command menu in main view by pressing S3 briefly or ALT
key.
2. Select “Tools / Profiles manager”.
3. From the list select the profile you would like to delete and then
select “Remove”.

23.5 The contacts list

In main view you can determine whether or not all contacts from your
list are to be displayed or just those who are currently signed in
(online) to Messenger.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key.
2. Select “View/Contacts list”.
3. Select “Show only online contacts” if you want only those contacts
who are currently signed in to Messenger to be displayed. The contacts
list will then be empty if none of your contacts is signed in to
Messenger. Contacts who are signed in to Messenger but have set their
online status to “Busy”, for example, will be displayed.
4. Select “Display all contacts” if you would like all the contacts from
your list to be displayed. The status information behind the contacts
will then tell you if this contact is signed in to Messenger (online) or not
(offline).
5. The entries displayed in the main view of the contacts list will be
changed accordingly.

NB:
The state “Not reversed” means that this member has not add your
address to his contacts list (has not confirmed your request).

23.6 Add and manage contacts

A conversation can only take place between Messenger members who
appear in each other’s contacts lists, who are signed in to Messenger
and who have signalled that they are ready for chat through the status
“Online”.
You can add and remove Messenger members (contacts) in your
contacts list, and determine which are to be displayed as members of a
list.

NB:
You must be signed in to Messenger (online) to access your contacts
list in main view and make any amendments.
23.6.1 Establish contact with a contact from your contacts
list (request)
To establish contact with someone from your contacts list (the email
address of a Messenger member), either add their email address
directly into the contacts list or confirm the request.
To add directly into your contacts list, proceed as follows:

1. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key and

select “Contacts/Contact Manager”
2. A dialog will open.
3. Select “Add”.
4. Type in the email address of the Messenger member and select OK.
(The email address must be given to you by the Messenger member).
5. The contact will be displayed in the main view of the contacts list
and a request sent to the Messenger member.
6. The member’s attention will be drawn to the request by a signal,
and the member will now have the possibility of confirming the request
and accepting your email address into his contacts list.

If Member B does not confirm Member A’s request, the contact will
display as “not reversed” in A’s contacts list, and B will receive the
request again as soon as he signs in to Messenger.

23.6.2 Display and change list membership for your

contacts list
You can determine which Messenger members are to be included in
your contacts list.
You can accept the addresses of Messenger members into various lists,
edit these lists and change the composition of the lists.

To decide which Messenger members are to be displayed in your

contacts list, proceed as follows:
1. Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key and
select “Contacts/Contact Manager”
2. A dialog will open.
3. In the “Membership” list select the entry “Contacts in my contacts
list”
4. In the “Contacts” list the email addresses of Messenger members
will be displayed.
5. To change the membership, select the desired Messenger member
from the “Contacts” list and select “Change membership”
6. A dialog will open and the contact name and email address will be
displayed. With the “Add to my contacts list” option you can choose
whether or not this contact should remain in your list.
Make the necessary amendments in the dialog.
7. Select “OK”.

The list membership changes according to which field has been

selected for this contact in the “Change list membership” dialog. The
following membership criteria are available:
- all contacts
- contacts in my contacts list
- contacts who have added me to their contacts lists
- contacts whom I allow to see my online status
- blocked contacts

23.7 The chat window

The chat window or message window is opened when the function
"Start chat” or “Continue/consult chat” is selected in main view.

The chat window contains the following elements:

- Conversations
This list contains the contacts with whom you can have a conversation
(chat). The message you type in will be sent to the contact selected
here. With simultaneously held chats select the person you are calling
for the relevant chat.

- “Message”
This list displays the content of the messages you have exchanged
with the person you selected and called from the “Conversations” list.
Both your own text and the replies from the people you called will be
listed here, so that you can follow the development of the chat.
The current message is focused, previous messages are in the list to
the left of the last entry.
If you are holding several chats simultaneously, you can switch
between chats by selecting the relevant person in the “Conversations”
list.

- “Text”
In this edit box type the message which is to be sent to the person you
are calling.

- “Send”
Selecting this option will send your message to the person you are
calling. With simultaneous chat, a dialog will open where you can
select the appropriate member to receive this message.
- “Quitt chat”
Selecting this option will end your conference call, or will close a chat,
if you are calling only one person.

- “Stop” or “OK”
This option will switch back to the main view without stopping the
conversation.

Various default sound signals have been set which will inform you
whether or not you have received a request or a message, whether a
contact has joined the chat, left it or changed its status.
These tones can be set in the command menu in main view
(Tools/Sound settings).

23.7.1 Start, continue or consult a chat

From your contacts list in main view select the desired member, who
must be online, and select “Start chat”.
If you have left a conversation but not deleted it, you can select
“Continue/consult chat” to read any messages or continue the chat.

If so, you will be taken to the chat window. The person you are calling
will be displayed in the “Conversations” list.

The “Message” list focuses the current incoming messages from the
people you are calling, or a change in status. Previous messages are
listed further to the left in the list so that the chat can be followed.
These messages can also be saved as text files.

Type your message in the “Text” box and then select “Send”.

Your message will be sent to the member who has been selected in the
“Conversations” list. This means that you can have several chats with
different members at the same time.

The “OK” or “Cancel” options will quit the chat window but not the chat
itself.
As long as you remain in Messenger (main view or chat window) each
incoming message will be accompanied by a signal.

23.7.2 Leave and delete a conversation

Select “Quit chat” to end a one-to-one chat or to withdraw from a
conference. The person you care calling will still be displayed in the
“Conversation”” list – you can consult the chat in the message list and
save it as text file.

To delete entries from the message list, open the command menu and
select “Conversation/Delete chat”, or use the shortcut “B9B7” or
“Delete”.

A security question will appear giving the name of the person you have
called and whose chat you want to delete. Where several chats are
being held at the same time, this allows you to select the correct one.

To quit and delete all simultaneous chats, go to the command menu

and select “Conversation/Delete and quit all chats”.

Deleted chats can no longer be saved as text files.

23.7.3 Chats with more than one person (conference)

Extra member can be invited to join in a live chat to make it a group
chat (conference).

Open the command menu by pressing S3 briefly or ALT key and select
“Conversation/invite”, or use the shortcut “e+B8B9” or Ctrl+e.

A dialog will open and you can either input the email address of the
person you wish to call directly, or select it from your contacts list.
Depending on which way you choose, the dialog will display either a
field for the email address, or your contacts list from which you can
select your contact.

The change in status when a contact joins in or leaves a chat will be

accompanied by a signal, and a message in the message list.

23.7.4 Save a chat as text

A chat can be saved as a text file and thus archived.
Simultaneous chats can be saved as individual files.

To save the correct chat from several held simultaneously, select the
appropriate one from the “Conversations” list. Then open the
command menu and select “Conversation/Save chat as text”, or use
the shortcut “s+B8B9” or CTRL+s.
A dialog will open – type the file name and select the save location.
The chat will be saved in txt format.
23.7.5 Reading mode
During a chat the focus is normally on the current event.
As messages often come in quicker than they can be read or replied to
during conferences or with simultaneous calls, a reading mode is
available.

When activated, reading mode allows you to stay in the chat message
list so that you can read it at your leisure.
The tones which announce that a new message from this chat or a
simultaneous call has arrived will still be emitted, but the focus will not
shift.
Only when you deactivate reading mode will the focus shift to the
current event.

To activate and deactivate reading mode, open the command menu

and select “Conversation/reading mode”, or use the shortcut “l+B8B9”
or CTRL+l.

Reading mode remains active for the selected chat until you switch to
another element in the message list dialog, or you deactivate it with a
shortcut or menu entry.

23.8 Tone selection and Sound settings

Different events in Messenger have different tones assigned to them
which can be switched on and off individually. All tones are switched
on by default and they inform whether :
- a contact has signed in to Messenger or changed his online status,
- a contact has signed off from Messenger,
- someone has submitted a new request,
- a new message has arrived,
- a message from a simultaneous chat has arrived during reading
mode is active.

If you want to switch the tones off or assign different tones to events,
open the command menu in main view, select “Tools/Sound settings”
and make the appropriate changes. Selecting and assigning tone
signals is similar to the selection of a signal in the Alarm clock.

23.9 Optional settings for the tones

You can choose to be informed when a new message arrives, if the
chat window is not in the foreground. The message will then be
displayed and can be read. By default this setting is not checked.
You can also choose to be informed when a new request comes in if
you are signed in to Messenger but Messenger is not in the foreground,
perhaps because you are working with the word-processor. By default
this setting is not checked.

To check this setting, open the command menu in main view, select
“Tools/options” and make the necessary amendments in the dialog.
Appendix x1: Overview
x1.1 Short Device Overview

Pronto! 18:
- Upper side: 8 dot Braille keyboard, 2 thumb keys, loudspeaker,
18 cell Braille Display with 18 cursor routing keys, 6 round Display keys
3 each besides the Braille Display, 4 round System keys
- Front side: Navistick, REC-Button
- Rear side: (from left to right) mains connector.(Charger, CF
memory card slot, bluetooth antenna, connector for earphones
(stereo), mini USB interface (slave), combined interface (serial and PS2
ports).

Pronto! QS
- Upper side:Standard keyboard (alpa numeric), loadspeaker
- Front side: Navistick, 4 square System keys, REC-Button
- Right side: round Power on / off button
- Left side: volume slider (wheel), connector for microphone,
connector for earphones (stereo)
- Rear side (from left to right): mains connector.(Charger), serial
interface, mini USB interface (slave), SD memory card slot, USB
interface (master)

Pronto! 40
- Upper side: Keyboard (Standard alpa numeric or 8 dot Braille
keyboard with 2 thumb keys), 2 keyboard interlock keys, loadspeaker,
round REC-Button, 40 cell Braille Display with 40 cursor routing keys, 6
round Display keys 3 each besides the Braille Display
- Front side: Navistick, 4 square System keys, 2 square thumb
keys
- Right side: round Power on / off button, USB interface (master),
mini USB interface (slave), SD memory card slot, serial interface,
- Left side: volume slider (wheel), connector for microphone,
connector for earphones (stereo), mains connector.(Charger),

x1.2 Terms and Abbreviations Used

ActiveSync = communication program for data exchange with the PC
Application = generic term for all functions and programs
(Command) button = confirms an action
Bluetooth = wireless communication
Braille keys = B0 to B9
Storage card = mobile data carrier (Memory Card)
File manager = access to files, folders and storage cards
Dialog = selection of various settings and commands
Display keys = for control of the Braille display, D1 to D6
Item = generic term for components of a menu or dialog
Shortcut = key combination or hotkey
Menu = list containing items (applications, dialogs, submenus,
commands)
Navistick = controls movements, N-up to N-middle
Folder = a list of files and the individual files themselves e.g. the “Edit”
folder (directory)
Position keys = P keys, for cursor routing on Braille display
System keys = to access applications or queries, S1 to S4
Submenu = list with further menu items
QWERT or QWERTY = means standard keyboard

x1.3 General Acoustic Signals and Messages

1. Turn on (boot) PRONTO with Power on / off button:
- Melody low-high

2. Turn off PRONTO (Power on / off ) (shutdown the operating system):

- Melody high-low

3. Switch off, close all applications with S4 (standby mode):

- Melody high-low (short)

4. Switch on, open applications from standby mode:

- Melody low-high (short)

Possible error messages after switching on:

1. No charger connected and battery low
- Melody high-high-low
PRONTO does not boot. Connect the charger and recharge the battery.

2. Error when initialising compass and barometer

- Melody high-high-low
This is an indication of a possible defect with the compass/barometer.
PRONTO boots as normal afterwards.

Possible error messages during operation:

1. The operating system does not respond
- Melody high-high-low
PRONTO shuts down automatically and must be rebooted with S1+S4
(press for approx. 10 seconds).

2. No reaction from the peripheral controller

- Melody none
- Device shuts down completely
PRONTO must be rebooted with S1+S4.
This message occurs rarely when the internal connections between the
various program components and assembly processors of PRONTO do
not work properly.

x1.4 Technical Data of all devices

Pronto 18:
Dimensions in mm (width x depth x height): 174x92x32
Weight: approx. 450 g / 1 pound
Battery charge: 5V / max. 2,5A
Battery capacity: 4,1 V / 4200 mAh
Memory:
- DRAM: 128 MB (internal scratch pad)
- internal Flashdisk: 64 MB
- external memory (Storage Card): Compact Flash
Interfaces:
- serial,
- mini USB (slave)
- PS2
- Bluetooth,
- stereo earphones,
- charger

Pronto! QS
Dimensions in mm (width x depth x height): 253x92x19
Weight: approx. 600 g / 1 pound
Battery charge: 5V / max. 2,5A
Battery capacity: 7,2 V / 2500 mAh
Memory:
- DRAM: 128 MB (internal scratch pad)
- internal Flashdisk: 128 MB
- external memory (Storage Card) SD or SD HC memory card
Interfaces:
- serial,
- USB (master)
- mini USB (slave),
- Bluetooth
- stereo earphones,
- microphones
- charger

Pronto! 40
Dimensions in mm (width x depth x height): 297x152x27
Weight: approx. 1300 g / 2 pound (incl. Standard Keyboard Modul)
Battery charge: 5V / max. 2,5A
Battery capacity: 7,2 V / 2500 mAh
Memory:
- DRAM: 128 MB (internal scratch pad)
- internal Flashdisk: 1 GB
- external memory (Storage Card) SD or SD HC memory card
Interfaces:
- serial,
- USB (master)
- mini USB (slave),
- Bluetooth
- stereo earphones,
- microphones
- charger

For all devices:

Battery life: approx. 20 hours
Standby mode: several days
Note: Life is depending on the electric poer consumption (Bluetooth,
size of storage card, USB memory stick)
Battery: Li Ionen
AC Adapter: 100-240 Volt, 50-60Hz
Operating system: Windows CE
Bluetooth range: approx. 10 mtr.
File formats:
- Word-processor: Rich Text Format (RTF), Text format (TXT)
- Voice recording: MP3, WAV
- Music: MP3, WAV, WMA
- Daisy Standard 2.02.
System requirements for PC connection:
- Windows 2000 or Windows XP with Microsoft ActiveSync
- Windows Vista with Microsoft Mobile Device Center

x1.5 Contact and Support

The PRONTO Development Team is happy to answer queries and take
suggestions. An email discussion group has been set up specially for
this purpose. It is open for any questions and suggestions about
PRONTO, to share experiences with other PRONTO users and to access
expert support from our business partners.
Note: The language of thislist and its members is german, but you can
ask also in english. To join send an email to listserv@listserv.baum.de
with the text body “SUBSCRIBE Pronto surename, name“ (without
quotes).
Help is available over the telephone by ringing on +49 (0)6223/49090

BAUM Retec AG
Schloss Langenzell
D-69257 Wiesenbach
Tel.: +49 (0) 62 23 / 49 09 0
Fax: +49 (0) 62 23 / 49 09 399
Email: info@baum.de
Internet: www.baum.de
Appendix x2: Command List (for reference)
Here you get all shortcuts and key kombinations to use on Pronto
(Braille Mode and QWERT Mode).
Arranged by application

X2.1 General keys:

Space: "right thumb key (B0), space key
Command key: left thumb key (B9)
Delete character left from cursor: B7, backspace
Cancel key (Escape function): B9B7B8, D4, escape key
Device master volume: Pronto 18: „S4 with B-key“ (B1 to B8), Pronto
QS / Pronto 40: small wheel (slider) on the left side.
Speech on/off: only Pronto 18 D2D5
Context sensitive help: B2B6B9, F1 (FN+1)
Keyboard lock on/off: S2S3
Commands menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt kdey
Power off (sleep): S4 long
Show Pronto-Versionn „V with B7B8B9B0“, shift+control+v
Switch off/on device completely: Pronto 18: S1+S4, Pronto 40 / Pront
QS: Power on/off button.

Pronto application stop and restart: D1D4B3B6,

FN+shift_left+control_left+7 (NB: loss of unsaved data)
Pronto application stop: D1D4B2B5, FN+shift_left+control_left+6 (NB:
loss of unsaved data)
Pronto application start (after stop): D1D4B1B4, FN+shift_left+6

Pronto-Software- and Operatin system-Update:

Installation of full Pronto version (FullInstall) from folder

"StorageCard\Install": D1D4B1B4B7B8, FN+shift_left+1
Installation of individual Pronto-Software-Components (Update) from
folder "StorageCard\Update": D1D4B7B8, FN+shift_left+control_left+1
Installation of operating system from folder "StorageCard\OS5":
D1D4B2B3B5B7B8, FN+shiftt_left+3
Installation of BIOS (not on Pronto 18): FN+shift_left+control_left+3,
D1D4B1B2B3B4

X2.2 System keys commands:

System Keys Pressed Briefly
Temperature = S1 once
Air pressure = S1 twice
Altitude (above sea level, estimated) = S1 three times
Reminded Appointments list = S2 once
Stop watch = S2 twice
Timer = S2 three times
Command menu = S3 (identical to B9B3B5 or Alt key)
Battery status = S3 twice
Compass = S3 three times
Time = S4 once
Date = S4 twice

System keys pressed long:

Keyboard lock on/off: S2S3
Power off (sleep): S4
Switch on: S1, S2, or S3
Completely shut down: on Pronto 18 S1S4 long, power off/onn button
on Pronto QS and Pronto 40 (please do not use generally)

X2.3 Run application

Opem Pronto main menu (access to all applications): S3 long,.
windows key
Word-processor = S1 long, w with B7B8B9, Windowskey+w
Planner = S2 long, p with B7B8B9, Windowskey+p
Addressbook = a with B7B8B9, Windowskey+a
File manager = f with B7B8B9, Windowskey+f
Phone = o with B7B8B9 Windowskey+o
Calculator = c with B7B8B9, Windowskey+c
Braille display (not on Pronto QS) = b with B7B8B9, Windowskey+b
Voice Recorder = v with B7B8B9, Windowskey+v
Record note = press REC key and keep pressing
Playback last recorded note = REC once brievly
DAISY reader = d with B7B8B9, Windowskey+d
Mp3 player = m with B7B8B9, Windowskey+m
Internet radio = i with B7B8B9, Windowskey+i
Timers (alarm clock, stop watch, timer) = t with B7B8B9,
Windowskey+t
Settings = s with B7B8B9, Windowskey+s
Interfaces (for bluetooth on/off)= r with B7B8B9, Windowskey+r
Help (Manual) = h with B7B8B9, Windowskey+h

Where am i = hyphon minus with B7B8B9 (-+B7B8B9),

Windowskey+minuskey
Last message = number with B7B8B9 (#+B7B8B9),
Windowskey+numberkey)
messages list = plus with B7B8B9 (++B7B8B9, Windowskey+Pluskey
X2.4 Word-processor
Open word processor: S1 long, w+B7B8B9, Windowskey+w

Dot pattern commands for braille mode:

Character: left B1, right B4, current B1B4
Word: left B2, right B5, current B2B5
Sentence: Left B3, right B6, current B3B6
Line: left B1B2, right B4B5, current B1B2B4B5
Paragraph: left B1B3, right B4B6, current B1B3B4B6
Page: left B2B3, right B5B6, current B2B3B5B6
Beginning: B1B2B3, End B4B5B6, all B1B2B3B4B5B6

Reading: dot pattern+B9B0

Highlight: dot pattern “current”+B9
Delete: dot pattern “current”+B9B7
Delete highlighted text: B7B9
Delete charakter left from cursor: B7
Remuve highlight: B7B8B9
Got to beginning of line and read line. B1B2B3B7B9(B0)
Got to end of line and read line: B4B5B6B8B9(B0)
New line: B9B8B4B5 or B8
New paragraph: B9B8B4B6
New page: B9B8B5B6
Insert Tabulator: B9B8B4

Windowslike commands for QWERT Mode:

Reading text passages:
Character left / right: arrow key left / right
Word left / right: control+arrow left / right
Sentence left / right: Control+Less-than / Control+Greater-than
Current sentence: shift+control+space
Previous / next line: arrow up / arrow down
Spell character: control+dot key
Spell word: control+komma key

Go to commands:
Previous / next page: page up / pae down (Fn+arrow up / Fn+arrow
down)
Beginning / End of line: hone / End (FN+arrow left / FN+arrow right)
Beginneng / End of document: control+home / control+end
(FN+control+arrow left / right)

Highlight text from cursor position:

Character right / left: shift+arrow right / shift+arrow left
 Word right / left: shift+control+arrow right / shift+control+arrow left
Next / previous line: shift+arrow down / shift+arrow up
Up to end of line: shift+end (FN+shift+arrow right)
Up to beginning of line: shift+home (FN+shift+arrow left)
Up to beginning of document: shift+control+home
(FN+shiftcontrol+arrow left)
Up to end of document: shift+control+end (FN+shift+control+arrow
right )
Highlight whole text: contol+a
Mark block start / block end: control+space
Remove highlight: escape

Deleting commands:
Delete character left of cursor: bacspace key
Delete current character: delete key
Delete highlighted text: control+delete

New line: return key

New paragraph: shift+return
New page: shft+control+return
Insert Tabulator: tabulator key (TAB)

Menu functions
Open/close menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

Menu File f+B9B8, Alt+f

New document (dialog) = “n with B8B9, control+n”
Open document (dialog)= “o with B8B9”, control+o
Close document = “u with B8B9”, control+u
Save document = “s with B8B9”, control+s
Save as (dialog) = “a with B8B9”, control+e
Protect/unprotect text = “z with B8B9, control+z”
Previous file = “Minus with B8B9”, control+minus key
List of open files = “l with B8B9”, control+l

Menu Edit e+B9B8, Alt+e

Cut = “x with B8B9”, control+x
Copy = “c with B8B9”, cntrol+c
Paste = “v with B8B9”, control+v
Delete = B9B7, control+delete key
Highlight beginning/end of text block = B9B1B4, control+space
Highlight entire text = B9B8B1B2B3B4B5B6, control+a
Find (dialog) = “? With B8B9”, control+f
Find next = “3 with B8B9”, F3 (FN+3)
Replace (dialog)= “h with B8B9”, control+h
 Set bookmark = “= with B8B9!, control+m
Jump to bookmark = “m with B8B9”, shift+control+m

Menu Insert i+B8B9, Alt+i

Insert date = “5 with B8B9”, F5 (FN+5)
Insert time = “6 with B8B9”, F6 (FN+6)
New line (line feed) = B8 or B9B8B4B5, return key
New paragraph = B9B8B4B6, shift+return
New page (form feed) = B9B8B5B6, shift+control+return
Set tabulator B9B8B4; Tabulator key

Menu Navigate g+B8B9, Alt+gn

Start continuous reading from cursor position = B9 or r+B8B9, N-
center, shift+control+r
Read current sentence = B9B0B3B6, shift+control+space
Read sentence left = B9B0B3, control+less-than
Read sentence right = B9B0B3, control+Greater-than
Speak highlighted text = “k with B8B9”, control+k

Functions during continuous reading:

Start/stop: N-center, B9 or r+B8B9, shift+control+r
Slower: N-up
Faster: N-down (normal speech speed will not be affected)
2 words back: N-left
2 words forward: N-right

Menu Tools t+b8B9, Alt+t

Braille (Dialog to activate word rap, formating characters etc.)
Position in text = “p with B8B9”, control+p
email (functions when email client application is started)

X2.5 Planner
Open planner: S2 long, p with B7B8B9, Windowskey+p

Browsing in planner:
Next / previous appointment: N-down / N-up, B9B6 / B9B3, arrow
down/up
Next / previous day: N-right / N-left, B9B4 / B9B1, arrow right/left
Next / previous week: B5 / B2, shift+arrow left / shift+arrow right
Next / previous month: B4B5 / B1B2, shift+arrow down / shift+arrow
up
Next / previous half year: B4B6 / B1 B3, page-down / püage-up,
(FN+arrow-down / FN+arrow-up)
Next / previous year: B5B6 / B2B3, shift+page-down / shift+page-up
(FN+shift+arrow-down / FN+shift+arrow-up)
Open/close menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key
Menu File f+B8B9, Alt+f
New appointment (dialog) = “n with B8B9”, control+n
Open appointment (dialog) = n-center, B9, return key

Menu Edit e+B8B9, Alt+e

Delete appointment = B9B7, delete key
Find (dialog) = “? with B8B9”, control+f
Find next = “3 with B8 B9” F3 (FN+3)

Menu Navigate i+B8B9, Alt+i

Go to today = B0 or“d with B8B9”, space
Jump to (dialog) = “j with B8B9”, control+j
Appointment
Next = N-down, B9B6, arrow down
previous = N-up, B9B3, arrow up
Day
Next = N-right, B4, arrow right
Previous = N-left, B1, arrow left
Week
Next = B5, shift+arrow-rihgt
Previous = B2, shift+arrow-left
Month
Next = B4B5, shift+arrow-down
Previous = B1B2, shift+arrow-up
Half year (six mont)
Next = B4B6, üpage-down (FN+arrow-down),
Previous = B1B3, page-up (FN+arrow+up)
Year
Next = B5B6, shift+page-down (FN+shift+arrow-donw)
Previous = B2B3, shift+page-up (FN+shift+arrow-up)

Menu View w+B8B9, Alt+w

Filter (dialog): r+B8B9, Control+r
Appointments in braille (dialog)
Appointmenst in speech (díalog)
Date in braille (dialog)
Date in speech (dialog)
Set to defaults

In the dialogs of appointment and date presentation:

Command menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key
Move left = l+B9B8, control+arrow-left
Move right = r+B9B8, control+arrow-right
Mobe to beginnung =b+B8B9, control+arrow-up
 Mobe to end = e+B8B9, control+arrow-down
Hide element = h+B8B9, control+delete
Show element = s+B8B9, control+insert (FN+control+delete)
Set to defaults

Menu Tools t+B8B9, Alt+t

Reminder (Dialog)
Clean up old appointments (Dialog)
Categories manager (Dialog)
Export (Dialog)
Import (Dialog)

X2.6 Address book

Open address book: a with B7B8B9, Windowskey+a

Browsing adressbook and iths fields:

First / last contact: B1B2B3 / B4B5B6, control+arrow-up /
control+arrow-down
Previous / next contact: N-up / N-down, B3 / B6, arrow-up / arrow-
down
One field left / right: N-left / N-right, B1 / B4, arrow-left / arrow-right
5 fields left / right: B2 / B5, shift+control+arrow-left /
shift+control+arrow-right
First / last field of contact: B1B2 / B4B5, home / ende (FN+arrow-left /
FN+arrow-right)

Open/close menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, alt key

Menu File f+B8B9, Alt+f
New contact (dialog) = “n with B8B9”, control+n
Open contact = N-center, B9, return key
Refresch (actualize) = “k with B8B9” or 5 +B8B9, F5 (TN+5)
Restore standard settings = g with B8B9, control+g

Menu Edit e+B8B9, Alt+e

Delete contact = B9B7, delete key
Find (dialog) = “? with B8B9”, control+f
Find next = “3 with B8B9” F3 (FN+3

Menu Navigate i+B8B9, Alt+i

First contact = B1B2B3, control+arrow-up
Last contact = B4B5B6, control+arrow-down
Previous contact = N-up, B3, arrow-up
Next contact = N-down, B6, arrow-down
First field of contact = B1B2, home (FN+arrow-left)
Last field of contact = B4B5, end (FN+arrow-right)
 One field left = N-left, B1, arrow-left
One field right = N-right, B4, arrow-right
5 fields left = B2, shift+control+arrow-left
5 fields right = B5, shift+control+arrow-right

Menu View v+B8B9, Alt+v

Mask selection (dialog) = “w with B8B9”, control+w
Input mask (dialog) = “m with B8B9!, control+m
Output mask (dialog) = “u with B8B9”, control+u
Speech presentation (dialog) = “p with B8 B9”, control+p
Sort order (dialog) = “o with B8B9”, control+o
Filter (dialog) = “t with B8B9”, control+t

Menu Tools r+B8B9, Alt+r

Detailed Info of contact field = “+ with B8B9”, shift+control+0
Dial phone number = “( with B8B9”, shift+control+1
Generate dial tone = “) with B8B9”, shift+control+2
Send SMS to number = “= with B8B9”, shift+control+3

Moving in lists:
Next / previous element: N-right / N-left, B9B4 / B9B1, arrow-right /
arrow-left
Jump directly to element: type first character(s) of its name or
position number.
Beginning / end of list: B1B2B3B7B9 / B4B5B6B8B9, home / End
(FN+arrow-left / FN+arrow-right)
Open/close command menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

In dialogs mask selection, sorting, presentation:

Open/close command menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key
Define name = 2+B8B9, F2 (FN+2)
Define fields = f+B8B9, control+return

Set position of mask fields:

Move left = l+B9B8, contol+arrow-left
Move right = r+B9B8, control+arrow-right
To beginning = b+B9B8, control+arrow-up
To end = e+B9B8, control+arrow-down
Hide = h+B9B8, control+delete
Show = s+B9B8, control+insert (FN+control+delete)

X2.7 File Manager

Open file manager = f with B7B8B9, Windowskey+f
Open/close menu = S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key
Menu File f+B8B9, Alt+f
New folder (dialog) = “n with B8B9”, control+n
Open = “o with B8B9”, control+o or return key
Delete = B9B7 or d+B8B9 , delete key
Rename (Dialog)= r with B8B9” or 2+B8B9, F2 (FN+2)
Properties (Dialog) = p with B8B9”, control+p or Alt+return

Menu Edit e+B8B9, Alt+e

Cut = “x with B8B9”, control+x
Copy = “c with B8B9” contol+c
Paste = “v with B8B9”, control+v
Highlight file or folder = B0, space
Highlight all = B9B8B1B2B3B4B5B6, control+a
Invert highlighting = “i with B8B9”,shift+space

Menu View w+B8B9, Alt+w .

Details (dialog)

Menu Tools t+B8B9, Alt+t

Memory = „m with B8B9”, shift+control+m
Speak number of highlighted objects = “k with B8b9”, control+k

X2.8 Daisy Reader

Open Daisy Reader: d+B9b7b8, Windowskey+d
Open/close menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

File menu: f+B9B8, Alt+f

Update new bookshelf = n+B8B9, control+n
Play/stop: N-center, B9, return key
Booklist (dialog) = o+B9B8, control+o
Close book = W+B8B9, control+w

Edit Menu: e+B8B9, Alt+e

Find (dialog) = ?+B8B9, control+f

Bookmarks Menu: b+B8B9, Alt+b

Go to (Dialog) = #+B9B8, D3D4D5D6, control+#
Previous = B2, D2D3D6, page-up (FN+arrow-up)
Next = B5, D3D5D6, page-down (FN+arrow-down)
Set = B9B8, D2D3D5D6, insert key (FN+delete)
Delete (Dialog) = B7, D1D2D3, delete key
Delete all = B9B7, D1D2D3D4D5D6, shift+control+delete

Tools Menü t+B9B8, Alt+t

Speed (dialog) = s+B8B9, D2D3D4, control+s
 Faster shortcut: ++B9B8, D4D5, control+plus
Slower shortcut: -+B9B8, D1D2, control+minus

Navigation Menu: i+B9B8

Upper level = B3, D1, N-up, arrow-up
Lower level = B6, D3, N-down, arrow-down
Backwards = B1, D1D3, N-left, arrow-left
Forewards = B4, D4D6, N-right, arrow right
beginning of book = B9B1B2B3, D1D4, home (FN+arrow-left)
End of book = B9B4B5B6, D3D6, end (FN+arrow-right)
Go to page (dialog) = p+B8B9, D1D2D3D4, shift+control+p
Fast foreward = >+B9B8, D5D6, shift+control+arrow-right
Fast rewind = <+B9B8, D2D3, shift+control-arrow-left

Information Menü r+B9B8, Alt+r

Book info = i+B9, D2D4, shift+control+i
current Position = r+B9, D1D2D3D5 control+r

X2.9 MP3 Player

Open MP3 Player: m+B9b7b8, Windowskey+m
Open/close menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

In main view:
File Menu f+B9B8, Alt+f
Open (dialog) = o+B9B8, D1D3D5, control+o

Playback Menu p+B8B9, Alt+p

Start/Pause = B9, D6, N-center, return
Stop = B0, D4, control+return or space
Next rack (titel) = B4, D3, N-down, arrow-down
Previous track (titel) = B1, D1, N-up, arrow-up
First track (titel) = B3, D1D4, home (FN+arrow-left)
Last track (titel) = B6, D3D6, end (FN+arrow-right)
10 seconds forewards = B5, D4D6, N-right, arrow-right
10 seconds back = B2, D1D3, N-left, arrow-left
resume at last stop position = r+B8B9, D1D2D3D5, control+r

Audio Menu a+B9B8, Alt+a

Volume Menu
Increase = B4B5, control+arrow-up
Decrease = B1B2, control+arrow-down

Menu Playlist (Dialog) = y+B8B9, D1D3D4D6, Alt+y

Menu Info (Dialog) = m+B9B8, D1D3D4, Alt+m
In Menu of Playlist Dialog:
Playlist: w+B8B9, control+w
New: n+B9B8, D1D3D4D5, control+n
Open (Dialog): o+B9B8, D1D3D5, control+o
Save as: s+B8B9, D1D2D4, control+s
Edit: e+B8B9, control+e
Add:
File = ++B8B9, D2D3D5, control+plus
Folder = /+B8B9, D2D5D6, control+Slash
Move:
Left = l+B8B9, D1D2, control+arrow-left
Right = r+B8B9, DD4D5, control+arrow-right
Beginning = b+B8B9, D1D2D3, control+arrow-up
End = z+B8B9, D4D5D6, control+arrow-down
Delete = B9B7, delete key

X2.10 Voice recorder:

Open voice recorder and start recording: press and hold REC button
Stopp recording and close voice recorder: release REC button
Open file list and play recording: short press on REC button

Open voice recorder v+B9B7B8, Windowskey+v

In main view (file list):

Select recording: Navistick up/down, arrow up/down
Play recording: B9, Navistick center, return key

Open/close menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

File Menu: f+B9B8, Alt+f

delete: B9B7 or d+B8B9, delete key

Tools Menu: t+B8B9, Alt+t

Play recorded file: B9, N-center, return
Start recording: s+B8B9, control+s
Press any key to stop recording. Max. Recording time for each record is
10 min.
Record CardID
Record Time alarm
Quality options: q+B9B8, Control+q

X2.11 Alarm clock:

Open alarm clock: t+B9B7B8, Windowskey+t, then select alarm
clocks.

In main view:
Select which alarm clock: Navistick up/down, arrow up/down
Open alarm settings: B9, D6, return

X2.12 Stop watch

Open Stopp watch: S2 twice brievly or t+B9B7B8 resp. Windowskey+t
then select Stop watch.

Open/close menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

Menu time measurement: t+B8B9, control+t

Start: B4, control+space
Pause: B5, space
Resume: B5, space
Stop: B6, control+space
Announce end/interim time: B8, shift+control+z

Menu tone signals: g+B8B9, Alt+g

Seconds beep on: B1, control+1
10 seconds beep on: B2, control+2
Minute anouncement on: B3, control+3
No beeps: B7, control+0

X2.13 Timer (count down)

Open timer: S2 three times brievly or t+B7B8B9 resp. Windowskey+t
then select timer.
Start: s+B9, Alt+s
Stopp: o+b9, Alt+o
Set duration: d+B9, Alt+d
Time elapsed: e+B9, Alt+e
Remaining time: r+B9, Alt+r
Close Timer: B9 or B9B7B8, D6 or D4, return or escape

X2.14 Mobile Telephone

Open mobile phone: o+B7B8B9, Windowskey+o

Open/close menU. S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

In main view:

Answer call = B8, control+return

 Hang up = B7, delete
Make call (dialog) = a+B9, control+a
Connect/disconnect = n+B9, control+n
Send SMS = s+B9, control+s
Read SMS (dialog) = r+B9, co ntrol+r
Display read in SMS = d+b9, control+d
Settings (dialog) = e+B9, control+e
Info field = i+B9, control+i
Status field = u+B9, control+u

In settings dialog:
Open/close Menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key
Partner profile: p+B9, control+p
Set to foreground: r+B9, control+r
Determine caller in adressbook: m+B9, control+m

In dialog make call or send:

Open/close Menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key
Call: l+B9, control+l resp. Send: s+B9, Steuerung+s
phone number selection (Dialog): i+B9, control+i
Phonenumber: p+B9, control+p
Clear phonenumber in Field:: e+B9, control+delete

In Dialog „Send SMS“:

Open/close Menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key
Send: (Dialog): s+B9, control+s
SMS Text: t+B9, control+t
Clear SMS text: e+B9, control+delete
Quantity characters: q+B9, control+q

Im Dialog "Read SMS" resp. "Display read in SMS“:

Open/close Menu: S3 short, B9B3b5, Alt key
Phonenumer: p+B9, control+p
SMS Text: t+B9, control+t
Date of SMS: d+B9, control+d
Display options: y+B9, control+y
Delete SMS: l+B9, delete key
Send SMS: s+B9, control+s
Determine sender using the addressbook: m+B9, control+m
Clear SMS Text: e+B9, control+delete
New SMS read in: w+B9, control+w
Cancel reading SMS: g+B9, control+g (not in use for normalread in.)

X2.15 Calculator
Open calculator: c+B7B8B9, Windowskey+c
Open/close Menu: S3 short, B9b3B5, Alt key

Menu Math functions: f+B8B9, Alt+f

Basic functionsmenu:
Addition: +, plus key
Subtraction: -, hyphon minus key
Multiplication: *, asterisc key
Devision: / , slash key
Execute (Perform calculation): B8 or “=”, return or equals key
Advanced Menu
Percent: %
Square root: sqrt
Power: pow
Exponential: exp
Natural logahrithm: ln
Logarithm to base 10: log
Modulo: mod
Sine functions: sin, sinr, sinh, asin
Cosine functions: cos, cosr, cosh, acos
Tangent functions: tan, tanr, tanh, atan
Expressions Menu
Pi
Euler: e
Bracket open: (
Bracfket close: )

Menu Edit: e+B9B8, Alt+e

Clear calculator line, ( New calculation ): e+B9, shift+delete
Delete character backward: B7, backspace key
Insert and clear last memory entry:: r+B8B9 , control+r
Clear memory list: r+B9, shift+control+delete
Clear Calculations list: u+B9, control+delete
Copy result into clipboard: z+B8B9, control+z

Menu View: w+B8B9, Alt+w

Calculations list
Next calculation entry: N-down, l+B9, arrow down (D3 no speech
output)
Previous calculation entry: N-up, l +B8B9, arrow up, ( D1 no speech
output)
Show last calculation: n+B9, shift+arrow-down
Memory list:
Next entry in memory list: y+B9, page-down.(FN+arrow-down)
Previous entry in memory list: y+B8B9, page-up (FN+arrow-up)
Last memory value: m+B9, shift+page-down (FN+shift+arrow-down)
Menu Tools t+B8b9, Alt+t
Memory functions:
Insert last memory entry: i+B8B9, shift+control+i
Add in memory list: i+B9, shift+control+h
Add to last memory value (M-plus function): ++B8B9, control+plus.
Subtract from last memory value (M-Minus function): -+B8B9,
control+minus
Speak last memory value: s+B9, shift+control+s
Rvead calculator line verbalized: a+B9, shift+control+a
Options (dialog): o+B9, shift+control+o

Menu User constants:: n+B8B9, Alt+n

Constant x
Insert x into calculation: x
Insert value of x into calculator line
Insert value of calculator line in x: 1+B8B9, shift+control+1:
Show x entry: 1+B9, control+1
Constant y
Insert y into calculation: y
Insert value of y into calculator line
Insert value of calculator line in y: 2+B8B9, shift+control+2:
Show y entry: 2+B9, control+2
Constant z
Insert z into calculation: z
Insert value of z into calculator line
Insert value of calculator line in z: 3+B8B9, shift+control+3:
Show z entry: 3+B9, control+3

Menu Conversion s+B8B9, Alt+s

X2.16 Internet Radio

Note: To use this application Pronto must have an active web access,
i.e via ActiveSync connection with a web connected PC or via mobile
phone and valid RAS / GPRS connection..

Open Internet Radio: i+B7b8B9, Windowskey+i

Open/Close Menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

In main view:
Play Next/previous found radio station: B4/B1, D4D6, N-right/N-left,
arrow right/left
Play next/previous stored radio station: B6/B3, D3/D1, N-down/N-up,
arrow down/up
Play one of the 10 preset radio stations: Enter number 0 to 9
Store current radio station on position 0 to 9: number+B9B8,
control+number

Menu Manage radio stations: m+B9B8, Alt+m

Scan for radio stations (Dialog): f+B9B8, D1D2D4, control+f

In dialog „scanning for radio stations“:

List Radio station
Edit box Info (genre, bitrate, position)
Button Scan for radio stations (Dialog)

In scan settings dialog:

Check box Only Top 30 radio stations
Check box Filter by genre
Check box Filter by bitrate
Button Start scanning

Menu preset radio stations options: r+B9B8, Alt+r

Automatic preset (stores 10 positions): B1B2B3B4B5B6B8B9,
D1D2D3D4D5D6, control+a

Menu Playback p+B9B8, Alt+p

Start: B9, D6, N-center, return
Pause / resume: B0, D1D3D4D6, space
Stopp: B9B7B8, D4, control+return

Menu Navigation i+B9B8, Alt+i

Next radio station: B4, D4D6, N-right, arrow right
Previous radio station: B1, D1D3, N-left, arrow left
Next stored radio station: B6, D3, N-down, arrow down
Previous stored radio station: B3, D1, N-up, arrow up.

Menu Tools t+B9B8, Alt+t

Preferences (Dialog with settings for playing in background)

Menu Info ?+B9B8, Alt+question mark

Current radio station (Dialog): u+B9B8, control+u

X2.17 Email Client

Note: To use this application Pronto must have an active web access,
i.e via ActiveSync connection with a web connected PC or via mobile
phone and valid RAS / GPRS connection..

Open email client application: e+B7b8B9, Windowskey+e

Open/Close Menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key
Switch between mail folder and message list in main view: B9B1B3 or
B9B4B6, D1D3 or D4D6, shift+tab or tab

Menu File: f+B8B9, alt+f

New email: n+B8B9, Control+n
New folder: d+B8B9, Shift+Control+e
Rename folder: 2+B8B9, F2
Open email: B9, D6, N-center, Return, Control+o (Turns to Word
Prozessor)

Menu Edit: e+B8B9, Alt+e

Copy message to mail folder: c+B8B9, Control+C
Move message to mail folder: v+B8B9, Shift+Control+V
Delete message or folder: B9B7, Delete,
Mark message (highlight): B0, Space bare
Mark all mails in the message list: %+B8B9, Control+a
Reverse highlighting: h+B8B9, Shift+Space

Menu Actions: k+B8B9, Alt+k

Send and receive (all accounts): m+B8B9, Control+M
Reply (when message is closed): r+B8B9, Control+R
Reply to all (when message is closed): y+B8B9, Shift+Control+R
Reply to sender only: (when message is closed): z+B8B9, Shift+Alt+R
Forward (when message is closed): w+B8B9, Steuerung+F
Switch to Inbox: i+B8B9, Shift+Control+i
Switch to Outbox: o+B8B9, Shift+Control+o

Menu Tools: t+B8B9, Alt+t

Menu Navigation: g+B8B9, Alt+G

Next email: B9B6, D3, N down, arrow down
Previous email: B9B3, D1, N up,arrow up
First email: B9B1B2B3B7, D1D4, Home
Last email: B9B4B5B6B8, D3D6, End

Commands in word processor when message is opened

Menu Tools/ email
Header: 8+B8B9, F8 or B9B1B3, D1D3, Shift+Tab
Save mail (in Outbox): 7+B8B9, D1D2D4D5D6, F7
Close mail: 4+B8B9, D1D4D5D6, F4
Reply
Reply to all
Reply to sender only
Forward
x2.18 MSN Messenger
Note: To use this application Pronto must have an active web access,
i.e via ActiveSync connection with a web connected PC or via mobile
phone and valid RAS / GPRS connection..

Open MSN Messenger application: n+B7b8B9, Windowskey+N

Open/Close Menu: S3 short, B9B3B5, Alt key

Menu File: f+B8B9, Alt+f

My status: u+B8B9, Control+u
(online, busy, back soon, away, on the phone, at lunch)

Menu Contacts: k+B8B9, Alt+k

Contacts manager: c+B8B9, Control+c

Menu View:: w+B8B9, Alt+w

Contacts list:
Display all contacts
Show only online contacts

Menu Tools: t+B8B9, Alt+t

Profiles manager (Dialog): p+B8B9, Control+P
Sound settings (Dialog)
: Options (Dialog)

In the chat window

Menu Conversations
Invite: e+B8B9, Control+E
Save chat as text file: s+B8B9, Control+S
Delete chat: B9B7, Delete
Delete and quitt all chats:
Reading mode, activate/deactivate: l+B8B9, Control+L

Elements in teh Contact Manager Dialog

List: Membership
List: Contacts
Button: Add
Button: Remove
Button: Change Membership
Button: Block / unblock

Elements in the Chat window

List: Conversations
List: Message
Edit box: Text
Button: Send
Button: Quitt chat
Appendix x3: Notes on Windows CE and File
Synchronisation
To synchronize the planner and address book data with Outlook you
must have installed the right synchronisation program on the PC and a
partnership between both devices must been established.

You can use:

- Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5 under Windows XP / Windows 2000
- Microsoft Mobile Device Center 6.1 under Windows Vista
If this program is not yet installed on your PC you have to install it.

NB: The options and settings in Mobile Device Center and ActiveSync
are nearly the same, as Mobile Device Center replaces ActiveSync
under Windows Vista.

x3.1 Information on Windows CE and Database

Synchronisation
1. Windows CE devices are never switched off so that appointment and
contact data are always located on volatile RAM memory; they thus
have no off-button, only a stand-by mode. If the power is not
connected properly to the Windows CE device all appointments and
contacts will be lost. Windows CE devices are usually attached to fully-
equipped computers; they cannot function independently and are
designed for data exchange with a computer, and therefore have no
database files of their own.
When a Windows CE device is synchronised, the database in RAM is
compared with that of Outlook. Outlook saves it to a file (Outlook.pst),
and the CE device is saved to RAM only.

2. PRONTO is different. As it is designed to work as an independent

organiser without a computer, it can save contacts and appointments
in its own memory. You can decide whether or not Pronto should act
like a normal PDA. This should be considered carefully – your decision
will usually be determined by whether or not you want to synchronise
appointments and contacts with a computer. PDA mode leaves files
only in RAM and requires you to maintain the database on your PC.
Pronto mode, however, saves files to its internal memory so
synchronisation with your computer is not advised.

3. When PRONTO is switched to standby-mode with S4, the data

remain on the RAM and are available straight away when PRONTO is
“woken up”. The data will also be saved on Pronto’s internal memory
as a “databases.pdb” file for contact data and
“DatabaseAppointments.xml” file for planner data by default. To set
this Standard Pronto mode: open Prontomenu > Settings > Outlook
databases and activate both check boxes “automatically save when
switched off” and “automatically load on reboot”.

When Pronto, in PDA mode, is switched to standby mode with S4, the
databases remain in RAM and are available immediately after being
“woken up”. When shut down the device completely or if the battery is
too low, the database will be lost.

To set PDA mode: open “Prontomenu > Settings > Outlook Databases”
and deactivate both check boxes “automatically save when switched
off” and “automatically load on reboot”.

4. During synchronisation the contacts located on RAM are compared.

It is important to know this if one has made changes in PRONTO prior
to synchronisation. After synchronisation the contacts RAM are
synchronised. The Sync rule of Mobile Device Center or ActiveSync
regulates the procedure during synchronisation.

5. As long as Pronto is in PDA mode and no saved database files are

loaded to RAM, synchronisation with your computer’s Outlook
databases should be trouble-free.

If you load saved database files (backup) to the RAM and then
synchronise, problems may occur (e.g. duplication), as Microsoft
ActiveSync is not designed to synchronise with databases saved in the
interim.
On the computer Outlook will then create a kind of ID (identification
number) for each contact. The PC will thus know which contacts have
been synchronised, as the contacts in PRONTO’s RAM also carry these
ID numbers. If, in the meantime, PRONTO is shut down and restart or
reset, the contacts will be reloaded onto the RAM with a different ID
number allocated, and Outlook will not recognise them correctly during
synchronisation.
Take care when deleting. As long as a contact on the RAM has the
same ID as in Outlook, the deleted contact will also be deleted from
the other device during synchronisation, hence the saying “When the
user deletes a contact, he will no longer be in possession of it”.
If, for example, a deleted contact acquires another ID by saving the
database in PRONTO, it will be carried over as a new record during
synchronisation.

6. Find your preferred way of synchronising by trying out the individual

settings and options in ActiveSync resp. Mobile Device Center. Be
careful when synchronising for the first time; as a precaution save the
databases on your PC.
If you find that synchronisation is problematic, delete the permanent
partnership and try out other settings when you next make a
connection.

x3.2 Example of synchronisation with ActiveSync

1. establish connection
2. select new partnership
3. de-activate all check boxes in the following dialog, and then
select ”Finish”; the permanent full partnership is now set up
4. in ActiveSync open the “Tools” menu and select ‘Options’
5. in the dialog on the ‘Sync options’ tab, select the check boxes to
be synchronised, e.g. ‘Calendar’ and/or ‘Contacts’
6. select “Settings”
7. for these applications select which settings are to be
synchronised
8. then switch to the ‘Sync mode’ tab to select when and how the
synchronisation will take place
9. then switch to the ‘Rules’ tab control to select what is to be
synchronised
10. when all the settings have been made, close all dialogs with ‘OK’.

If you have selected ‘Manual’, synchronisation will begin when you

select ‘Synchronise’ from the ‘File’ menu.
If you have selected any other synchronisation rules, synchronisation
will take place in the background without any further commands or the
possibility of accessing the process every time PRONTO is connected to
a PC.

However the menu items and dialogs differ in Mobile device Center,
the intentionof are the same.

x3.3 Some “Rules”

The disappearance of appointments or contacts from the PC, or their
duplication following synchronisation can usually be explained (see
below) but not reversed. Below we have written a few notes which, on
the one hand, should lead to a better understanding of ActiveSync, and
on the other should help avoid any unpleasant surprises. The Outlook
contact and appointment file Outlook.pst should always be saved
before synchronisation on the PC, so that the previous status can be
reloaded if necessary.
It is also advisable to switch Pronto to PDA mode, as Pronto saves no
files and will be “fed” contacts and appointments only via the
computer. Synchronisation with loaded database files is also possible,
but usually produces undesirable effects.

1. During synchronisation PRONTO software affects nothing.

Synchronisation takes place entirely “underground” (at the level of the
active Windows CE operating system). Deleting the PRONTO software
and then synchronising would have the same effect.

2. ActiveSync or Mobile Device Center offers no setting which

corresponds to “Ready for Synchronisation? yes / no”. All settings refer
exclusively to appointments or contacts which will be changed
between two instances of synchronisation on BOTH devices. If, for
example, an appointment is deleted on PRONTO, ActiveSync interprets
this as a deliberate deletion and deletes it on the PC as well.

3. ActiveSync or Mobile Device Center saves its information (e.g. which

appointments are on PRONTO) within ‘Partnership Information’ on the
PC. This is another reason why PRONTO has barely any influence
during synchronisation.
It would thus seem that there are two more or less practical ways to
proceed:
A) ensure that Planner (Calendar) and Contacts on both PRONTO and
the PC are always up-to-date and regularly synchronised. It is thus
important not to select both check boxes in Prontomenu > Settings >
Outlook databases (PDA mode).
If you still want to synchronise saved and loaded database files, please
note the following:
- delete the partnership on the PC (so that ActiveSync has no
information about Pronto)
- reconnect and construct a new partnership; ActiveSync usually asks
what it should do i.e. it identifies a conflict and offers a one-off chance
to combine files or replace them.

B) Do not synchronise Calendars and maintain both “manually”.

Pronto’s database must be saved regularly to avoid any loss of data.
The saving and eventual loading of saved database (in Prontomenu >
Settings > Outlook databases) should not cause any problems.
Appendix x4 Short introduction to General
Bluetooth Usage

1. About this introduction

This introduction describes the installation of the DLINK DBT 120 USB
Bluetooth Adapter which is one of many ways to give your computer
Bluetooth functionality. The installation of the software, drivers and the
configuration are described. Go through this introduction step by step
to set up PRONTO as a Braille display via the Bluetooth port.
Chapter 2 describes all the steps required for installation. With
Windows XP Service Pack 2 installation is carried out automatically
with the Microsoft drivers, this is why we strongly recommend use with
Windows Xp Service Pack 2, so the installation CD is not necessary.
With Windows 2000 and Windows XP (withput SP2) the software and
drivers must be installed from the Bluetooth Adapter installation CD.
This is described in Chapter 2.1. With older operating systems
Bluetooth functionality cannot be guaranteed.
Chapter 3 describes the preparation of PRONTO for the Bluetooth
system and the switch over to use as a PC Braille display.
Chapter 4 contains important notes for smooth Bluetooth operation of
the Braille display.

NB:
This introduction refers to the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter
as we obtained good results with it under both Windows 2000 and
Windows XP, and because the software can be configured comfortably
and intuitively.

The DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter can of course be acquired
from BAUM Retec AG. It is not absolutely necessary to install this
particular device to use PRONTO as a Braille display under Bluetooth –
a different device can be used. If your computer already has a
Bluetooth transmitter, this can also be used, in which case this
introduction can serve as a reference guide for its configuration.

2. Installation of software, device drivers and first

steps with the Bluetooth environment and its
configuration

This chapter describes the installation of the DLINK DBT 120 USB
Bluetooth Adapter from the accompanying installation CD (software,
device drivers, first steps in the Bluetooth environment and its
configuration).

NB:
Please see chapter 2.2 for special instructions regarding the use of
Service Pack 2 for Windows XP. We strongly recommend use of
Bluetooth with Windows XP Service Pack 2 and Microsofts driver!

2.1 Installation of the software and driver for the DLINK

DBT 120 USB Bluetooth adapter (for Windows 2000 and
Windows XP (without SP2))

Switch on your PC and insert the installation CD provided with your

DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter into the CD-ROM drive. Open
the ‘Start’ menu, select ‘RUN/INSTALL’ and type the identification letter
of your CD-ROM drive followed by :\drivers\inst.exe, and press Return.

If your CD-ROM drive is the D drive, type the following:

D:\drivers\inst.exe

When this path has been input and the Return key pressed, the
installation program for the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter will
be launched and the first installation screen will appear. Click on
‘CONTINUE/NEXT’ to proceed to the next screen.

The second screen continues with the licence agreement. Select ‘I

accept the terms and conditions of this user licence’ and select ‘Next’.

The next screen contains a directory into which the files necessary for
use of this application will be copied. The path can be altered by
selecting the ‘Change’ button. Select ‘Next’ to install the application
into the given directory.

You will now see a message saying that the installation program is
ready to install the software for the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth
Adapter; click on ‘INSTALL’ to start.

As the driver needed to run the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter
has not received certification from Microsoft, a message will appear in
the next screen drawing this to your attention. Click on ‘OK’ to stop
your Microsoft operating system pointing this out several times during
the installation process and to avoid the need for you to click on
‘Proceed’ every time it happens.
NB:
When using Service Pack 2 for Windows XP you may still have to click
on ‘OK’, as Windows may warn you that you are about to install
software not certified by Microsoft and should thus stop the
installation. In this case click on ‘Next’ to install the software and
device driver.

The installation will now resume; the time required will vary depending
on the power of your system. During this time you can prepare
PRONTO for Bluetooth use and start the ‘PC Braille Display’ function
(see chapter 3).

If the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter has not yet been
connected to a USB-port on your PC, the installation program will tell
you. If so, connect the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter to a USB-
port on your PC (please see chapter 4.1 for further information) and
click on ‘OK’ to continue the installation. The device drivers will now be
installed – this can also take some time depending on the power of
your system. When finished you will receive a message saying that the
installation was successful and that you can end the installation wizard
by clicking on ‘Ready’.

The installation of the software and device drivers is now complete and
you can now concentrate on taking your first steps in the Bluetooth
environment and configuring the software.

2.2 Points to note when using Service Pack 2 for Windows

XP
Service Pack 2 for Windows XP already contains a Microsoft Bluetooth
device driver which can be used to operate PRONTO as a Braille
display.

We would advise you to use this Microsoft driver if Windows XP Service

Pack 2 is installed on your PC as this is the best known Bluetooth driver
available.

Simply proceed as described in chapter 2.2.1 to set up PRONTO with

the Microsoft Bluetooth driver delivered with Service Pack 2 for
Windows XP; the procedure described in chapter 2.1 for the DLINK DBT
120 USB Bluetooth Adapter can thus be ignored.

If, you want to use other special Bluetooth services not available in the
Microsoft driver we would advise the installation of the software and
drivers for the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter and its
configuration. Please see chapter 2.2.2 for the procedure that must be
followed after the installation procedure described in chapter 2.1 has
been completed so that PRONTO can operate smoothly as a PC Braille
display.

If you use the Windows 2000 or Windows XP with Service Pack 1

operating system, please ignore chapters 2.2.1 and 2.2.2, and proceed
directly to chapter 2.3.

2.2.1 Use of the Microsoft Bluetooth device driver

1. Switch on your computer and connect the DLINK DBT 120 USB
Blutooth Adapter to a USB-port. The automatic hardware detection will
be activated and the Microsoft Bluetooth device driver will be installed
independently. When installed, a symbol headed ‘Bluetooth Devices’
will appear at the bottom of the screen in the System tray, and the
Control Panel will contain a new element headed ‘Bluetooth Devices’ .
2. Switch PRONTO on. Open the PRONTO menu with S3, select
‘Settings/INTERFACES’ and click on ‘Bluetooth’
3. Start PRONTO’s Braille display application by opening the PRONTO
menu, selecting ‘Braille Display’ and opening the Command Menu with
‘Star with the left thumb key’ (B9B3B5). Now select
‘Connection/Bluetooth’, open the Command Menu once again and
select ‘Start Bluetooth’.
4. On your computer go to the Start button (Control + Escape, Escape)
and press ‘Shift + Tab’ twice to access the System tray. Use the left or
right arrow keys to go to the ‘Bluetooth devices’ symbol.
5. Now press the context menu key (or Shift + F10) to open the
context menu; use the up- or down-arrow key to select ‘Add Bluetooth
device’ and press ‘Return’.
6. A dialog will open. Press the space bar to activate the check box
“Device is installed and can be detected”. Then click on ‘Next’.
7. A Bluetooth device will now be sought; this can take some time.
When PRONTO is found the entry ‘PRONTO’ will appear in the list of
found devices.
8. Use the up or down arrows to reach the PRONTO entry. Use the Tab
key to reach the ‘Next’ button and select it.
9. In the next dialog select “get master key from documentation”. Use
the Tab key to go to the PIN field and type ‘1234’ without the inverted
commas. Then press ‘Next’.
10. The PIN is transmitted after a short while. Then press ‘Next’.
11. On PRONTO a dialog headed “Bluetooth Connection Device NAME”
opens. The PIN 1234 is already input. Select ‘OK’.
12. On the computer go to the ‘Bluetooth devices’ symbol in the
System tray, as described above in Step 4. Open the context menu,
select ‘Open Bluetooth settings’ and press ‘Return’.
13. A dialog will open. On the ‘Devices’ index card select the ‘PRONTO’
Braille display and then select ‘Properties’.
14. Use ‘Control + Tab’ to switch to the ‘Services’ index card to see
which serial port has been assigned by the system to the Braille
display. Make a note of it, as it will be required later to set the correct
serial port in Screen reader.
15. Finally, close all dialogs by pressing ‘OK’.

2.2.2 Using the installation CD for the manufacturer’s

software and Bluetooth device driver

With Service Pack 2 for Windows XP Microsoft provides its own driver
for Bluetooth devices. As no Bluetooth device drivers from other
manufacturers have yet been certified by Microsoft, the driver
provided by Microsoft will be selected and used in preference to
another manufacturer’s driver. Only if you do not want to use the
Microsoft driver for some special reason, insall an other driver. We
strongly recommend to stay with the Microsoft driver.

So that the Microsoft driver does not take over the running, swap the
Microsoft Bluetooth driver for the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth
Adapter provided by the manufacturer before you use the
configuration software for the Bluetooth environment for the first time.

Proceed as follows:
1. On your computer select the ‘Start’ menu, then ‘Settings’, ‘Control
Panel’, ‘System’
2. Select the ‘Hardware’ tab and then click on ‘Device Manager’
3. In the list use the up or down arrows to go to ‘Bluetooth radio
devices’ – use the right arrow key to select it
4. Use the up arrow to select ‘Generic Bluetooth radio’
5. Open the Shortcut menu Shift+F10. Use the up or down arrow to
access ‘Update driver’ and press ‘Return’
6. In the new dialog select ‘No’ and then ‘Next’
7. Now select ‘Install software from list or other source’ and then click
on ‘Next’
8. Select ‘Do not search, select driver to install’ and then click on
‘Next’
9. In the dialog use the Tab key to move between the available drivers.
The following are available:
Generic Bluetooth Radio
DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter
10. Use the arrow keys to select DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter
and click on ‘Next’.
The device driver for the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter will
now be installed. A message will appear when this is complete.
11. Click on ‘Ready’
12. This will take you back to ‘Device manager’. Note that the
‘Bluetooth radio devices’ entry has been changed to ‘Bluetooth
devices’, and that instead of ‘Generic Bluetooth device’, ‘DLINK DBT
120 USB Bluetooth Adapter’ will appear
13. Close ‘Device Manager’ and all open dialogs with ‘Alt+F4’ and
continue as described below in chapter 2.3

2.3 First use of the Bluetooth environment and software

configuration
As a connection to your PRONTO device will be constructed during
configuration, PRONTO must be switched on and ready for Bluetooth
use (see chapter 3).

In addition to the start button press ‘Shift+Tab’ twice to access the

System tray.

NB:
With Virgo the keypad command ‘N0,7’ (Key 7 on the comma level of
the keypad) allows the System tray to be accessed directly. In
Blindows, simply go to the START line (first line) and to the right.

Use the right- or left-arrow key to select the icon ‘Bluetooth to […]’
([…] stands for the name of your computer) and press ‘Return’ to start
the Bluetooth application for the first time.

In the first dialog you can determine if and where on the Windows
desktop links to the Bluetooth environment are to be set up. Click on
‘Next’ to access the next dialog. This will display the current computer
name and type. Click on ‘Next’ to access the next dialog.

Here, click on ‘Next’ to start the Bluetooth configuration wizard. The

next dialog will display the available Bluetooth services. Click on ‘Next’
to initialise the services shown and make them available on your
system – this can take some time depending on the power of your
system.

NB:
Switch on PRONTO now if you have not already done so and set it to
Bluetooth use for the following procedures to be successful.

The new dialog gives the option of searching for a Bluetooth device to
be used with a corresponding Bluetooth service. As you want your
PRONTO to operate via Bluetooth click on ‘Next’ to perform the search
and assign the device to the appropriate service.

The next dialog offers the options ‘Cancel search’, ‘Cancel’ and a list of
the Bluetooth devices found, if any. Use the Tab key to access this list
and the up- or down-arrow key to select ‘PRONTO’, and then click on
‘Next’ to pair up your computer and PRONTO. Now use the Tab key to
access the ‘Pincode’ field and type the PIN of the Bluetooth device –
1234 for Pronto.

Once you have input the PIN click on ‘Initialise connection’ to pair up
the devices. When paired up a further dialog will open from which you
must select the service to be accessed by the Bluetooth device. Use
the Tab key to select ‘Com Hardware’, press the space bar to activate
it by generating a virtual serial port via Bluetooth.

Activating this option opens a properties dialog for this Bluetooth

service. The virtual serial Bluetooth port created for PRONTO during
the initialisation procedure will be shown. The most important
information to note here are the details about the serial port
generated, e.g. COM 5.

NB:
The numbering of this serial port is dependent on the number of serial
ports already present on your computer, regardless of whether they
are physically available or virtual ports generated by the loading of
drivers, etc.

Please note which serial port is shown in this properties dialog, as you
will need to know this later to set up the correct interface in Screen
reader.

Click on ‘OK’ to close this dialog and return to the previous one. Here,
click on ‘Next’ then ‘OK’ to return to the exit dialog for the initialisation
of the Bluetooth wizard.

As you have located a Bluetooth device (PRONTO) and attached a

service with a serial port to it in the procedure described immediately
above, you can now click on ‘Skip’. You should now have a screen
informing you that the Bluetooth configuration was successful and
asking you to click on ‘Finish’ to close the wizard. Click on it and sit
back, as only one small thing need be done to bring the configuration
to a successful conclusion.

The last stage of the configuration requires a connection to be made

between the found Bluetooth device (PRONTO) and the serial port
generated via Bluetooth (COM5 in our example).
In addition to the start button press ‘Shift+Tab’ again twice to access
the System tray.
Use the right- or left-arrow key to select the icon ‘Bluetooth to […]’
([…] stands for the name of your computer) and open the context
menu either by pressing the context menu key or ‘Shift+F10’. From
the options offered use the up- or down-arrow key to select ‘quick
connection’. This option has a submenu which you can open either by
pressing ‘Return’ or by using the right-arrow key. Use the up- or down-
arrow key to select ‘Serial Bluetooth port’ which in turn has a submenu
which you can open either by pressing ‘Return’ or the right-arrow key.

Look for ‘PRONTO’, select it by using the up- or down-arrow key and
press ‘Return’.

This screen shows the status of the connection with the selected
Bluetooth device (i.e. PRONTO). If the connection has been successful
you will receive a message telling you that the connection between
your Bluetooth device and the virtual serial port assigned by this
device (COM5 in our example) has been established. Click on ‘OK’ to
confirm this message and close the ‘quick connection’ dialog.

Congratulations! You have just created the conditions required to use

your PRONTO as a Braille display via Bluetooth. To use this Braille
display with your Screen reader you must select the appropriate
settings in your Screen reader and set up the corresponding interface.
Chapter 3 describes how to do this for Virgo. See also chapter 16 of the
PRONTO manual for a description how to use Blindows, JAWS and
VIRGO with PRONTO.

3. Preparation of PRONTO as PC Braille display with

Bluetooth, and the required Virgo settings
In this chapter you will learn how PRONTO is prepared for Bluetooth
operation, and how the PC Braille display function is set up; you will
also learn the settings in the Virgo menu.

3.1 Preparation of PRONTO as PC Braille display with

Bluetooth
A basic introduction to the use of PRONTO and its keys is set out
below.

To activate Bluetooth functionality, proceed as follows:

1. Switch PRONTO on
2. Open the PRONTO menu with S3
3. Select ‘Settings’ then ‘Interfaces’
4. Click on ‘Bluetooth’ and close the dialog with ‘OK’.
NB: PRONTO will now send the radio signal defined for Bluetooth. While
PRONTO is in standby mode (S4) Bluetooth is not active but will restart
automatically when PRONTO is ‘woken up’. If PRONTO is rebooted
(system reset with S1+S4) the ‘Bluetooth’ check box in
‘Settings/Interfaces’ must be selected again.

To start the Braille display application in PRONTO, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Pronto menu with S3 and select ‘Braille display’
2. Call up the Menu with ‘Star with the left thumb key’ (B9B3B5), select
‘Connection’ and then ‘Bluetooth’
3. Open the Menu again as described above, and select ‘Start
Bluetooth’

PRONTO is now in Braille display mode. As soon as a connection to

Screen reader is established PRONTO will be selected and will display
the screen contents of your computer. The display and cursor routing
keys are available for line navigation, depending on the Screenreader.
The other PRONTO functions are unavailable in this mode. (In the latest
VIRGO version, the Braille keyboard can be used for typing).
To end the Braille display application open the PRONTO menu with S3,
select ‘Braille display’ and then ‘stop’.

3.2 Selection of PRONTO as Braille display in the Virgo

menu
Please verify that if PRONTO is to be used as a Braille display with
Virgo, Virgo 4.5 or later has been installed. If you have an older Virgo
version 4, you must upgrade.

To set up PRONTO as a PC Braille display with Virgo and an active

Bluetooth connection between PRONTO and your computer, proceed as
follows:

1. Open the Virgo menu by pressing the left Shift key quickly twice, or
by using the keypad command ‘N041’
2. Use either the Tab key, the left- or right-arrow key, or the up- or
down-arrow key to select the ‘Braille’ option and press ‘Return’ to open
the menu.
3. Select ‘Braille display’ with the up- or down-arrow key and press
‘Return’
4. In the ‘Braille display’ list use the up- or down-arrow key to select
‘BAUM PRONTO’
5. Use the Tab key to access the ‘Port’ list. Use the up- or down-arrow
key to select the serial port created by the system during Bluetooth
configuration (e.g. COM 5)
6. Press ‘Return’ to save these settings and close the dialog
7. You should now see something on the Braille display; to be precise,
it should be CB Braille
8. Press ‘Escape’ to close the Virgo menu

PRONTO can now be used immediately as a PC Braille display under

Bluetooth.

4. Notes on Bluetooth
In this chapter we would like to give you a few tips on how to use
Bluetooth as smoothly as possible.

4.1 Optimal Bluetooth send and receive conditions

Ensure that the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter is so placed
that the radio signal path between the adapter and your Braille display
is as free of obstacles as possible.

As most static PCs are placed under a table and their USB ports are
located on the front and back, you must avoid plugging the adapter
into the back of the device, as the signal will be emitted straight at a
wall or some other surface, and good send and receive conditions will
thus not be achieved from the very outset.

Connecting to a port on the front of the computer can produce

relatively trouble-free send and receive conditions; there is a risk,
however, that as the adapter sticks out, it may inadvertently come
loose or be knocked out.

For that reason we recommend that you use the accompanying USB
extension to connect the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth adapter
provided to your PC. This means that you can use a USB-port on the
back of your computer and place the adapter on the table or attach it
to a wall with sticky tape.

4.2 The Braille display reacts slowly or hardly at all

Despite the optimal send and receive conditions for Bluetooth
described in chapter 4.1, the Braille display can slow down or come to
a halt depending on the size of your premises and the distance
between the Braille display and the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth
Adapter. PRONTO could be too far away from the DLINK DBT 120 USB
Bluetooth Adapter or the Bluetooth radio signal could be restricted
because of spatial conditions (thick walls or steel-reinforced concrete
walls).

In this case reduce the distance between PRONTO and the DLINK DBT
120 USB Bluetooth Adapter to strengthen the radio signal

NB:
If your Braille display happens to be placed outside Bluetooth range
and you move it back within range, the system should detect the
Braille display automatically within 15 to 30 seconds and you will be
able to continue working without any trouble.

4.3 Standby mode on the Computer and Bluetooth system

of PRONTO used as a Braille display
If you often work with your system in standby mode, we recommend
the following:
- only switch your system to standby mode when the Braille display is
within Bluetooth radio range
- the same goes if you want to ‘wake up’ your system from standby
mode, but make sure that the Braille display is already switched on
when the system is re-activated
- should you ‘wake up’ your system from standby mode with your
Braille display outside Bluetooth range, Virgo can react slowly partly
because of your system’s permanently operating device search. Should
this happen move the activated Braille display back within Bluetooth
range and restart Virgo with left_shift_key+left_control_key+alt+7

4.4 Identifying the Bluetooth-generated serial port

Haven’t we all done it? You have used another Braille display with
another serial port and now want to use PRONTO as PC Braille display
but have forgotten which serial port was generated by the system
during the Bluetooth configuration.
No problem – use the DLINK DBT 120 USB Bluetooth Adapter software
to find out, as follows:
1. Open the ‘Start’ menu, select ‘Programs’, use the up or down arrow
to reach ‘Bluetooth environment’ and press ‘Return’
2. This will take you to a list in the main Bluetooth application window
where all Bluetooth devices are controlled
3. Use the up or down arrow to select PRONTO, press the context menu
key or ‘Shift+F10’ to open the context menu for this entry
4. Use the up- or down-arrow key to select ‘Properties’ and press
‘Return’
5. In the dialog use the Tab key to access the ‘COM port’ dropdown list
and find the serial port generated for Bluetooth connection to your
PRONTO
6. Press ‘Escape’ then ‘Alt+F4’ to close this dialog and the Bluetooth
environment
Appendix x5: Remote Screen Reader
The Application Pronto Remote Screen Reader and its instruction is
optional available only for Pronto 18 devices on the homepage.

http://download.baum-retec.info/pms/pronto/rsr/rsr_remotesystem.zip